ProWv Eng PDF

SAPSproW v19
programming of NC cutting machines
Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

2 SAPSproW v19
Content
0
Chapter I SAPSproW 21
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 21
2 Contact
................................................................................................................................... 21
3 Terminology,
...................................................................................................................................
user interface 21
4 Programs
...................................................................................................................................
in SAPSproW 22
SAPSW program
.......................................................................................................................................................... 22
SCADW module
.......................................................................................................................................................... 23
TABLES ..........................................................................................................................................................
module 23
VIEWER ..........................................................................................................................................................
module 23
Chapter II Installation 26
1 Hardware
................................................................................................................................... 26
2 Installation
................................................................................................................................... 26
3 Limitations
................................................................................................................................... 26
4 Setting
................................................................................................................................... 26
Before the
..........................................................................................................................................................
first start 26
Before the
..........................................................................................................................................................
first start of SAPSproW 26
SAPSproW
..........................................................................................................................................................
windows on more monitors 27
The USERSPECIFIC.TXT
..........................................................................................................................................................
file 27
5 Update
................................................................................................................................... 27
Chapter III First steps 29

1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 29
2 Recalling
...................................................................................................................................
of the last nesting layout 29
3 Automatic
...................................................................................................................................
creation of lead-ins 29
4 Autom.
...................................................................................................................................
determ. of the cutting order 29
5 Change
...................................................................................................................................
of SAPSW setup 30
6 Change
...................................................................................................................................
of lead-ins in the whole nesting layout 30
7 Automatic
...................................................................................................................................
nesting 30
8 Work...................................................................................................................................
with a table 30
9 Technologic-economical
...................................................................................................................................
data 30
10 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
nesting 31
11 Recalling
...................................................................................................................................
of an old layout 31
12 Addition
...................................................................................................................................
of parts 31
Chapter IV What is it? 33

1 Main program
...................................................................................................................................
window 33

Content 3
2 Working
...................................................................................................................................
directory 33
3 Standard
...................................................................................................................................
data 33
4 Labeling
...................................................................................................................................
of parts 33
5 Automatic
...................................................................................................................................
labeling 34
6 Label...................................................................................................................................
of nesting layout 34
7 In the...................................................................................................................................
sphere of cutting 34
Technology
..........................................................................................................................................................
of cutting 34
Lead-in .......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Hole with..........................................................................................................................................................
a lead-in 34
Lead-out.......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Chain cutting
.......................................................................................................................................................... 35
"Tree" chain
..........................................................................................................................................................
cutting 35
Common..........................................................................................................................................................
edge cutting 35
Kerf compensation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Stitch .......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Bridge .......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Compensation
..........................................................................................................................................................
of shortening 36
Remnant..........................................................................................................................................................
plate 36
Part - only
..........................................................................................................................................................
holes 37
8 In the...................................................................................................................................
area of NC-programming 37
Pull the ..........................................................................................................................................................
window 37
ESSI-format
.......................................................................................................................................................... 37
ISO/DIN format
.......................................................................................................................................................... 37
ESSI-macro
.......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Nesting layout
.......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Number of
..........................................................................................................................................................
plates 38
Contour .......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Continuous
..........................................................................................................................................................
contour 38
Profile - uncontinuous
..........................................................................................................................................................
contour 39
NC-program
..........................................................................................................................................................
without compensation 39
Collision..........................................................................................................................................................
control 39
Number of
..........................................................................................................................................................
drawing 39
Databank.......................................................................................................................................................... 39
GEO files.......................................................................................................................................................... 39
DXF files.......................................................................................................................................................... 39
VYK files.......................................................................................................................................................... 40
DTL files.......................................................................................................................................................... 40
ZBY files .......................................................................................................................................................... 40
PLA files.......................................................................................................................................................... 40
NCP files.......................................................................................................................................................... 40
MKR files.......................................................................................................................................................... 40
9 SAPSproW
...................................................................................................................................
files 40
Files in the
..........................................................................................................................................................
SAPSproW 40
System files
.......................................................................................................................................................... 40
User´s files
.......................................................................................................................................................... 41
10 Data in
...................................................................................................................................
tables 41
STANDARD
..........................................................................................................................................................
table 41
SHEETS ..........................................................................................................................................................
table 41
PARTS table
.......................................................................................................................................................... 42
NESTINGS
..........................................................................................................................................................
table 42
REMNANTS
..........................................................................................................................................................
table 43
3
4 SAPSproW v19
Chapter V How to use? 45

1 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
help 45
2 Unassigned
...................................................................................................................................
help 45
3 Main window
...................................................................................................................................
of the program 45
4 Notes................................................................................................................................... 45
5 Cancel
...................................................................................................................................
the cursor movement limitation 45
6 Backup
...................................................................................................................................
copy of SAPSproW 45
7 Archiving
...................................................................................................................................
files 46
8 Material
...................................................................................................................................
quality and specific weight 46
9 Control
...................................................................................................................................
with keyboard, mouse 47
Shortkeys
.......................................................................................................................................................... 47
Right button
..........................................................................................................................................................
of the mouse 47
Enlarging,
..........................................................................................................................................................
shifting 47
Mouse roller
.......................................................................................................................................................... 47
10 Data exchange
...................................................................................................................................
with external programs 48
Data import
..........................................................................................................................................................
from a production control system 48
Output from
..........................................................................................................................................................
tables 48
Output of..........................................................................................................................................................
ECO files 48
11 Changing
...................................................................................................................................
the names 49
Changing..........................................................................................................................................................
the part names 49
Changing..........................................................................................................................................................
the layout names 49
12 Work...................................................................................................................................
in the net 49
Work in the
..........................................................................................................................................................
net 49
Choice of..........................................................................................................................................................
the computer 49
13 VIEWER
................................................................................................................................... 49
VIEWER .......................................................................................................................................................... 49
Display/take
..........................................................................................................................................................
off the screen 49
Change VIEWER
..........................................................................................................................................................
parts from the table 50
14 Working
...................................................................................................................................
directory 50
Create a ..........................................................................................................................................................
new working directory 50
Choose the
..........................................................................................................................................................
working directory 50
Cancel the
..........................................................................................................................................................
working directory 50
15 Tables
................................................................................................................................... 50
Columns..........................................................................................................................................................
width 50
Print out ..........................................................................................................................................................
the tables 50
Sort the lines
.......................................................................................................................................................... 51
Standard..........................................................................................................................................................
sorting of lines 51
Packing of
..........................................................................................................................................................
tables 51
Select lines
..........................................................................................................................................................
in table 51
"Standard"
.......................................................................................................................................................... 51
Choose
.........................................................................................................................................................
the standard data 51
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
the standard data 51
Correction
.........................................................................................................................................................
of the table data 52
Price.........................................................................................................................................................
of cutting 52
New.........................................................................................................................................................
standard data 52
New standard
.........................................................................................................................................
data 52
Add the lines
.........................................................................................................................................
of another table 52

Content 5
Copy and correct

.........................................................................................................................................
a line 53
"Plates" .......................................................................................................................................................... 53
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
plates 53
A new
.........................................................................................................................................................
plate into the table 53
"Parts" .......................................................................................................................................................... 53
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
parts 53
Reset
.........................................................................................................................................................
the actual quantities 53
Get GEO
.........................................................................................................................................................
data 53
Get REQ
.........................................................................................................................................................
data 54
Label.........................................................................................................................................................
the parts 54
Cutting
.........................................................................................................................................................
time 55
Material
.........................................................................................................................................................
consumption 55
Weight
......................................................................................................................................................... 55
Filter......................................................................................................................................................... 55
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
lines from the table 55
Changing
.........................................................................................................................................................
pieces in the GEO files 55
Find .........................................................................................................................................................
identical 55
Copy.........................................................................................................................................................
elsewhere 55
Optimal
.........................................................................................................................................................
layout 56
"Nestings"
.......................................................................................................................................................... 56
Select,
.........................................................................................................................................................
search out... the layouts 56
Reset
.........................................................................................................................................................
the table 56
Cancel
.........................................................................................................................................................
the nesting layouts 56
"Remnants"
.......................................................................................................................................................... 56
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
remnants 56
Remnants
......................................................................................................................................................... 56
Import tables
..........................................................................................................................................................
in EXCEL 56
16 Error ...................................................................................................................................
states of SAPSproW 56
Errors in ..........................................................................................................................................................
tables 56
Error statistics
.......................................................................................................................................................... 57
Chapter VI Settings 59
1 Types...................................................................................................................................
of settings 59
2 Save settings
................................................................................................................................... 59
3 Main window
...................................................................................................................................
of the program 59
Main menu
.......................................................................................................................................................... 59
Drop-down
..........................................................................................................................................................
lists 59
Working
.........................................................................................................................................................
directory 59
Machine
.........................................................................................................................................................
- standard data 59
Names
.........................................................................................................................................................
of parts 59
Check boxes
.......................................................................................................................................................... 59
More......................................................................................................................................................... 59
Contours
......................................................................................................................................................... 59
List ......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Viewer
......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Pieces
......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Thick./Qual
......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Width
......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Bench
......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Lamellas
......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Over......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Same
......................................................................................................................................................... 60
5
6 SAPSproW v19
4 Print setting,
...................................................................................................................................
DXF 60
Basic possibilities
.......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Drawing ..........................................................................................................................................................
layout 61
Layout
.........................................................................................................................................................
title 61
Direction
.........................................................................................................................................................
of cutting 61
Distance
......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Point.........................................................................................................................................................
- centre sign 61
High-speed
.........................................................................................................................................................
shift 61
DXF/DWG
.......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Length
.........................................................................................................................................................
of lines 61
Directory
.........................................................................................................................................................
for DXF 61
Height
.........................................................................................................................................................
of the text 61
Texts .......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Parts´
.........................................................................................................................................................
title 61
Texts......................................................................................................................................................... 61
ECO .......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Notes
.........................................................................................................................................................
for the machine operator 61
Every
.........................................................................................................................................................
change of cutting heads 61
Cutting
.........................................................................................................................................................
length of 1 piece 61
Cutting
.........................................................................................................................................................
time to the ECO 62
Cutting
.........................................................................................................................................................
time to TXT file 62
Lines .......................................................................................................................................................... 62
Thickness
.........................................................................................................................................................
of lines 62
5 Machine
...................................................................................................................................
independent settings 62
SHAPE tab
.......................................................................................................................................................... 62
Languages
......................................................................................................................................................... 62
Language of.........................................................................................................................................
help 62
Languages ......................................................................................................................................... 62
Not translated
.........................................................................................................................................
rows 62
Show
.........................................................................................................................................................
the text of NC program 62
Draw.........................................................................................................................................................
the distance 62
Selection
.........................................................................................................................................................
box of parts 63
Screen
......................................................................................................................................................... 63
Percent ......................................................................................................................................... 63
Font size ......................................................................................................................................... 63
Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 63
Length of the
.........................................................................................................................................
screen 63
Height of the.........................................................................................................................................
screen 63
Distance from
.........................................................................................................................................
the X edge 63
Distance from
.........................................................................................................................................
the Y edge 63
Icons ......................................................................................................................................... 63
Colour palette
......................................................................................................................................... 63
Setting of special
.........................................................................................................................................
colours 63
Sign.........................................................................................................................................................
of cutting head 63
Shape
.........................................................................................................................................................
of the mouse cursor 63
Cross
.........................................................................................................................................................
width 64
Cross for the.........................................................................................................................................
lead-ins control 64
Cross for nonexistent
.........................................................................................................................................
lead-ins 64
Cross for a joint
.........................................................................................................................................
cut 64
Hints......................................................................................................................................................... 64
Hint time ......................................................................................................................................... 64
Font size for.........................................................................................................................................
hints 64
Flat .........................................................................................................................................................
buttons 64

Content 7
CONTROL
..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 64
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
saving 64
Zoom
.........................................................................................................................................................
in repeatedly 64
Shift.........................................................................................................................................................
repeatedly 64
Layouts
.........................................................................................................................................................
next to/over each other 64
Same
.........................................................................................................................................................
drawing scale 64
Only.........................................................................................................................................................
for system tests 64
Notes
.........................................................................................................................................................
for the machine operator 65
Recall
.........................................................................................................................................................
the print window 65
Showing
.........................................................................................................................................................
VIEWER with a single click 65
Report
.........................................................................................................................................................
about torches 65
Pull the
.........................................................................................................................................................
chain cutting 65
Verification
.........................................................................................................................................................
of PARTS 65
Only.........................................................................................................................................................
pieces on the plate 65
Speed
.........................................................................................................................................................
up the dulications 65
JPG/PNG
......................................................................................................................................................... 65
Step.........................................................................................................................................................
of dyn.shift 65
Step.........................................................................................................................................................
of scale change 65
Maximum
.........................................................................................................................................................
number of layouts 66
Files.........................................................................................................................................................
to the basket 66
Sound
.........................................................................................................................................................
signal 66
Inhibit beep ......................................................................................................................................... 66
System sound
......................................................................................................................................... 66
Length of tone
......................................................................................................................................... 66
Height of tone
......................................................................................................................................... 66
PARTS tab
.......................................................................................................................................................... 66
Colour
.........................................................................................................................................................
in parts 66
Draw.........................................................................................................................................................
inside points 66
Draw.........................................................................................................................................................
endpoints 66
Bended
.........................................................................................................................................................
part rotate 66
Texts.........................................................................................................................................................
drawing 67
GEO-file name
......................................................................................................................................... 67
Drawing number
......................................................................................................................................... 67
Order ......................................................................................................................................... 67
Order according
.........................................................................................................................................
to various parts 67
Distance of .........................................................................................................................................
lines 67
Font size ......................................................................................................................................... 67
Text in the middle
......................................................................................................................................... 67
Bold font ......................................................................................................................................... 67
Draw.........................................................................................................................................................
the direction 67
Draw the direction
......................................................................................................................................... 67
Min.length of.........................................................................................................................................
section 67
Arrow length......................................................................................................................................... 67
Length for arrows
......................................................................................................................................... 67
Line .........................................................................................................................................................
width 67
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
position of a part 68
Division number
......................................................................................................................................... 68
Position exactness
......................................................................................................................................... 68
Control of the
.........................................................................................................................................
last burner 68
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
lead-ins 68
Lead-in deviation
......................................................................................................................................... 68
Lead-ins control
......................................................................................................................................... 68
Lead-in in a .........................................................................................................................................
section 68
Flash - lead-in
......................................................................................................................................... 68
7
8 SAPSproW v19
NESTINGS
..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 68
Cutting
.........................................................................................................................................................
order 68
"X-strip : table
.........................................................................................................................................
width" window 68
"Referential .........................................................................................................................................
point" choice 68
"Multiplier for
.........................................................................................................................................
X" window 69
Overlap in %......................................................................................................................................... 69
Remnants
......................................................................................................................................................... 69
Create ......................................................................................................................................... 69
Create remnants
.........................................................................................................................................
from holes 69
Separation of
.........................................................................................................................................
the remnants 69
Global remnant
.........................................................................................................................................
plates 69
Filename - running
.........................................................................................................................................
number 69
Distance of .........................................................................................................................................
strips 69
Distance from
.........................................................................................................................................
edges 69
Minimal area......................................................................................................................................... 70
Minimal area.........................................................................................................................................
for flattening 70
Status
.........................................................................................................................................................
message time 70
Ruler.........................................................................................................................................................
font 70
Screen
.........................................................................................................................................................
division 70
AUT.NESTING
..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 71
Position
.........................................................................................................................................................
of parts 71
Step ......................................................................................................................................... 71
Ban on mirroring
......................................................................................................................................... 71
Number of turnings
......................................................................................................................................... 71
Analytical location
......................................................................................................................................... 71
Technology
......................................................................................................................................................... 71
Aut.lead-ins......................................................................................................................................... 71
NC-program......................................................................................................................................... 71
Aut.order of.........................................................................................................................................
parts 71
Time.........................................................................................................................................................
statement 71
ECO tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 71
Font.........................................................................................................................................................
size 71
ECO.........................................................................................................................................................
data into XLS file 72
ECO.........................................................................................................................................................
data into TXT file 72
Production
.........................................................................................................................................................
management 72
LOGFILE.TXT
.........................................................................................................................................................
directory 72
NC PROG..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 72
Draw......................................................................................................................................................... 72
Multi-heads ......................................................................................................................................... 72
High-speed .........................................................................................................................................
shift 72
Square ......................................................................................................................................... 72
Slow down ......................................................................................................................................... 72
Slowing-down
.........................................................................................................................................
step 72
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
chain cutting 72
Angle of the.........................................................................................................................................
chain cutting's side 72
Distance of .........................................................................................................................................
chain cutting 73
Stitches
......................................................................................................................................................... 73
Proportions .........................................................................................................................................
of sides 73
LINK.........................................................................................................................................................
directory 73
BAT-file ......................................................................................................................................... 73
Display MSDOS
......................................................................................................................................... 73
Stop.........................................................................................................................................................
after the prog.stop 73
NET tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 73
Connection
.........................................................................................................................................................
path 73

Content 9
Test ......................................................................................................................................................... 73
Import
......................................................................................................................................................... 73
GEO.........................................................................................................................................................
files to a cache 74
Multiply
.........................................................................................................................................................
connection 74
Network
.........................................................................................................................................................
key 74
UPDATE ..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 74
Updating
.........................................................................................................................................................
of SAPSproW 74
File .........................................................................................................................................................
list 74
SERVICE..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 74
Tables
.........................................................................................................................................................
in TXT format 74
Tables
......................................................................................................................................................... 74
Status of tables
......................................................................................................................................... 74
Defragmentation
.........................................................................................................................................
of tables 74
Verification of
.........................................................................................................................................
PARTS 75
Checking REMNANTS
......................................................................................................................................... 75
Clean STANDARD
......................................................................................................................................... 75
Create STANDARD
......................................................................................................................................... 75
PRESENTATION
..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 75
Repeat
.........................................................................................................................................................
of presentation 75
Speed
......................................................................................................................................................... 75
Table
.........................................................................................................................................................
of times 75
6 Settings,
...................................................................................................................................
dependent on the machine 75
NC-machine
..........................................................................................................................................................
and control data 75
Base settings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 76
Page.........................................................................................................................................................
1 76
Kind of NC machine
......................................................................................................................................... 76
Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 76
High-speed...................................................................................................................................
move 76
Step in the NC
...................................................................................................................................
program 76
Direction of...................................................................................................................................
cutting 76
Direction of...................................................................................................................................
holes cutting 76
Thickness ................................................................................................................................... 76
Direct connection
................................................................................................................................... 76
Remnant plates
...................................................................................................................................
in the machine 76
NC programs
...................................................................................................................................
in the machine 77
Zero of NC-machine
................................................................................................................................... 77
Cutting parameters
................................................................................................................................... 77
Time of lifting
...................................................................................................................................
the cutting head 77
Cutting heads
......................................................................................................................................... 77
Cutting heads
................................................................................................................................... 77
Driven cutting
...................................................................................................................................
head 77
Auxiliary equipments
................................................................................................................................... 77
Page.........................................................................................................................................................
2 77
Cutting bench
......................................................................................................................................... 77
Working width
................................................................................................................................... 77
Bench of NC
...................................................................................................................................
machine 77
Aut.torch span
......................................................................................................................................... 77
Switch on ................................................................................................................................... 77
Move to zero
................................................................................................................................... 77
|Head code ......................................................................................................................................... 77
Adressing of...................................................................................................................................
heads 77
Page.........................................................................................................................................................
3 78
NC program......................................................................................................................................... 78
Control ................................................................................................................................... 78
9
10 SAPSproW v19
Maximum length
...................................................................................................................................
of NC program 78
Extension for
...................................................................................................................................
LINK 78
Error in arcs...................................................................................................................................
in NC programs 78
Height of heads
................................................................................................................................... 78
Point of lead-in
...................................................................................................................................
... 78
Velocity ................................................................................................................................... 78
Change of kerf
...................................................................................................................................
compensation 78
Identification
...................................................................................................................................
of holes 79
Value of kerf
...................................................................................................................................
compensation 79
Minimum arc
................................................................................................................................... 79
Control sign................................................................................................................................... 79
Comment ................................................................................................................................... 79
Numbering ...................................................................................................................................
of Nxxx lines 79
Start of NC-program
................................................................................................................................... 79
Finish of NC-program
................................................................................................................................... 79
Parity ................................................................................................................................... 79
NC code ......................................................................................................................................... 79
Control codes
................................................................................................................................... 79
NC code for...................................................................................................................................
transposition 79
Page.........................................................................................................................................................
4 80
Marker ......................................................................................................................................... 80
Marking ................................................................................................................................... 80
Offset ................................................................................................................................... 80
Cutted mark...................................................................................................................................
length 80
Quick marking
................................................................................................................................... 80
Stop after marking
................................................................................................................................... 80
Mark in advance
................................................................................................................................... 80
Marker MikroSchlage
......................................................................................................................................... 80
Allow "MikroSchlage"
................................................................................................................................... 80
Offset ................................................................................................................................... 80
Marking at ...................................................................................................................................
first 80
Stop before...................................................................................................................................
marking 80
Stop after marking
................................................................................................................................... 80
Speed ................................................................................................................................... 80
Length ................................................................................................................................... 80
Width ................................................................................................................................... 80
Type of marking
................................................................................................................................... 80
Plasmawriter
.........................................................................................................................................
ArcWriter 81
Power control
......................................................................................................................................... 81
Page.........................................................................................................................................................
5 81
Three-torch .........................................................................................................................................
cutting 81
Drilling machine
......................................................................................................................................... 81
BAZ machine
......................................................................................................................................... 81
Mechanics
.......................................................................................................................................................... 81
Quality
.........................................................................................................................................................
and specific weight 81
Jet cleaning
.........................................................................................................................................................
time 81
Price.........................................................................................................................................................
of the machine time 82
Relay
.........................................................................................................................................................
of table 82
Min.high-speed
.........................................................................................................................................................
shift 82
Verify
.........................................................................................................................................................
openings 82
Control .......................................................................................................................................................... 82
NCP-file
......................................................................................................................................................... 82
Notes ......................................................................................................................................... 82
Start-finish in
.........................................................................................................................................
NC 82

Content 11
Comment 3-4
......................................................................................................................................... 82
Draw the sequence
.........................................................................................................................................
in successive steps 82
Points for the
.........................................................................................................................................
drilling gauge 83
Automatic joint
.........................................................................................................................................
cuts 83
Using plate edges
......................................................................................................................................... 83
Program user
......................................................................................................................................... 83
NC program.........................................................................................................................................
without compensation 83
Speed
.........................................................................................................................................................
restriction 83
According to.........................................................................................................................................
parameters 83
Small holes ......................................................................................................................................... 83
On contour end
......................................................................................................................................... 83
Corner slow-down
......................................................................................................................................... 83
Check
.........................................................................................................................................................
the layouts name 83
Remnants
.........................................................................................................................................................
to DXF too 84
Global
.........................................................................................................................................................
remnant plate directory 84
Name
.........................................................................................................................................................
of LINK directory 84
Outer
.........................................................................................................................................................
EXE or BAT- file 84
Global
.........................................................................................................................................................
details directory 84
Control 2.......................................................................................................................................................... 84
Drive.........................................................................................................................................................
burners away 84
Detaching
.........................................................................................................................................................
of stitches 85
By-pass
.........................................................................................................................................................
of table 85
Create ......................................................................................................................................... 85
Kind of by-pass
......................................................................................................................................... 85
Direction of .........................................................................................................................................
by-pass 85
Program tracks
......................................................................................................................................... 85
Drive-away
.........................................................................................................................................................
in the end 85
Cutting
.........................................................................................................................................................
order of holes 85
Enable
.........................................................................................................................................................
automatic changing... 86
Bridge
.........................................................................................................................................................
with arcs 86
Cut the
.........................................................................................................................................................
scrap 86
Cut the
.........................................................................................................................................................
scrap on plate edge 86
Minimal
.........................................................................................................................................................
detaching length 86
Maximal
.........................................................................................................................................................
length of label 86
Actuate
.........................................................................................................................................................
the amount 86
Ride.........................................................................................................................................................
to the base side 86
Lead-in /..........................................................................................................................................................
lead-out / transition 86
Aut. .........................................................................................................................................................
lead-in 86
Aut. lead-ins......................................................................................................................................... 86
Kind of lead-in
......................................................................................................................................... 87
Preferred direction
......................................................................................................................................... 87
Initial.........................................................................................................................................................
... 87
Triangle
......................................................................................................................................................... 87
Lead-out
......................................................................................................................................................... 87
Elongation, .........................................................................................................................................
in holes 87
Elongation, in
.........................................................................................................................................
outer contour 87
Min. angle of.........................................................................................................................................
corner 88
Min. angle of.........................................................................................................................................
transition 88
Transition with
.........................................................................................................................................
lead-out 88
Direction in holes
......................................................................................................................................... 88
Direction in outer
.........................................................................................................................................
contour 88
After common
.........................................................................................................................................
edge cut 88
Deflexion ......................................................................................................................................... 88
Import .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
11
12 SAPSproW v19
Import
.........................................................................................................................................................
setup 89
Analyse
......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Piece
.........................................................................................................................................................
control 89
Code.........................................................................................................................................................
ESSI 89
Control
.........................................................................................................................................................
sign 89
Step.........................................................................................................................................................
in the NC program 89
Permitted
.........................................................................................................................................................
error ESSI 89
Code.........................................................................................................................................................
ISO/DIN 89
Permitted
.........................................................................................................................................................
error ISO/DIN 89
Prefix
.........................................................................................................................................................
GEO 89
Kerf ......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Min. .........................................................................................................................................................
width of stitch 90
Max.width
.........................................................................................................................................................
of stitch 90
Sort .........................................................................................................................................................
of stitch 90
Chapter VII SAPSW 92

1 Nesting
...................................................................................................................................
of layouts 92
A new nesting
..........................................................................................................................................................
layout creation 92
Plates
.........................................................................................................................................................
on the working table 92
Nesting
.........................................................................................................................................................
layout for a whole plate 93
Working
.........................................................................................................................................................
with remnants 94
Nesting
.........................................................................................................................................................
layout for a remnant plate 94
Duplicate
.........................................................................................................................................................
from a layout 94
A copy
.........................................................................................................................................................
of the nesting for another machine 95
Layout
.........................................................................................................................................................
from circles 95
Automatic
..........................................................................................................................................................
nesting 95
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
nesting of one layout 95
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
nesting of all layouts 95
Automatic nesting
.........................................................................................................................................
of all layouts 95
Preparing for
.........................................................................................................................................
the nesting 96
Setting ......................................................................................................................................... 96
"In" tab ................................................................................................................................... 96
"Pair" tab ................................................................................................................................... 97
"TLG" tab ................................................................................................................................... 98
"Out" tab ................................................................................................................................... 98
List of parts,
...................................................................................................................................
plates 98
Start of nesting
......................................................................................................................................... 99
End of nesting
......................................................................................................................................... 99
Old layouts
.......................................................................................................................................................... 99
Recall
.........................................................................................................................................................
the last layout 99
Recall
.........................................................................................................................................................
one nesting layout 100
Recall
.........................................................................................................................................................
a nesting from the list of layouts 100
Recall
.........................................................................................................................................................
more layouts at once 100
Remnants
.......................................................................................................................................................... 100
Remnants
.........................................................................................................................................................
creation 100
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
remnant 101
Remnants
.........................................................................................................................................................
cancel 101
Remnant
.........................................................................................................................................................
separation 101
Max.window
..........................................................................................................................................................
dimension for a nesting 102
Zoom in.......................................................................................................................................................... 102
Shift of ..........................................................................................................................................................
the table picture 102
Choose..........................................................................................................................................................
a part or a group 102
Dynamic..........................................................................................................................................................
zoom, shift 103

Content 13
Dynamic
.........................................................................................................................................................
zoom-in, shift 103
Dynamic
.........................................................................................................................................................
shift 103
Dynamic
.........................................................................................................................................................
zoom-in 103
Burners.......................................................................................................................................................... 103
Changes
.........................................................................................................................................................
of cutting heads 103
Change
.........................................................................................................................................................
for new parts 104
Change
.........................................................................................................................................................
for saved parts 104
Change..........................................................................................................................................................
of layout's data 104
Save a layout
..........................................................................................................................................................
and NC-program 105
Move a ..........................................................................................................................................................
layout to other directory 105
Move many
..........................................................................................................................................................
layouts to other directory 105
Technol-economic
..........................................................................................................................................................
data 105
One step
..........................................................................................................................................................
UnDo 106
Groups ..........................................................................................................................................................
in the VIEWER 106
Insert a ..........................................................................................................................................................
part 106
Insert
.........................................................................................................................................................
a part into the layout 106
Insert
.........................................................................................................................................................
a part from the VIEWER 106
Insert
.........................................................................................................................................................
according to the name 107
Confirm
.........................................................................................................................................................
the part´s position in the layout 107
Correct
.........................................................................................................................................................
a part of the layout 107
Use.........................................................................................................................................................
of material 107
Simpler..........................................................................................................................................................
handling 107
Add a part
.......................................................................................................................................................... 107
Add.........................................................................................................................................................
automatically 107
Add.........................................................................................................................................................
interactively 108
Add.........................................................................................................................................................
in a column/line of parts 108
Optimalization
......................................................................................................................................................... 108
Change..........................................................................................................................................................
the position of the part 108
Change
.........................................................................................................................................................
the position 108
Control
.........................................................................................................................................................
of the last head 109
Enlarge
.........................................................................................................................................................
distances automatically 109
Reduce
.........................................................................................................................................................
distances automatically 109
Types
.........................................................................................................................................................
of changes 109
Pull a part ......................................................................................................................................... 109
Mirror a part
......................................................................................................................................... 109
Turn up a part
......................................................................................................................................... 109
Turn up by.........................................................................................................................................
one step 109
Shift to the.........................................................................................................................................
stop 109
Shift by one
.........................................................................................................................................
step 110
Analytically
.........................................................................................................................................................
exact position of parts 110
Shift exactly
.........................................................................................................................................
to the corner of the plate 110
Shift exactly
.........................................................................................................................................
to the edge of the plate 110
Shift exactly
.........................................................................................................................................
to another part 110
From a ..........................................................................................................................................................
layout to another layout 110
Transfer
.........................................................................................................................................................
a part or a group 110
Erase parts
.......................................................................................................................................................... 111
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
parts 111
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
the last part 111
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
by ordinal number 111
Work with
..........................................................................................................................................................
layouts in the table 111
Select
.........................................................................................................................................................
a line of the layout 111
Search
.........................................................................................................................................................
out layouts 111
Create
.........................................................................................................................................................
a list 111
Count
.........................................................................................................................................................
of parts 112
13
14 SAPSproW v19
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
layouts from the table 112
Erase
.........................................................................................................................................................
layouts with files 112
2 TLG...................................................................................................................................
tab - technology of cutting 112
Lead-ins.......................................................................................................................................................... 112
Lead-ins
......................................................................................................................................................... 112
Cancel
.........................................................................................................................................................
a lead-in 112
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
lead-ins 113
Setting aut.lead-ins
......................................................................................................................................... 113
Automatic .........................................................................................................................................
lead-ins 113
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
lead-ins 113
Abscissa lead-ins
......................................................................................................................................... 113
Arc lead-ins
......................................................................................................................................... 114
Flash - lead-in
.........................................................................................................................................
for plasma 114
Lead-ins for
.........................................................................................................................................
thick sheets 115
Lead-ins for
...................................................................................................................................
thick plates 115
Lead-in with
...................................................................................................................................
a triangle 115
Lock - profile
................................................................................................................................... 115
Lock - transfer
................................................................................................................................... 116
"Redrill" for...................................................................................................................................
advance 116
"Overfire" for
...................................................................................................................................
advance 116
Chain cutting
.......................................................................................................................................................... 117
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
chain cutting 117
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
chain cutting 117
Chain
.........................................................................................................................................................
in a column/line of parts 117
"Tree"
.........................................................................................................................................................
chain cutting 118
Chain
.........................................................................................................................................................
cutting in a hole 119
Direction
..........................................................................................................................................................
of cutting 119
Stitch .......................................................................................................................................................... 119
Bridges.......................................................................................................................................................... 120
Bridge
......................................................................................................................................................... 120
Bridge
.........................................................................................................................................................
for a cut-off 120
Bridge
.........................................................................................................................................................
by one line 120
Bridge
.........................................................................................................................................................
between circles 120
Lead-outs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 121
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
lead-out 121
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
lead-out 121
Common
..........................................................................................................................................................
edge cutting 121
Cancel the
..........................................................................................................................................................
technology of cutting 121
Cutting ..........................................................................................................................................................
order 122
Cutting
.........................................................................................................................................................
order 122
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
cutting order 122
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
cutting order 122
Cutting
.........................................................................................................................................................
order in a window 122
Holes
.........................................................................................................................................................
cutting order 122
Cut scrap
.......................................................................................................................................................... 123
Stop/No..........................................................................................................................................................
cutting 123
3 Technologie
...................................................................................................................................
řezání 123
Change..........................................................................................................................................................
of the curf compensation 123
Change..........................................................................................................................................................
of the cutting speed 123
Kerf compensation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Marking..........................................................................................................................................................
by cutting 124
Shortening
..........................................................................................................................................................
of last segment 124
Automatic
..........................................................................................................................................................
common edge cuttings 124

Content 15
4 Controls,
...................................................................................................................................
measurements 126
Collision
..........................................................................................................................................................
control 126
Check of
..........................................................................................................................................................
torch collision 126
Piece control
.......................................................................................................................................................... 126
Control ..........................................................................................................................................................
of the geometry change 127
Measurement
..........................................................................................................................................................
in the plan 127
Measurement
..........................................................................................................................................................
in NC-program 127
GEO-file..........................................................................................................................................................
name of a part 127
Number..........................................................................................................................................................
and distance of burners 127
Collision
..........................................................................................................................................................
contour round a part 128
Verification
..........................................................................................................................................................
of finished layouts 128
5 NC programs
................................................................................................................................... 128
NC-programs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 128
Measure..........................................................................................................................................................
in NC-program 128
Searching
..........................................................................................................................................................
in NC-program 128
Draw NC-program
.......................................................................................................................................................... 128
Production
..........................................................................................................................................................
weight 129
Preview..........................................................................................................................................................
before print 129
Print an..........................................................................................................................................................
NC-program 129
Print more
..........................................................................................................................................................
NC-programs 129
Import NC-programs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 130
Edit NC-programs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 130
Transfer..........................................................................................................................................................
NC-programs into NC-machine 130
Insert
.........................................................................................................................................................
into the LINK directory 130
Load
.........................................................................................................................................................
from the LINK directory 131
6 Ending
...................................................................................................................................
of SAPS 131
Chapter VIII SCADW 133

1 Program
...................................................................................................................................
control 133
Drawing..........................................................................................................................................................
scale 133
Change..........................................................................................................................................................
the centre of drawing 133
Stepping
..........................................................................................................................................................
in construction 133
Snap of..........................................................................................................................................................
points 133
Selection
..........................................................................................................................................................
of contour segments 134
One.........................................................................................................................................................
section choice 134
More
.........................................................................................................................................................
sections choice 134
Erasing .......................................................................................................................................................... 134
Erasing
.........................................................................................................................................................
sections 134
Erasing
.........................................................................................................................................................
dimension lines 134
Erasing
.........................................................................................................................................................
a text 135
Cutting ..........................................................................................................................................................
without waste (COPY) 135
2 Read...................................................................................................................................
and import of files 135
Loading..........................................................................................................................................................
a file from the VIEWER 135
Loading..........................................................................................................................................................
a detail from the VIEWER 135
Loading..........................................................................................................................................................
a macro from the VIEWER 135
Loading..........................................................................................................................................................
an external drawing 136
3 First...................................................................................................................................
row of buttons 136
Straight..........................................................................................................................................................
line from an angle 136
Abscissa
..........................................................................................................................................................
from an angle 136
Abscissa,
..........................................................................................................................................................
open polygon 136
Duplication
.......................................................................................................................................................... 137
15
16 SAPSproW v19
Shift of sections
.......................................................................................................................................................... 137
Open polygons
.......................................................................................................................................................... 137
Mirroring
.......................................................................................................................................................... 138
Point of..........................................................................................................................................................
intersection 138
Extension
..........................................................................................................................................................
to the point of intersection 138
Corner ..........................................................................................................................................................
chamfer 138
Corner cut-out
.......................................................................................................................................................... 139
Corner cut-off
.......................................................................................................................................................... 139
Corner refresh
..........................................................................................................................................................
(COPY) 139
Tangent..........................................................................................................................................................
under an angle 139
Tangential
..........................................................................................................................................................
arc 139
Axis, vertical
..........................................................................................................................................................
line 139
4 Second
...................................................................................................................................
row of buttons 139
Point .......................................................................................................................................................... 139
Extension/shortening
..........................................................................................................................................................
of abscissae 140
Drawing..........................................................................................................................................................
of curves 140
Plasma ..........................................................................................................................................................
arc 140
Plasma ..........................................................................................................................................................
triangle 140
Lead-ins.......................................................................................................................................................... 140
Ellipsis .......................................................................................................................................................... 141
Text drawing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 141
Text cutting
.......................................................................................................................................................... 141
Text marking
.......................................................................................................................................................... 141
Grid .......................................................................................................................................................... 142
Grid with
..........................................................................................................................................................
more parts 142
The order
..........................................................................................................................................................
of marking and holes cutting 142
Contour..........................................................................................................................................................
order in a part 142
Measure..........................................................................................................................................................
the geometry, correct 143
Lower the
..........................................................................................................................................................
point count 143
Change..........................................................................................................................................................
of dimensions 143
Additions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 143
Addition..........................................................................................................................................................
for shortening 143
Kerf compensation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 144
Dimensioning
.......................................................................................................................................................... 144
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
dimensioning 144
Abscissa
.........................................................................................................................................................
dimensioning 144
Circle
.........................................................................................................................................................
or arc dimensioning 144
Dimensioning
.........................................................................................................................................................
of the arc length 144
Proportions
.........................................................................................................................................................
dimensioning 144
Angle
.........................................................................................................................................................
dimensioning 145
Distance
.........................................................................................................................................................
of a point 145
Distance
.........................................................................................................................................................
of parallel sections 145
PAR - cutting
..........................................................................................................................................................
speed 145
Print of ..........................................................................................................................................................
drawings 145
Change..........................................................................................................................................................
of line type 146
5 Side...................................................................................................................................
panel 146
Line types
.......................................................................................................................................................... 146
Coordinate
..........................................................................................................................................................
types 147
6 Upper
...................................................................................................................................
panel 147
"Last" button
.......................................................................................................................................................... 147
"Paint" ..........................................................................................................................................................
button 147
7 Saving
...................................................................................................................................
and correction of parts 147
Quality ..........................................................................................................................................................
of material 147

Content 17
Contours
..........................................................................................................................................................
in the part 148
Saving a
..........................................................................................................................................................
part 148
Changing
..........................................................................................................................................................
of part's geometry 148
Multiply..........................................................................................................................................................
GEO file 149
Changing
..........................................................................................................................................................
with temporary dimensions 149
8 Macros
................................................................................................................................... 149
Working..........................................................................................................................................................
with macros 149
Parameters
.......................................................................................................................................................... 150
Comment
.......................................................................................................................................................... 150
Relative..........................................................................................................................................................
coordinates 151
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
P - point 151
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
L - abscissae 151
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
C - circle 151
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
LOG - testing 152
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
IF - condition 152
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
I - intersection 153
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
T - tangent 153
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
A - tangential arc 154
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
ROT - rotation 154
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
MOV - move, copy 154
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
ROTMOV - rotation and move 155
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
PAR - paralell abscissaes 155
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
MIR - mirroring 155
Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
GEO - cutting contour 155
Truncated
..........................................................................................................................................................
pipe 155
Reducing
..........................................................................................................................................................
piece 155
9 SCADW
...................................................................................................................................
setting 156
"Look" tab
.......................................................................................................................................................... 156
Show
......................................................................................................................................................... 156
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
dimensioning 156
Zero
.........................................................................................................................................................
coord. 156
Scale
......................................................................................................................................................... 156
Straight
.........................................................................................................................................................
lines length 156
Graphic
.........................................................................................................................................................
design 156
Changing
.........................................................................................................................................................
the temporary dimensions 156
"Control"
..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 157
Aut.order
......................................................................................................................................................... 157
Snap
......................................................................................................................................................... 157
Allow
.........................................................................................................................................................
the identificators 157
Step
.........................................................................................................................................................
of move (COPY) 157
Step
.........................................................................................................................................................
of scale (COPY) 157
Shift
.........................................................................................................................................................
of the referential point 157
Free
.........................................................................................................................................................
hand drawing 158
Incl..........................................................................................................................................................
straight lines 158
Rotate
.........................................................................................................................................................
acc.to the min.area 158
Validate
.........................................................................................................................................................
the drawing number 158
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
label 158
Change
.........................................................................................................................................................
the ACT number 158
Load
.........................................................................................................................................................
the modified GEO 158
Autosave
......................................................................................................................................................... 158
Tone
.........................................................................................................................................................
length 158
Default
.........................................................................................................................................................
count of parts 158
"DXF/DWG"
..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 159
17
18 SAPSproW v19
NC.........................................................................................................................................................
machine's function 159
Names
.........................................................................................................................................................
of layers 159
Do .........................................................................................................................................................
not import points 159
DXF
.........................................................................................................................................................
directory 159
DXF<->GEO
......................................................................................................................................................... 159
Move
.........................................................................................................................................................
to the 1.quadrant 159
"Technology"
..........................................................................................................................................................
tab 159
Permitted
.........................................................................................................................................................
error 159
Max.angle
......................................................................................................................................................... 159
Ellipsis
......................................................................................................................................................... 160
Draw ellipsis
.........................................................................................................................................
by arcs 160
Permitted tolerance
......................................................................................................................................... 160
Dense
.........................................................................................................................................................
open polygons 160
DXF
.........................................................................................................................................................
compensating 160
Compensation
.........................................................................................................................................................
multiplier 160
Deviation
.........................................................................................................................................................
of nods 160
Big.........................................................................................................................................................
arcs 160
Max.radius......................................................................................................................................... 160
Permitted tolerance
......................................................................................................................................... 160
Chapter IX VIEWER 162

1 VIEWER
...................................................................................................................................
program 162
Refresh..........................................................................................................................................................
the VIEWER 162
Interactive
..........................................................................................................................................................
help 162
Control .......................................................................................................................................................... 162
Update ..........................................................................................................................................................
of remnants 163
2 Display...
................................................................................................................................... 163
Display ..........................................................................................................................................................
geometry of all parts 163
Display ..........................................................................................................................................................
geometry of particular parts 163
Display ..........................................................................................................................................................
a particular page 163
Display ..........................................................................................................................................................
various files 163
Display ..........................................................................................................................................................
nonzero parts 163
Lock .......................................................................................................................................................... 163
3 For SAPSW...
................................................................................................................................... 164
Load a cutting
..........................................................................................................................................................
layout 164
Insert a ..........................................................................................................................................................
part into the layout 164
Temporary
..........................................................................................................................................................
change of piece count 164
4 Setting
................................................................................................................................... 164
Set up the
..........................................................................................................................................................
VIEWER 164
Number..........................................................................................................................................................
of lines/columns 164
Number
.........................................................................................................................................................
of lines 164
Number
.........................................................................................................................................................
of columns 164
Everything
.........................................................................................................................................................
on 1 page 164
Max.number
......................................................................................................................................................... 164
VIEWER..........................................................................................................................................................
: SAPSW 164
Scale for
..........................................................................................................................................................
parts 165
Scale for
..........................................................................................................................................................
NC-programs 165
Distance..........................................................................................................................................................
of pictures 165
Display ..........................................................................................................................................................
with a zero number 165
Draw endpoints
..........................................................................................................................................................
(COPY) 165
Sorting .......................................................................................................................................................... 165
Text under
..........................................................................................................................................................
the drawing 165

Content 19
File.........................................................................................................................................................
name 165
Drawing
.........................................................................................................................................................
number 165
Act.number
......................................................................................................................................................... 165
Total
.........................................................................................................................................................
number 165
Dimensions
......................................................................................................................................................... 165
Chapter X Tips and tricks 167

1 Multiply
...................................................................................................................................
GEO-s 167
2 Nesting
...................................................................................................................................
to a remnant plate 167
3 Marking
...................................................................................................................................
on NC-machine without marker 168
4 Maximal
...................................................................................................................................
use of NC machine 168
5 Cutting
...................................................................................................................................
without scrap 168
6 Cutting
...................................................................................................................................
flanges 169
7 "Break
...................................................................................................................................
off" parts 169
8 Lead-ins
...................................................................................................................................
in holes 170
9 Change
...................................................................................................................................
of the plate, without setting-up 170
10 Construction
...................................................................................................................................
change of a part, searching layouts 170
11 How...................................................................................................................................
to spare on jets 170
12 Drawing
...................................................................................................................................
documentation 171
13 Group
...................................................................................................................................
import of DXF-files 171
14 Remnant
...................................................................................................................................
plates 171
15 Separation
...................................................................................................................................
of the remnant plate from the scrap 171
16 Program
...................................................................................................................................
language 171
17 Creation
...................................................................................................................................
of parts from NC-program 172
18 Corner
...................................................................................................................................
renewal 172
19 Complex
...................................................................................................................................
common edge cutting 172
20 Plate...................................................................................................................................
edges utilization 173
21 Working
...................................................................................................................................
directory 173
19
SAPSproW
Chapter
I
SAPSproW 21
1 SAPSproW
1.1 Introduction
SAPSproW is a program system for programming NC-cutting machines. It is used in working places in
24 states of Europe and Asia, and can be handled in 11 languages. The continual maintenance and
development of the program system is ensured (training, hotline, e-mail, www).
SAPSproW can run independently, or as a group of SAPSproW applications in a Windows net. User
´s data (parts file, cutting layouts, NC-programs...) can be concentrated in the only computer, or they
can be divided into various computers in a group. Every member of the group can work with data of
another SAPSproW system.
SAPSproW consists of 4 main program modules:

· SCADW for creating of the shape of parts
· SAPSW for creating of cutting layouts
· DATABANKS for saving system´s and user´s data
· VIEWER for viewing parts, cutting layouts and general automation of actions
1.2 Contact
Address:
ANTAL Software EHTi
Datelinova c.528
IZA
94639
Slovakia
Phone:
00421 / 35 / 785-3015
E-mail:
home@antalsoftware.sk
Web:
www.antalsoftware.sk
SKYPE name:
sapsprow
1.3 Terminology, user interface

In the SAPSproW program manual there are often used some Windows specific expressions.
On the first picture you can see a menu bar with titles of the "Program", "Nestings", etc. menus. The
menus contain commands. The "Nestings" menu is open, and in the menu there are the "Last layout",
"Next layout", etc. commands.
You can see on the next picture 2 drop-down lists. The drop-down list "WorkDir" is not opened, the
"Machine" is opened and you can see the options in the list. It is the ACETYLEN option selected.

22 SAPSproW v19
On the next picture is an unchecked check box "Analyse" and a checked check box "Piece control".
There is a text box named "Prefix GEO" too.
The next picture shows 2 option buttons, the "in the QUALITY.TXT" one is selected
Some data are present in the tables. Various elements can be placed on tabs.
On the "Parts" tab there is a button bar with the , "Ps GEO", "Recall pieces" buttons. The table
contains in its heading the title names of the "?", "Label?", "Name?" columns.
SAPS presents the actual state of its performing in the status bar, down on the bottom side of the main
program window.
Remark:
http://windowshelp.microsoft.com/Windows/en-US/winbasics.mspx
1.4 Programs in SAPSproW

1.4.1 SAPSW program
Creation of cutting layouts :
- enables both interactive and automatic creation of cutting layouts (for a partly created cutting layout
and remnant plates as well)
- cutting layouts are created in a common format, it means it is possible to create NC-programs for
different cutting machines from any suppliers from the only cutting layout. The NC-program creation
from a common cutting layout is at the same time absolutely automated.

SAPSproW 23
- parts in SAPSW are independent objects, that is why all existing cutting layouts with a part change
automatically with the change of the shape of this part
- it is possible to work at the same time with more cutting layouts on the screen of your computer and
transfer a part or a group of parts from one cutting layout into another one
- remnant plates can be easily used and new remnants can be registered in the databank
- it is possible to change the number of heads and the head spacing in the cutting layouts any time
- it is possible to cut profiles (unclosed contours)
- it is possible to cut holes into plates with straight sides for an exact dimension
NC-program creation :
- enables both interactive and automatic creation of NC-program
- in each cutting layout and NC-program, there is always possible to erase parts, correct them, create
groups, change the cutting technology (lead-ins, direction of cutting, bridges, stitches, common edge
cutting, chain cutting, profile compensation, order of cutting of holes and contours, marking with
powder or with a centre-punch,...)
- the speed of cutting can be automatically changed in accordance with geometric dimensions of
contours
- a different speed of cutting can be interactively matched to every contour of the parts in accordance
with the need of the exactness and the quality of cuts
- in one cutting layout there can be parts with uncorrected geometry as well as parts with a kerf
compensation (created in SCADW)
- it can create a chart for a drilling pattern for cutting of thick metallic plates
- it creates detailed technologic-economic information about each NC-program
- it is possible to draw the NC-program in a slower way (cutting simulation)
- for the exact control of NC-program it is possible to draw either only the contours of parts, or the
contours and the width of kerf too
1.4.2 SCADW module

- it was specially developed for creation of parts for NC-cutting machines and therefore it is easier to
control as other common construction CAD systems
- it suffice to draw only the real contours of parts, all machine dependent functions for the NC-machine
control are automatically generated at the phase of NC-file creation in the SAPSW program
- SCADW creates a part for NC-cutting automatically after the drawing of the part (i.e. it will change the
order of lines so that abscissas and arcs follow up in links, irrespective of the original order at
drawing)
- in the course of construction it is possible to go back or forward (UnDo a ReDo) in any number of
steps
- it enables to add a variety of technological arrangements for the shape of the part that are typical for
NC-cutting (addition for tooling, addition for lessening, kerf compensation, corner loops, ...)
- parts from other CAD systems can be taken in DXF, DWG, ESSI, or DSTV-format
1.4.3 TABLES module

- it registers parts, sheet material plates, remnant plates, cutting layouts and NC-programs
- it automatically checks the count pieces for parts and plates
- all database files are processed in a DBISAM database system from the Elevate Software company
- it includes enlarged information (date, notes...), rich sorting and interactive possibilities of data
arrangements
1.4.4 VIEWER module

- it makes a catalogue and it shows pictures of parts, NC-programs, DXF-files, details, ... in the form of
a matrix with an optional number of lines and columns
- the services of the VIEWER are used by the SCADW program module for loading of existing parts
and drawings
- SAPSW program for recalling of cutting layouts and remnant plates to the screen, inserting of parts
into the cutting layout, controlling the number of pieces and synchronization of the data in the
DATABANK module

24 SAPSproW v19
- with the help of the VIEWER, parts and cutting layouts are recalled by a click to the picture of the
appropriate file

Installation
Chapter
II
26 SAPSproW v19
2 Installation
2.1 Hardware
You need for the SAPSproW system operation (recommended data in brackets):
· IBM PC compatible computer minimal 1 GHz
· computer monitor (17"-19"), resolution of min. 1024x768 pixels (1280x1024), min. 65536 colors i.
e. High color
· memory minimum 256 Mbyte (512 Mbyte or more)
· mouse (IntelliMouse with a wheel)
· printer (laser)
· network card (for programming on a network)
· operating system WINDOWS XP (Home Edition is enough), 2000, Vista
2.2 Installation
SAPSproW install files are divided into two parts, the SAPSproW part itself and the driver of the
hardware key.
You can carry out the SAPSproW installation by starting of SAPSproW.EXE. The driver installation can
you perform with the Sentinel Install Utility.
After installation:
· before the first start of SAPSproW carry out the Windows settings
· at the first start of SAPSproW carry out the SAPSrpoW's basic settings (the settings can be
changed according to your needs at the next program starts)
2.3 Limitations
It can be displayed from the "Program" menu. A demo version offers all possibilities of the full version.
The size of the part geometry and the length of NC-program may be considerably smaller.
2.4 Setting
2.4.1 Before the first start
Set up Windows before the first start of SAPSproW.
1. Set up the screen resolution to min. 1024 x 768 pixels.
2. Set up the number of viewable colors to 65536 or more (High Color or True Color).
3. Set the size of system fonts in the Windows Control Panel, the Display panel - Setting, if possible to
Large Fonts. In this way you will improve readability of small texts, mainly on 15-inch screens.
4. It is advantageous to set from the "Start" panel the "Auto hide" mode for the main panel with active
programs (the panel then ejects if you move the mouse to the lower edge of the screen and it
disappears if the cursor leaves the panel area).
5. Make sure you have installed at least one printer in Windows. If not, you can install a printer from
Windows on the "Printers" panel. The printer does not need to be physically connected to the
computer.
6. Before starting a network with SAPSproW, set up a full sharing of the SAPSproW install directory
on the computers (sharing for reading and entry), implicitly C:\SAPSproW). You can set it up with
the help of the "My computer" Window icon or "Net". If you use SAPSproW at working stations and
all user´s data are transmitted on the net and saved in the server, then SAPSproW must be installed
on the server as well. You need not to set up the program there and the local key does not need to
be connected.
2.4.2 Before the first start of SAPSproW

-click and then the "Shape" tab
-enter the real values of the screen dimensions in mm. The data accuracy is important for the size of
parts and cutting layouts in the scale of the screen with regard to the real dimensions.

Installation 27
-maximum number of cutting layouts that can be loaded and displayed at the same time (2-3)
-set up the NC-machine zero position
-in the case of a net SAPSproW work click at button and in the "Net" tab enter paths to individual
computers.
Window dimensions on the screen:

According to monitor, screen dimensions and screen resolution it is sometimes appropriate to change
the dimensions of windows, buttons, fonts etc. You can achieve this besides of possibilities of the
Windows also with help of the SAPSproW's machine independent settings, on the "Shape" tab,
"Screen" frame, "%" text box.
2.4.3 SAPSproW windows on more monitors

At the first start of the SAPSproW every SAPS window will be displayed on the same, the primary
monitor. If there are more monitors connected to the computer, then it is possible to set the SAPS in
such way, that various windows will be presented on various monitors. The NC programmer can in this
way more easily reach and use the functions of the SAPSproW.
Setting:
In the machine independent settings on the "Shape" tab select appropriate monitor numbers. You can
select monitors for the SAPSW - main window, SCADW - design or import of parts, VIEWER and the
TABLES. If you change the monitor number of the main window, then every other monitor number will
be changed too. Afterwards if it is requered, you can change the monitor numbers for SCADW,
VIEWER and TABLES. For every window it is possible also to change with the "%" box the size of
internal components and the font size. For the TABLES can you select another font size.
Remark:
SAPS at starting shows in the welcome window the monitor number for the SAPSW. If the SAPSW is
displayed on other monitor as the primary one, then you can click to this displayed number in range of
2 seconds. Afterwards the SAPSW will be displayed again on the primary monitor. This process can be
used in case, when the originally selected monitor does not work, and so the SAPSproW would be not
displayed at all.
2.4.4 The USERSPECIFIC.TXT file

The USERSPECIFIC.TXT can influence the working mode of the SAPSproW. In the file are specific
program settings, which use only some program user. The meaning of the setting is described directly
in the file.
2.5 Update
It is possible to update the SAPSproW on the UPDATE tab of the SAPSW-SYSTEM SETUP. This
automatic update can be used on computers with Internet connection. Always make a backup of the old
version.
When the computer is not connected to the Internet:

Download the requested files with a browser from address:
http://www.antalsoftware.sk/update96/sapsprow.htm
Download only the files that are newer as the files in your existing SAPS version (generally these are
the LOKALIZ.ZIP and SAPSW.ZIP). Unpack and copy after downloading the new files to the ...
\_UPDATE directory. Subsequently start the SAPSUPDATE.EXE program.
Remark:
With updating to a newer SAPSproW version, the old setup data as well as the old parts and cutting
layouts remain unchanged.

First steps
Chapter
III
First steps 29
3 First steps
3.1 Introduction
The aim of this chapter is to quickly show several of the most often used working methods. You need
not use anything else as the mouse and you will go step by step through the operations mentioned here:
· recalling of the last existing cutting layout, creation and drawing of the NC-program
· automatic creation of lead-ins
· automatic determination of the order of cutting
· the change of the SAPSW setting (drawing of the high-speed shift)
· the change of the lead-ins in the whole cutting layout
· automatic creation of the cutting layout
· work with a table (only data viewing)
· interactive creation of the cutting layout
· technologic-economic data
· recalling of the old cutting layout
· addition of parts
Now...
click, a new window with the description of the next procedure will appear.
3.2 Recalling of the last nesting layout

Click the icon buttons in SAPSW program, not in this helping window.
1. - T1 cutting layout is depicted. Edit the area and dimensions of the helping window on the left
side so that it does not hide SAPSW buttons anywhere and it hides a part of T1 cutting layout on the
left. For a better arrangement, parts are colored in cutting layouts, while at inappropriate position of
the help window the color "flows out" of the part and fills in the area of the cutting layout. In this case
edit the area of the help window so that it hides the upper left and the lower edge of the cutting
layout.
2. - NC-program is created and depicted from the cutting layout
3. Check the "NC-window" check box. In a new window the text of the NC-program will be depicted.
4. - NC-program is being drawn. The speed of drawing can be changed from 1 to 5 by clicking
the buttons with a triangle.
5. - NC-program is being drawn, at maximum speed
Next
3.3 Automatic creation of lead-ins

1. Click at the button when it is in the upper (not pressed) position.
2.
3. Click at the "Aut" button. A lead-in in the shape of an abscissa and an arc will be created in all parts.
4. - the corrected NC-program with lead-ins will be created and depicted
Next
3.4 Autom. determ. of the cutting order

1. Click at the button when it is in the upper (unpressed) position.
2. Click at the "Order" tab.
3. - a new order of cutting will be created.
4. - the corrected NC-program with a new order will be created and depicted
Next

30 SAPSproW v19
3.5 Change of SAPSW setup

1. If any of , , buttons is pressed, release it so that all buttons of the program are
accessible to you.
2. - "SAPSW - system setup" window is depicted for setting the way of SAPSW action. If it is not
just elected, click at the "NC-program" tab
3. Check the "High-speed shift" in the "Draw" frame.
4. Close "SAPSW - system setup" window (click at ).
5. - NC-program will be depicted, including tracks or without tracks with the high-speed shift
Next
3.6 Change of lead-ins in the whole nesting layout

1. Click at button when it is in the upper (unpressed) position.
2. Click at the "Lead-ins" tab
3.
4. Being asked "Erase lead-ins and chain cuttings..." click at OK button. All lead-ins will disappear in the
cutting layout.
5.
6. Click at "AUT." button. Abscissa-like lead-ins will be created everywhere.
7. Repeat the 3rd and 4th points to erase all lead-ins.
Next
3.7 Automatic nesting

accessible to you.
2. - the cutting layout is automatically created, in this case several parts will be added. Then
SAPSW will create lead-ins and will determine the new cutting order.
3. - the NC-program will be shown
Next
3.8 Work with a table

1. If any of , , buttons is pressed, release it, so that all buttons of the program are
accessible to you.
2. - you can see the "Parts" table
3. Click the "Standard" tab. You can see the standard data that are dependent on the thickness of the
material.
4. Click the "Plates" tab. You can see the data of plates, from which you can select a plate for a new
cutting layout.
5. Click at the button in the upper right corner of the "SAPSproW - tables" window.
Next
3.9 Technologic-economical data

1. Click the "Nestings" menu.
2. Click the "ECO-data preview" line. SAPSW will create and depict technologic-economical data.
3. Close the window by clicking .
Next

First steps 31
3.10 Interactive nesting

accessible to you.
2. - the last part will be always erased with each press. Erase all parts of the cutting layout.
3. Move the mouse towards the lower part of the screen, into the area where SAPSW writes the text of
the help - the VIEWER will be depicted , you can see some parts there
4. Click at the picture of some part, e.g. D1 (triangle), the cursor of the mouse will change its shape
and the VIEWER will disappear.
5. Click somewhere in the cutting layout, D1 will appear in the cutting layout.
6. A moving arrow is moving from the part (if not, move the mouse). Click, the part will move till the edge
of the cutting layout in the direction of the arrow. If the arrow is angled, the part will be moved step
by step in both directions.
7. Click when the cursor of the mouse has a shape of the "OK" button (approximately in the middle of
the part). The part will be colored and at the same time added into the cutting layout.
8. Click at - NC-program with the new part is depicted
9. Release - the cutting layout with the new part is depicted
Next
3.11 Recalling of an old layout

1. Move the mouse down to the bottom of screen (into the status line), the VIEWER will be depicted,
you can see some parts
2. Click at the black triangle in the VIEWER and at the "NCP" line in the drop-down list, the existing NC-
programs will be depicted
3. Click into T2 window, the name of T2 cutting layout will show on the right in the window. The T2
cutting layout will be depicted.
Next
3.12 Addition of parts

1. Click the button when it is in the upper (not pressed) position.
2. Check the "Rotate by 180 degrees" check box
3. Click somewhere on a line or into the body of the D1 part.
4. Move the arrow in the needed multiplication direction and click the right button of the mouse. D1
parts will be added in the direction of the arrow.
5. Release the button into the upper position
6. - you will be erasing a part from the cutting layout
7. Click somewhere at the needed part. The part will disappear from the cutting layout.
8. - the NC-program will be created and depicted
Back to "Introduction"

What is it?
Chapter
IV
What is it? 33
4 What is it?
4.1 Main program window
After starting the SAPS, you see the main program window. You can control from this window every
function in the SAPS.
Left on the topside is a group of check boxes. If you check the "More", then more check boxes will
appear.
The "Thick/Qual" check box has 3 possible states. If the check box is checked and it has silver color,
then SAPS will control only the material thickness, but not the material quality.
4.2 Working directory

SAPSproW works with a huge number of files, for example each part and each cutting layout have
their own files. If you do not want to have too many files in one directory, it is useful to create various
working directories for different thickness, prospectively qualities, of material. File searching and other
folder operations are so faster. The name of the working directory is selected by the user. It is useful to
choose the working directory's name according to the thickness (e.g.10 if the thickness=10 mm, 15 if
the thickness=15 mm etc.) The working directory will be created automatically in the install directory of
the SAPSproW (implicitly C:\SAPSproW). Other specific directories, e.g.GEO for parts, PLA for
cutting layouts, NCP for NC-programs etc.,are automatically created in each working SAPSproW
directory.
SAPS can create inner working directories. To the drop-down list type in this case after the actual
working name the backslash and the name of the new inner directory (e.g. in directory DEMO you can
let create DEMO\NEXTONE, DEMO\2, and so on).
Another way how to choose the working directory is to create an independent directory for each
product or order. The name of the working directory is the same as the name of the product or the
order (max. 30 signs) and you place every materials with any thickness and quality into one directory.
SAPSproW with the help of automatic labeling will make the access easier to concrete thicknesses or
qualities of the working directory.
Note:
If there is no cutting layout for the chosen standard data in the working directory, the text "WorkDir" will
be depicted in red color.
4.3 Standard data

SAPSproW in the course of creating NC-program uses the values from the group of standard data
defined in advance. The data values are dependent on:
· the type of NC-machine (number of heads, working speed, dimensions of the plate...), the cutting
medium (plasma, acetylene, laser...), the used jets etc.
· the type of NC-machine and at the same time the thickness of the material of the plate
It is possible to create more data groups in advance and to choose the needed group before the
creation of the cutting layout. The chosen data group is called "standard data". The name of the
standard data can be e.g. ACETYLEN, PLASMA, AC-RU8...etc. Information of the standard data is
saved in the "NC-machine" databank, data dependent on the thickness in "Standard".
4.4 Labeling of parts

In the programming practice we usually have to work with a huge number of parts and cutting layouts.
SAPSW with the help of labeling of parts reduces the necessary amount of information that we need for
our work at one moment. Here are the reasons that make us think about the use of label at the creation
of cutting layouts:
-SAPSproW system remembers several characteristic data about each part (number of drawing,
thickness, quality, number,...) and it can depict these data in one line in the form of a table in the
PARTS databank. There are usually 20-30 signs on the screen at the same time, it means that e.g.
for 500 different kinds of parts there are about 20 pages in the depicted table.

34 SAPSproW v19
-it is useful to depict a geometric shape of parts by the VIEWER program that is able to depict the
shape of the part in lines and columns in small windows on the screen. For example for 500 parts in
the raster 2 x 5 there will be 50 depicted pages of shapes of parts.
If you need to create new NC-programs, you save in the cutting layouts only a definite portion of all
existing parts. That is why it is sufficient to label the needed parts only once with a 30-sign alfa-numeric
text that will be inscribed to other data into the PARTS table by SAPSW. At the depiction of the data in
the PARTS databank and the shape of geometry in the VIEWER only the group of parts labeled in this
way will be depicted. It is possible to have more differently labeled groups in the databank at the same
time, it is possible to choose different groups comfortably from the drop-down list.
4.5 Automatic labeling

Label can be set or changed in several places in SAPSproW. The first place is the window at saving of
the GEO-file of the part in the SCADW program. If it is so set in the settings of SCADW, then the
program can create the label automatically as a combination of signs of thickness and quality, maximum
length 30 signs. For example for the thickness of 10 and the quality of 11523.1 SCADW will choose the
sign 10/11523.1
4.6 Label of nesting layout

In the "Nestings" table, it is possible to choose to - label certain cutting layouts. The labeled cutting
layouts can be e.g. saved in archives in groups, or their drawings can be printed or step by step
automatically developed on the screen.
4.7 In the sphere of cutting

4.7.1 Technology of cutting
There is a lot of rules at NC-cutting, mainly the oxyfuel one that you should keep to, if you want to have
right dimensions of parts after cutting and if you want to make good use of the machine time. For
example:
-finish the cutting of parts in the direction towards the centre of the plate in order to keep the part as
long as possible by the non-cut part of the plate
-at first cut the parts in the holes of other parts
-for slim parts, if the proportion of dimensions is smaller than 1:6, use stitches
-try to have the lowest possible number of lead-ins on the plate (saving of time and expenses on the jets)
-regarding your possibilities lead the lead-ins for a part by a tangent or from the obtuse angle
-try to cut with the common edge cutting
-and so on...
Technology of cutting is called in this point the change of the way of cutting of a concrete part, e.g.
with the help of lead-in, lead-out, stitch, common edge cutting, chain cutting ...
4.7.2 Lead-in
If you cut the material through, there will be an irregular hole of different shape and diameter in the
plate. If you do not want to debase the part by this hole, start the lead in the plate outside the area of the
part. A lead in is the name of the track that the machine cutting head makes from the point of cutting to
the first cut point of the part.
4.7.3 Hole with a lead-in

At constructing the parts it is not necessary to construct lead-ins into holes and to the contour of the
part. SAPSW enables to create lead-ins interactively or completely automatically in the course of
creating the cutting layout. There is one case when it is good to create lead-ins at constructing the
cutting layout. It is the case when the part has a big number of narrow and small holes where the
automatical lead-ins (in regard to their needed length or angle of joining) would probably lead into the
material and where, in the course of creating the cutting layout, there would be necessary to correct
interactively the lead-ins in many holes of many parts, which would be very lengthy.

What is it? 35
4.7.4 Lead-out
It is true that cutting of parts ends in a mathematically exact point, but it is possible that in practise the
division of parts from the plate is not perfect. That is why SAPSW enables the automatical generation of
a short abscissa or arc, i.e. a lead-out which ensures loosening of the part and a good quality of the
cut, before the cutting head goes up.
4.7.5 Chain cutting

It enables to use one lead-in for several parts, which increases the use of the machine and saves the
cutting jets.
4.7.6 "Tree" chain cutting

It has similar advantages as the ordinary chain cutting by cutting, it is used for tiny parts.
4.7.7 Common edge cutting

It improves the use of the production time of the NC-machine. Parts that have one side in the shape of
abscissa can be put next to an other similar part and the joint side is then cut only once. SAPSW
ensures automatically the exact setting of the parts on the cutting layout, it changes the direction of
cutting, it creates a lead-in and (if it is necessary) cutting of the common edge without kerf
compensation. The length of the sides which are put next to each other do not need to be the same for
both parts.
4.7.8 Kerf compensation

According to the kind of the cutting medium, thickness of the material, the kind of jets and other
circumstances there arises at the cutting a kerf of different width in the material. If the cutting heads of
the NC-machine would follow exactly the contours of the parts, the cuts would be smaller by the value of
the kerf. That is why a majority of the control units of NC-machines enables an automatical kerf

36 SAPSproW v19
compensation (ESSI-code 29) or on the right (ESSI-code 30) from the exact contour of the parts, for
example:
30
7
++100
...
Sometimes it is not useful to switch on the curf compensation, because the concrete control unit does
not enable the automatic compensation. In this case it is necessary to enlarge the dimensions of the
part contour or lessen the dimensions of the holes by a half of the cutting crack.
4.7.9 Stitch
The temperature load of the material can cause a shift of the part at the end of cutting, that is why the
dimensions of the part can be incorrect. It can happen at the classic NC-machines with oxyfuel cutting
up to approx. 10 mm width of the material, while the rate of the width to the length of the part is smaller
than appr. 1:6. That is why SAPSW enables to add a convenient interruption of the cut, a so called
stitch, into the contour. It keeps the part at cutting (even after the cutting) joined to the plate, which
protects it from a shift.
4.7.10 Bridge
A bridge joins more parts by cutting, that is why it is similar to the chain cutting. The difference is in the
cutting steps. With bridges, parts are not cut at once, but at first one half of the part, then the cutting
goes on with the following part and in the end the cutting goes back to the first part.
You can create 2 kinds of bridges:
-a current bridge, and ...
-a bridge for a cut-off
4.7.11 Compensation of shortening

Oblong parts with bigger thicknesses (over 10 mm, length over 1 m) which are welded along their whole
length into bigger construction formations can later shorten their length by even several mm. The
shortening has to be compensated with an addition in several places inside the part. SCADW program
enables to construct such additions easily.
4.7.12 Remnant plate

-it is the remnant of the sheet material plate after the cutting of a part. If it has convenient dimensions, it
can be used for the creation of another cutting layout.
-all steps, with the determination of the remnant's shape for another cutting layout and with the
registering of the remnants, can be made by SAPSW quite automatically. Provided that parts on the
original plate are situated on the left side and the remnant with the unused portion of the plate is on

What is it? 37
the right.
-the edge of the remnant on the left side can stay formed according to the shape of the cut parts. If it is
arranged by hand after the cutting, then it possible to correct the automatically saved geometry of the
remnant in accordance with the real shape of the remnant in SCADW program.
4.7.13 Part - only holes

At big parts of the rectangular shape, it is sometimes necessary or advantageous to prepare the outer
contours for an accurate dimension on another machine (e.g. plate scissors) and to cut only holes or
rugged parts of the outer contour on the NC-machine. In this case it is necessary to draw in SCADW
only lines which will be really cut and the drawing is saved as a part of "only holes" type.
4.8 In the area of NC-programming

4.8.1 Pull the window
It is often necessary to inform the program that we want to carry out the same action with more parts, e.
g. shift parts, erase them etc. In this case we pull the window over the needed group of parts.
-click at one corner of the window without loosening the mouse button
-pull the mouse with the pressed button, the program is drawing a window
-loosen the mouse button in the other, final corner of the window
Parts are chosen by window in the direction you pulled the window:
- if the final corner of the window was on the right of the first corner, then only those parts lying restless
inside the window will be chosen in the window.
- if the final corner of the window is on the left of the first corner, then even those parts lying partly
inside the window will be chosen.
Note:
If you need to choose the parts into a group, then use the ALT key and the mouse for a choice of parts
step by step instead of pulling the window.
4.8.2 ESSI-format
It is a standard format NC-program that is created by SAPSW and is used for controlling the work of
the cutting machine. The format is used in their control units by most producers of cutting machines, e.
g. the firm MESSER, ESAB, SCHWEISSTECHNIK and others.
An example of the program:
…
29
7
+100+100
+5000+
++2500
…
ESSI-macros can appear in NC-programs.
4.8.3 ISO/DIN format

It is a format of NC programs. It is used e.g. by companies VANAD, TRUMPF, PTV, MESSER, and
other.
An example of NC program in ISO format:
…
N3 G03 X180 Y0 I90 J0 M09
N4 G00 G41 D02 X450 Y0
N5 G03 X-180 Y0 I-90 J0 M07 F700
N7 G00 G40 X-88.29 Y-111.5

38 SAPSproW v19
4.8.4 ESSI-macro
ESSI-macro is a part of the NC-program in ESSI-format, e.g. in the following macro there is a defined
cutting of a rectangle with the dimensions of 100x50 mm, as macro No.3:
1003+
7
+1000+
++500
-1000+
+-500
8
38
5
+1200+
6
1003-
Macro can be recalled in the NC-program, for example after carrying out the following command the
NC-machine will cut altogether 9 rectangles:
100309
Macros are worth using where the same part or a group of parts are repeated in the cutting layout in
regular distances without a change of technology of cutting. With the use of the technology of macro
the length of NC-program file at these cutting layouts is much shorter. When reading the NC-program,
NC-machine saves the definition of the macro into its memory and when recalling the macro it reads it
from there several times and carries out the commands for cutting.
SAPSW can create macro at multiplying of the group of parts.
4.8.5 Nesting layout

It is a drawing of the plate of material with embedded parts. Parts in SAPSproW system can be inserted
into the cutting layout:
· interactively with the help of the mouse
· automatically, the position of the parts is determined by SAPSW
· by a combination of previous ways
4.8.6 Number of plates

The aim of NC-cutting are cut parts in the needed quality and quantity. At the same time it is not
unimportant how many cutting heads are used for cutting. According to the number of used parallel
cutting heads we can shorten the total time of cutting. In accordance with the quantity and size of parts
we can proceed in this way:
· we will suggest a multiple head layout, it means the cutting layout is divided into segments and the
parts are placed only into the first segment. One or more plates are put to the working desk of the
NC-machine.
· we will suggest a one head layout, it means parts are located into the whole area of the cutting
layout. Several plates are put on the working desk of NC-machine.
SAPSW means both the number of plates and the number of cutting heads in one plate automatically
with the quantity control.
4.8.7 Contour
It is an uninterrupted sequence of abscissas or circular arcs which is automatically created by SCADW
at the interactive creation of a part.
4.8.8 Continuous contour

It is a contour where the initial and endpoints merge (it is a hole or an outer outline of the part).

What is it? 39
4.8.9 Profile - uncontinuous contour

It is a contour (simply it is a line or some lines), where the initial and endpoints are different points.
Cutting of a profile in SAPSW can be used for various helping purposes like trimming of the plate,
cutting the remnant of the plate, lead-in creation-lock etc. Profiles are cut on NC-machine in a standard
way without the compensation of the cutting crack. If it is necessary, it is possible to set interactively
any compensation of cutting.
4.8.10 NC-program without compensation

SAPSproW enable the creation of an NC-program:
-with the automatic kerf compensation. Parts are constructed in SCADW program for the exact needed
dimension. ESSI-commands for the automatic compensation (29,30) will appear in NC-program.
-without turning on the automatic compensation of the cutting crack. Parts are constructed for the
needed dimension as well, but in the end you will use the function for the automatic change of
dimensions. SCADW will enlarge the outer dimensions and lessen the inner dimensions by a half of the
cutting crack.
4.8.11 Collision control

During the creation of cutting layouts when you are locating a new part, SAPSW automatically controls
the minimum distance from other earlier saved parts and the edge of the cutting layout. The collision
control can be interactively turned on/off.
4.8.12 Number of drawing

It is a group of signs which can be used for the identification of a part in SAPSproW system. If there is
no definite drawing documentation of the part, you can create any alphanumeric chain of signs (without
gaps), up to max. 30 signs, for example:
BNC-120/93/P12
4.8.13 Databank
It is a group of files in a DBISAM database system from the Elevate Software company (file extensions
DAT and IDX). The saved data enables the registering and automatic control of quantity of parts in the
cutting layouts and makes the whole process of programming work easier.
There are altogether 5 main database files:
· a database of standard data, it contains the data typical for a concrete way of cutting (oxyfuel,
plasma, laser, water jet) and for a concrete NC-machine and cutting heads
· a database of plates, with the data about whole plates of material for cutting
· a database of parts which contains the data about the number of drawing, material, number of
pieces, dimensions etc. for each part
· a database of remnant plates with the data about the existing remnants
· a database of finished cutting layouts where are the data about the created cutting layouts and
NC-programs
4.8.14 GEO files

They are text files. They are created by SCADW for the interactive construction, or files that are
converted from DXF-format. GEO-files contain geometric information useful for joined cutting on NC-
machine, identification data like the number of drawing and the file name, thickness, quality and text
data for depicting of text in the drawing of the part, or whole cutting layouts (number of drawing, date,
the way of the following cutting of the edges etc.).
4.8.15 DXF files

They are exit files from CAD programs, e.g. AUTOCAD. The file should contain clear contours of one
part. DXF-files are loaded by SCADW program which (besides its own conversion of DXF-format into
its internal GEO-format) controls the order of sections as well as the join of contours and removes
superfluous sections that are drawn over each other.

40 SAPSproW v19
4.8.16 VYK files

They are binary files of saved drawings of parts from SCADW. Unlike the GEO files where only
identification, geometric and text information are saved, in VYK files there are saved all helping points,
helping lines and dimension lines of the drawing.
4.8.17 DTL files

They are binary files of the drawings of details, they are created in SCADW. For example standard
construction cuts, holes, finishing of corners etc. can be saved as DTL. SCADW can place the DTL-
drawing exactly on the needed point in the drawing of the part, prospectively rotate the detail into the
needed angle.
4.8.18 ZBY files

They are text files with geometric data about the shape of the remnant plates. They are automatically
created by SAPSW program at saving a cutting layout in the case the area of the remnant has a
prescribed size. The shape of the automatically arisen remnant plate can be corrected in SCADW.
4.8.19 PLA files

They are text files, one PLA files arises for each cutting layout.
4.8.20 NCP files

NCP files are text files for the control of NC-cutting machine. NCP files are the main exit product of the
SAPSproW system. They are usually in standard ESSI-format or in ISO format, or DIN for NC-cutting.
4.8.21 MKR files

Geometric macros are dimensioned drawings of often repeated shapes like various rectangles with cut
corners etc. After loading in SCADW, on the screen there are (instead of dimension lines) text boxes
for setting concrete dimensions of parts. The user need not construct the part, he only must fill in the
text boxes.
4.9 SAPSproW files

4.9.1 Files in the SAPSproW
SAPSproW uses 2 kinds of files:
· system files which determine the working method of individual programs. It is not possible to use
the SAPSproW programs without these files.
· user files which are created by a user during his work
4.9.2 System files

System files are in directories:
· _Help (help files)
· _Cursors (shapes of mouse cursors, possible to change)
· _Import
· _Tmp (for temporary use)
· _Machine (data changed by the user according to the NC-machine type)
· _MKR (files of geometric macro)
Independent databank files are (extensions DAT and IDX):

· STANDARD, all data changed by the user according to the thickness of material
· PLATES, data about the plates of material
· PARTS, data about the user´s parts
· NESTINGS, data about the nested cutting layouts
· REMNANTS, data about the remnants from plates
Independent, individual files:

What is it? 41
· LOKALIZ.TXT, a text file for languages (English, Czech, Slovak, German, Hungarian, Polish,
Romanian, Croatian, Slovenian, Russian)
· files in the _INI directory, data changed by the user at setting up of programs with buttons
· REMARK.TXT, a text file for short notes
4.9.3 User´s files

User files are created during the user´s current work with SAPSproW. They are in each working
directory, in separate directories:
· GEO, geometry of parts in the files with the extension ".GEO". They are created by SCADW.
· DTL, geometry of details of parts in the files with the extension ".DTL". They are created by
SCADW.
· VYK, drawings of parts in the files with the extension ".VYK". They are created by SCADW.
· DXF, geometry in the files with the extension ".DXF". They are created by SCADW or by another
CAD-program.
· PLA, cutting layouts in the files with the extension ".PLA". They are created by SAPSW program.
· ZBY, geometry of remnant plates in the files with the extension ".ZBY". They are created by
SAPSW program.
· NCP, NC-programs in the files with the extension ".NCP". They are created by SAPSW program.
· TXT, a text file in FUR directory contains coordinates of points to lead-in a plate, it is used for
predrilling of holes in thick plates. The file is created by SAPSW program.
4.10 Data in tables

4.10.1 STANDARD table
1. Thick. - thickness of the plate [mm]
2. Quality - material quality (column visibility depends on program settings)
3. SpGrav - specific gravity [g/cm3] (column visibility depends on program settings)
4. CutSpeed - the programmed speed of cutting [mm/min]
5. Kerf - kerf width [mm]
6. Dist - distance of the parts [mm]
7. Edge - distance of the parts from the edge of the plate [mm]
8. Lead-in - length of the lead-in [mm]
9. L.-out - length or radius of the outer contour lead-out [mm]
10. L-outHole - length (number>0), or radius (number<0) of the hole lead-out [mm]
11. Stitch - width of the stitches [mm]
12. Stg.Ang - angle of the oblique stitch sides [°]
13. Bridg - width of the bridge [mm]
14. BrdgL-in - width of the bridge for the total cutting-off [mm]
15. PierceT- piercing time of the plate [s]
16. Hole - the hole diameter in piercing position on the plate [mm]
17. Price - a constant for the price calculation on the basis of the the length of cutting
18. PriceM - a constant for the price calculation on the basis of the length of marking
19. PriceP - a constant for the price calculation on the basis of the number of piercings
20. MatPrice - price of 1 kg of plate material
21. S2635 - text string, maximal 30 characters width
22. D1 - first limit of hole diameter, the cutting speed will be reduced under this value [mm]
23. M1 - constant, cutting speed = programmed speed x M1
24. K1 - constant, kerf compensation = 1/2 kerf x K1 (only for MGM Tábor)
25. D2 - second limit of hole diameter, the cutting speed will be reduced under this value [mm]
26. M2 - constans, cutting speed = programmed speed x M2
27. K2 - constant, kerf compensation = 1/2 kerf x K2 (only for MGM Tábor)
4.10.2 SHEETS table

1. PlatNum - number of plate. Maximal 30 character, letters allowed.
2. IDtab - plate identificator. Only number.

42 SAPSproW v19
3. Item - plate specification

4. DimNorm - dimension norm
5. CommitNorm - commitment norm
6. Certificate - plate material certification
7. Length - length of the plate [mm]
8. Width - width of the plate [mm]
9. Th - thickness of the plate [mm]
10. Quality - quality of the material
11. Num - the beginning number of plates [pcs]
12. Act - vacant, free number of plates [pcs]
13. Bur - number of the active cutting heads [pcs]
14. Dist - distance of parts [mm]
15. DistX1 - distance of the parts from the left edge of the plate [mm]
16. DistX2 - distance of the parts from the right edge of the plate [mm]
17. DistY1 - distance of the parts from the lower edge of the plate [mm]
18. DistY2 - distance of the parts from the upper edge of the plate [mm]
19. MatPrice - price of 1 kg of plate material
20. Note
Note:
We recommend to set the 14th-18th data to zero. In this case SAPSW will use the data from the
Standard table for new cutting layouts.
4.10.3 PARTS table

1. Label - label of the part
2. ID - change identificator (the line will be replaced)
3. Item - part specification
7. File - name of the part´s GEO-file
8. Drawing - number of the drawing
11. Num - number of pieces for cutting [pcs]
12. Act - yet not saved, free number of parts' pieces [pcs]
13. Area - area for the part [m2]
14. Weight - weight of the part [kg]
15. Length - length of the part [mm]
16. Width - width of the part [mm]
17. Circumfer - length of contours [mm]
18. Date - date of the part' s creation
19. CutDat - the needed date of cutting
4.10.4 NESTINGS table

1. Label - label of the cutting layout
2. Name - name of the cutting layout´s file
3. Date - date of the cutting layout´s creation
8. Pcs - number of plates [pcs]
9. % - percentage of the material utilisation [%]
10. Circumference - the total length of the parts´ circumferences [m]
11. Cutting - the real length of cutting [m]

What is it? 43
12. Note
4.10.5 REMNANTS table

1. RestNum - identification number of the remnant plate
2. ID - change identificator
3. Item - part specification
7. Name - name of the remnant plate
8. Thick - thickness of the plate [mm]
10. Num. - starting number of remnants [pcs]
11. Act - number of actually present remnants [pcs]
12. Date - date of the cutting layout' s creation
15. Area - area of the remnant plate in [m2]
16. Remark

How to use?
Chapter
V
How to use? 45
5 How to use?
5.1 Interactive help
SAPSW program informs the user in 5 possible ways:
1. The menu displays the help after pressing the F1 key or after clicking at "Help" in the line
2. Click to "Search" in the menu opens the window to search the text of the whole helpfile
3. In some windows (the basic side of SAPSW, SAPSW and SCADW setting ...) you can see
there the button for so-called question-mark help, in the upper right corner. After clicking at
and then at an operating element of the program a help window for this element will appear. The
same window appears if you click at the operating element and then you press the F1 key.
4. If you set the mouse cursor at an operating element, a brief piece of information will be displayed for
a moment. Time of display of the information text is possible to be set.
5. It displays the status information before each needed action of the user in the lower status line
Notes:
- if a question-mark help is possible (i.e. is visible), then except the basic side of SAPSW no
buttons for minimalization and maximalization of the window are visible in the upper right corner of the
window
- the question-mark kind of help is not displayed for the buttons
5.2 Unassigned help

Not every control element in SAPS involve a question-mark help. Try to find directly in the help file text
the requested information. Start the help from the main menu, the search button is in the Content tab.
5.3 Main window of the program

The main window of the program is displayed after the start of SAPSW. You can see the drop-down
list for the choice of the working directory and the list for the choice of the standard data. From
another window (addition of parts, creation of technology or creation of NC-program) it
is possible to come back to the main window by loosening the pressed key into its upper position.
5.4 Notes
Click "NOTEPAD" or press F8 in the menu in the "Program" menu. If you do so after the search for the
cutting layouts (F7 key or from the Nestings menu), then NOTEPAD will automatically display the last
created text file with the description of the search result.
5.5 Cancel the cursor movement limitation

At the cutting layout creation you often create a window by the help of the mouse, e.g. for the
identification of a group of parts or for the choice of a cutout for enlargement etc. In order to make the
window creation easier, at the pulling of the window SAPSW limits the cursor movement onto the
working area where all control elements of the program do not lie. If you do not want to finish the action
which is just being carried out, then press at first the Esc key. The mouse movement limitation is
canceled then. In a similar way, the movement is canceled by clicking at , , buttons into the
unpressed upper position.
5.6 Backup copy of SAPSproW

To create a backup copy of the SAPSproW is an easy to do process. It is enough to copy or pack the
whole SAPSproW installation directory to another disk. While the SAPSproW do not use registration
and do not saves any data into the Registry (only the software of the hardware key - what is made at
first installation of SAPSproW), you may copy the archived SAPS to any directory under any name,
and the SAPSW.EXE will be able to start from that directory. You may have in your computer, if you
wish, more SAPSproW-s of the same or different version.

46 SAPSproW v19
5.7 Archiving files

-click at the button or at the "Nestings" tab on the basic side
-select the cutting layouts that you want to archive
-write the name of the new directory into the drop-down list under the "Archives" button (it will be
automatically created in C:\SAPSproW\Working Directory\ARCHIVES), or choose an existing
directory from the drop-down list
-click at the "Archives" button. They will be copied into the set directory in the form of the same tree
structure as in the working directory:
· the selected files of the cutting layouts (PLA filetype)
· the appropriate ready NC programs
· the parts files of the GEO type, which are situated in the selected cutting layouts
· the SAPSproW's set-up files (STANDARD.DAT+IDX, _SETUP.BIN and the current XXX.MCH).
5.8 Material quality and specific weight

Mainly at plasma cutting, where it is possible to cut various material categories with many material
qualities, in the STANDARD table should be created many data lines, and therefore is not easy to
maintain and correct data in the table. It is therefore better in the SAPS settings on the NC MACHINE,
MECHANICS tab select the "in the QUALITY.TXT file" selection (that means, the quality and spec.weight
are not in the STANDARD saved, but in the QUALITY.TXT file).
In the STANDARD table there can be also at this setting more lines for one material thickness - with the
same thickness but various values in the other columns (e.g. with other cutting speed for other material
quality).
This is achieved by an integer value in the S2635 column of table. The value can be selected at the
moment of creating a new cutting layout from the PARAMETERS drop-down list. As soon as You fill in
the material thickness at creating the new cutting layout, the drop-down list will show the appropriate
parameters from the STANDARD table.
QUALITY.TXT:
1. If in a data line is no "machine" listed in the file, then this actual quality will be presented in the
material quality selection drop-down lists regardless of the currently selected NC "machine" from the
list.
2. A new line in the QUALITY.TXT will be created, if at saving a new part (GEO file) or at creating a new
cutting layout, you fill up an unknown new material quality. If at following question You answer only with
the value of the specific weight, then the new material quality will be shown in the material quality
selection boxes for every existing NC "machines". If You answer with value of spec.weight and the "/"
character (e.g. 7,85 / ), then the new quality will be in the future shown only for the presently selected
NC "machine".
MACHINE drop-down list in the main window:

It is good for every one physically existing NC machine and for every sort of material to create a
separate "machine". E.g. for an NC machine of type CORTA with autogen and plasma cutting heads,
and a second machine CORTINA equipped only with plasma cutting head, it is e.g. appropriate creating
of following "machines":
CORTA-AC (autogen - acetylene gas cutting)
CORTA-PS (plasma - standard steel)
CORTA-PR (plasma - rustles steel)
CORTINA-AL (plasma - aluminium)
CORTINA-PS (plasma - standard steel)
CORTINA-PR (plasma - rustles steel)
That means, in summary 6 lines in the drop-down list. For every "machine" should You create (or
copy from already existing tables) the data lines for various material thicknesses and the specific S2635
(parameter) value for lines with the same material thickness.

How to use? 47
5.9 Control with keyboard, mouse

5.9.1 Shortkeys
In SAPSW program:
· F1 ... help
· F2 ... save the actual cutting layout
· Ctrl+F2 ... close the actual cutting layout window
· F3 ... create a new cutting layout
· Shift+F3 ... call out one old cutting layout
· Ctrl+F3 ... call out several old cutting layouts
· F4 ... change data of the actual cutting layout
· F5 ... change cutting heads
· F6 ... display ECO-data of the cutting layout
· F7 ... search cutting layouts
· F8 ... start NOTEPAD
· F10 ... call out the last cutting layout
5.9.2 Right button of the mouse

In SAPSW program:
· continuous holding ( pressed) ... fluent rotation
· arrow click ( pressed) ... automatic multiplying
· pulling ( pressed) ... interactive addition
· click at the MAX button ...refresh of the screen
· click at button...automatically enlarge distances of parts
· click at the "InfoXY" button...depiction of the parallel contour round the yellow-numbered parts
· click at a part in the cutting layout ...writing out of a bubble help with the drawing name and
number, number of parts in the cutting layout...
· click at the cutting layout or at the working area ...writing out of a bubble help with the cutting layout
name and data
· click at lead-in or chain cutting...draw orthogonal lines
In VIEWER program:
· click at a drawing ... display the part and data to the whole screen, second click shows the
VIEWER again
5.9.3 Enlarging, shifting

It is possible to change measuring scales and shift a drawing within the screen also with help of "e, a, s,
d, f, x" keys. Similar to the dynamic change of the measuring scale and shifting of the drawing with the
mouse, it is possible to use these functions at the control from the keyboard, in the middle of inserting
of a part into a cutting layout or a change of the position in the cutting layout, let us say in the course of
drawing of one geometric section in SCADW.
[e]
¬[a] [s]- [d]+ [f] ®
[x]
Ż
5.9.4 Mouse roller

The mouse roller enables:
-in SAPSW to enlarge the active cutting layout
-in SAPSW to enlarge the NC program (the window)
-in SCADW to enlarge a part
-in the VIEWER to change pages.

48 SAPSproW v19
5.10 Data exchange with external programs

5.10.1 Data import from a production control system
PARTS table:
The table can be filled in by the "Insert from ACS" button or from the text file. The file name extension is
REQ (e.g. CATERP.REQ). In SAPSproW's machine independent settings on the ECO tab there is
necessary to set a subdirectory for the REQ files. The first line in the file is a random text, in other lines
there are:
ID | Item | drawing number | thickness | quality | piece count | date of cutting | DimNorm | CommitNorm
| Certificate | Label | part name | notes
The items in the line are divided by characters ";" or "|". After loading the file, in the VIEWER appear
the data (if the GEO file of the part does not exist yet, then only as an empty window with a text) and in
SCADW there is possible to draw or import appropriate geometric shapes of parts.
PLATES and REMNANTS table:

The loading of the plate´s data (similar to the parts) is automated. The file name extension for the
PLATES is MAT. For remnants it is ZBT. The first line in the file is a random text. In the other lines there
are:
PlatNum | ID | Remnant name | Item | thickness | quality | piece count | length | width | DimNorm |
CommitNorm | Certificate | notes.
5.10.2 Output from tables

Creating TXT or XLS files:
The output of the ECO-data into TXT or XLS files is carried out at the NC-program transfer into the
LINK directory, it means after a click at OK+LINK button in the "Notes for the machine operator"
window, or after a click with the right mouse button at icon for a cutting layout saving.
Creating a LOG-file:
At click to the OK+LINK button will be a special LOG file created or modified. This file includes date,
time, computer name, full filename of the cutting layout, full name of the TXT and XLS files. In case that
any from the both file types are not allowed in the SAPSW setup, instead of the filename will be there
the "" characters. You can specify the directory for the LOG file in the machine independent settings on
the ECO tab.
5.10.3 Output of ECO files

SAPS creates suitable ECO printouts, which are usable for most of program users. To satisfy specific
needs, the user can create his own user specific programs. SAPS can automatically create input data
for these user programs.
The LOGFILE.TXT file:

This file contains the list of created NC programs. The data structure is as following:
Data Time Computer "Path to layout" "Path to text ECO file" "Path to ECO file in XLS format"
The creating of LOGFILE file is requested in the "SAPSW-system settings" on the ECO tab. The SAPS
will manage the LOGFILE.TXT, if the text box is not empty. SAPS writes to the LOGFILE.TXT at saving
the NC program (OK+LINK button, or right click to the button).
ECO files:
SAPS creates for every NC program a single ECO data file. The data structure is commented in the file.
Using external programs:

An external program have to sequentially read the lines in the LOGFILE.TXT. From there it knows,
where are the TXT or XLS data files. Afterwards it reads the ECO file (better is the TXT format, you can
find the needed data by the "#" identifier lines). Afterwards it should process the data, then print, or

How to use? 49
save, etc. At the end it should delete the processed lines from the LOGFILE.TXT.
Remark:
From the program developer can be requested a Delphi Pascal example for reading the TXT file
5.11 Changing the names

5.11.1 Changing the part names
You can change partnames as a group with the RENAME button in the PARTS table. Before the click,
label the needed lines in the PARTS (with double-click or with CTRL key). Click the RENAME, after it
You can type the new names, or the starting grouping characters. The RENAME modifies in the actual
working directory the text in the PARTS table, the GEO file names and the GEO names in the PLA
layout files. In the NESTINGS table the modified layouts will be labeled in the "?" column. You can open
the modified cutting layouts with checking the LIST check box in the main program window.
5.11.2 Changing the layout names

You can change the cutting layout's name in the NESTINGS table. After changing the name move the
cursor to a new line. SAPS will automatically change also the names of the PLA, NC program and ECO
file.
5.12 Work in the net

5.12.1 Work in the net
SAPSproW is able to work independently on one computer, or several SAPSproW systems can work
together in the Windows net. The data accessing server can be only one, where all parts and cutting
layouts will be concentrated, or the data can be individually dislocated according to the needs (e.g.
according to the thickness and quality) on several computers. the preferable choice of the net computer
can be saved together with other data in the window for SAPSproW with a click to the button and
then by immediately closing the setup window.
It is necessary to set up the shared access for individual computers for the work in the net.
5.12.2 Choice of the computer

The computer is chosen in the main menu in the "Net" menu.
5.13 VIEWER
5.13.1 VIEWER
It is a program module, it works with 6 kinds of files:
· geometric files of parts (GEO)
· geometric files of parts (DXF)
· drawing files (VYK))
· drawing files of details (DTL)
· geometric files of remnant plates (ZBY)
· NC-programs (NCP)
-the geometric shape of files is displayed on the screen in several lines and columns in the form of
pictures of optional size, from which the user can choose his needed file by a click (e.g.he can choose
a cutting layout for correction or choose another part to insert it into the cutting layout)
-the VIEWER in the case of parts (GEO) automatically controls the number of parts while inserting them
into cutting layouts and erasing them from cutting layouts. You do not have to count the pieces in
cutting layouts and it cannot happen that parts are uselessly cut, or on the other hand that some parts
are missing.
5.13.2 Display/take off the screen

-the VIEWER appears when you pull the mouse towards the lower side of the screen into the space
where the help of SAPSW program is written out.

50 SAPSproW v19
-the VIEWER disappears when the mouse leaves the area of the VIEWER window or at inserting of a
part into the cutting layout
-the VIEWER is permanently visible when the "Max.dimension" check box on the basic side of SAPSW
is unchecked
5.13.3 Change VIEWER parts from the table

- click at in the main window and click at "Parts" tab
- in the "PARTS" tables, with help of the LABEL and the following buttons can You label your needed
parts
- immediately after it You can select in the VIEWER in the drop-down list the newly defined label. Only
the parts with that label will be displayed in the table and in the VIEWER. For the "*" sign as the label,
all parts will be displayed

5.14.1 Create a new working directory
Write a new name into the "WorkDir" drop-down list on the basic side and press Enter. A new working
directory will be created in the ...\SAPSproW directory and a lot of other directories with several
database files of DBISAM type in it.
5.14.2 Choose the working directory

Click at the "WorkDir" button of the drop-down list on the basic side, the names of existing working
directories will be displayed.
· click at the needed line, or
· set the needed line with the help of á or â keys. The directory is automatically changed, that is
why it is not necessary to click or to press ENTER.
Beside of drop-down list are two buttons, with these can You select after the start of SAPS already
selected working directories. Previous directory - arrow up, next directory - arrow down.
5.14.3 Cancel the working directory

The working directory is erased in a common way by the Windows means or with the help of any file
manager. Working directories are to be found in the SAPSW installation directory (implicitly C:
\SAPSproW).
5.15 Tables
5.15.1 Columns width
In all tables, after their depiction on the screen, there is possible to set the width of columns if you click
at the right side of the rectangle with the name of the column and you pull the mouse.
In the tables is a button of "Columns width" name. The SAPS after a click to this button recreate the
standard old order of columns in the table. In addition SAPS changes the width of columns in that
manner, that as the names of columns so the data will be completely shown in the column.
5.15.2 Print out the tables

-click at in the main program window
-choose the needed table (the contents of the "NC-machine" tab is printed from the "Standard" tab, after
the print of table lines) and click at
-if you need you can click at . In the windows there is possible to set the way of print, you can
define a different setting for each table. The exception is the print of date, time and page number into
the heading of the page, this setting is valid for all tables.
-SAPSW in the PARTS table prints depending on the setting only the columns which are visible on the
screen.
-click at

How to use? 51
Note:
It is not possible to interrupt the print directly in SAPSW. That is why it is useful before the print to
install the printer from the control panel into the lower panel of the current WINDOWS programs. In
case of emergency the print can be then interrupted and canceled.
5.15.3 Sort the lines

Tables can be sorted according to the columns whose heading is finished with a question mark. For
example:
For "Parts" the data table can be sorted according to the column:
-name of the part´s file
-number of drawing
-thickness
-date of creation
-needed date of cutting
For "Nestings" the data table can be sorted according to the column:
-name of the cutting layout
-date of creation
5.15.4 Standard sorting of lines

Tables can be sorted according of the columns whose heading is finished with a question mark. The
standard way of sorting (which SAPSW will use after its start) can be set in the "Parts" table:
-go through all tables and click at the heading of the needed column everywhere
-set the "Part" table and click at there
-choose which columns will be visible in "Parts"
5.15.5 Packing of tables

-the line which you erase from the database file with button stays physically in his place. That is
why the extent of various database files enlarges in the course of time. It is not a problem because
these files are not too long.
-if you want to see the real state of databanks, click at the "Databank state" button in the "Control" in
on the basic side of SAPSW. It will show the number of physically engaged lines and the number
of erased lines for each databank. If you want to take the erased lines off the files for ever, then click
at the "Condense databanks" button.
5.15.6 Select lines in table

You can select a line or remove the selection with a double click or with the CTRL key. In the PARTS
and NESTINGS tables You can right click the "?" column header to show a popup menu. You can select
in this menu the creation or removing the selection for all visible lines.
5.15.7 "Standard"
5.15.7.1 Choose the standard data
Click at the button of the drop-down list on the basic side, the names of the existing standard data
will be displayed
· click at the needed line, or …
· set the needed line with the help of or { keys. Standard data are changed automatically so that it
is not necessary to click or to press ENTER.
5.15.7.2 Erase the standard data
-click at on the basic side
-click at "Standard"
-check "Corrections"
-click at . The current standard data will be canceled and another existing group of standard data
will be displayed in the table.

52 SAPSproW v19
5.15.7.3 Correction of the table data

-click at on the basic side and at "Standard" tab
-check "Corrections" (there can be no cutting layout on the screen)
-if you want to erase a line, set the cursor on the line and press
-if you want to add another line, set the cursor on the nearest value of thickness and press button
-correct the contents of the lines in the common way in accordance with the real parameters of cutting,
let us say your requirements.
5.15.7.4 Price of cutting
SAPSW can count the real price of cutting. To do this it is necessary to write prices in the STANDARD
table:
-1 m of cutting according to the thickness of material and the kind of machine
-1 m of marking
-1 lead-in of table
In the printed ECO data or the preview the price will appear there in the table according to particular
kinds of parts even as a sum of prices. The prices is calculated as:
"length of cutting" x "item from the table" x "item from text box 1"
+
"length of marking" x "item from the table" x "item from text box 2" +
"number of lead-ins" x "item from the table" x "item from text box 3"
-with the help of text boxes 1-3 the calculation of price can be easily changed according to current
needs
-if you double click at a text box, all prices will change in the particular column in the currently displayed
STANDARD table. These changes will turn into permanent changes.
-all prices for all STANDARD tables (e.g. inflation effect) can be changed at once by a button
-in the setting before the print in ECO tab there is possible to choose which data columns are to be
printed. It is necessary to leave out a data column so that the price goes to the line. Or it is possible to
change the number of signs for particular data columns in the LOKALIZ.TXT file.
Note:
It is possible to let print out the price into ECO, this price is calculated from the time of the NC-machine
running.
5.15.7.5 New standard data
5.15.7.5.1 New standard data
-put away all cutting layouts in-process from the screen
-write a new name of standard data in the drop-down list and press Enter
-click at and "Standard" tab. There is just one line of data in the displayed table. The table can be
filled in with data in two ways:
· addition of lines from another already existing table and the following correction of lines
· copying of particular lines step by step and their correction
Note:
1. The set item for the length of lead-in has usually a different meaning for particular kinds of lead-ins.
2. The lead-out after cutting can have a different length for holes and a different one for the outer
contour. If a zero value is set, then there will be none.
5.15.7.5.2 Add the lines of another table
In the newly established table there is just one line of data. After addition all lines of the existing table will
be transferred into this new current table of standard data. You can erase the original line or correct it
together with the correction of other lines.
-press the button of the drop-down list
-click at the line with the name of a suitable standard data table
-confirm

How to use? 53
5.15.7.5.3 Copy and correct a line

-check "Corrections"
-copy the table lines into other lines by pressing button. The line where the cursor is situated is
copied. You can copy one line for each thickness of material you want to cut. If the standard data stay
the same for several thicknesses, you can enter only 1 line, e.g. when the previous line is for thickness
7 and the following one for thickness 10, then SAPSW will use the 10 line data for thicknesses 7.5, 8,
8.5, 9, 9.5 and 10 mm.
-correct the contents of the lines in the common way according to the real parameters, let us say you
requirements.
5.15.8 "Plates"
5.15.8.1 Erase plates
The ERASE button erase the lines from the table, which has already null pieces in the ACT column.
5.15.8.2 A new plate into the table
-click at on the basic side and click at the "Plates" tab
-check the "Corrections" check box
-set the pointer at a line. This line will be copied into the table.
-click at button
-correct the new line according to your requirements
5.15.9 "Parts"
5.15.9.1 Erase parts
SAPS afterwards asks, if it can erase the corresponding GEO files too.
5.15.9.2 Reset the actual quantities
SAPSW shows the number of parts pieces which can be inserted into cutting layouts in the "Act"
column. When the parts are saved, The "Act" number is zero. The number can be interactively
corrected for a particular part or for all visible parts by the "Recall pieces" button.
-click at on the basic side and click at "Parts"
-click with the left mouse button at the "Recall pieces" button, or...
-click with the right mouse button at the "Recall pieces" button. The ACT pieces will be changed in every
visible line to a multiply of PS number. The multiplier can be smaller or greater as 1.
5.15.9.3 Get GEO data
-click at on the basic side and the "Parts" tab
-click at "Get GEO data" and then at a suitable menu line
-if you want to refresh the table completely, then choose a menu line with the table erasing. SAPSW will
erase all data in the table, then in the current file it will search and start to read particular files of GEO
parts. It will find out the parts´ data in the found files (drawing, thickness, quality, number...) and it will
insert them in "Parts". With the complete data refreshment the information about the number of pieces
of earlier saved parts in cutting layouts will be lost.
-if you want to keep the old data in the databank, choose the possibilities without erasure. SAPSW will
search GEO files and in the case that the part has not had its data in the "Parts" databank yet, it will
insert them.
-it is possible to sort the lines of the table by clicking at the heading of the columns that are finished with
a question mark
-the order of columns can be changed by pulling with the mouse (click at the column heading, hold
pressed and pull the mouse)
Notes:
-you need to create the whole new "Parts" table only in an extraordinary situation. e,g, for the transfer
of GEO-files from the SAPS program system for MSDOS into SAPSproW.

54 SAPSproW v19
-the data of parts are in the common inserted into the PARTS table automatically by the SCADW
program.
5.15.9.4 Get REQ data
The "Get REQ data" button in the PARTS table read the data of parts from a text file with REQ file name
attachment. The data divider character is the "|", or the ";" character. Consequently, for creating a REQ
file you can use every utility program which is able to create the CSV file format.
The structure of lines in the file is simple. The first line is only comment. In the other lines it is enough to
type the material thickness, quality, piece count, part name. The count of ";" characters should be
remained. On every place in the line can be any number of spaces.
E.g.:
;;;5;st-37;20;;;;;;pcv15;
Remark:
The creation of the REQ file may be useful also at importing large number of files in form of CAD
drawings. The SCADW program module at saving the drawings to the form of GEO parts first searches
for part name in the PARTS table, and if it finds the name, then it will fill at saving the GEO file every text
box with values from the table. So it is not needed every data to interactively type, or search and find
them in various part lists.
5.15.9.5 Label the parts
Label is an alphanumeric text, max. 30 signs and it is saved in the line of "PARTS" table. Label can be
entered after drawing of part at saving at the disk. Label will be inserted into the table automatically by
SCADW program.
It is possible to change or enter label straight in the "Parts" databank as well. Before creating label, it is
possible to sort out the table with the FILTER button to limit the number of visible lines.
Technique:
- remove all cutting layouts from the screen
- click at on the basic side, click at the "Parts" tab and at the LABEL button
- click at a suitable line in the "New label" drop-down list or write a suitable label (except "~" which is
reserved for parts created on the same day "today´s parts").
1. One part labeling

3 possible ways:
-set the pointer in the table at the needed data line. Click at "Ch1" button. The label in the line will
change (the line can disappear, if the filtering of table is set so) and the pointer will move to the next
line.
-or double click at a table line
-or the label can be also written straight from the keyboard into particular lines of the table
2. Labeling all visible lines:

-from every visible line remove the selection of lines (i.e. from every line remove the red mark in the
"?" column), or on the contrary, select every line (in every line has to be the red mark). To select as
a group, the easiest way is to right click to the "?", and select from the popup menu.
-click at the "Change" button
3. Labeling only some visible lines:

-select the appropriate lines (red mark only in these lines)
-click at the "Change" button
4. Automatic labels
The AUT.LABEL button will label every visible line, according to the combination of thickness and
quality. In the "SCADW - setting", "Control" tab, "Aut.label" is possible to set the maximal number of
characters in the labels.

How to use? 55
5.15.9.6 Cutting time

The "Cutt.time" button computes the cutting time (time is independent from the number of active heads).
At left click it computes the cutting time of every actual visible part in the table, multiplied by the ACT
number of pieces. At right click it computes only the labeled ("?" column) parts in the table.
5.15.9.7 Material consumption
With the help of data of PARTS table is possible to compute the needed amount of plates. In the PARTS
table there are a check box ONLY THE LABELED PARTS and a text box to write in the average material
utilisation. SAPS multiplies in every selected line (or in every one of them) the area with the number of
number of not nested parts. The result modifies with material utilisation. Afterwards searches the
PLATES table and for the first 20 found different plate formats counts the number of required plates.
5.15.9.8 Weight
The "Weight" button computes the weight of the labeled parts in the table. At left click it computes the
weight of labeled parts multiplied by the "Act" piece count. At right click the weight of labeled parts
multiplied by the "Ps" piece count.
5.15.9.9 Filter
In PARTS the FILTER button will enable to display the filtered data lines. It is possible to set also partial
data with "*" at the end of the entry into the filters. Thickness can be set as one number or as FROM -
TO interval, e.g. 6.5 - 8. If you want only the filtered parts to be displayed in the VIEWER, it is
necessary to click at LABEL, choose a new label and click at CHANGE.
5.15.9.10 Erase lines from the table
- click at on the basic side and at "Parts"
- check the "Corrections" check box
- it is possible to erase more lines in the "Parts" databank by the button. If at least one line is
selected in the table, then SAPS ask if it have to delete only the selected lines. At negative answer
SAPS deletes every visible line in the table. In front of click to can You use some data filtering
values, and so define which lines has to be visible and offered to deleting.
- with button is possible to erase the line, where the cursor is situated. If the "GEO" check box is
checked, then the GEO type file will be erased too.
5.15.9.11 Changing pieces in the GEO files
In the table there is a PS GEO button. This makes possible to change the value of pieces in a group of
GEO files, which has labeled rows in the table. It write in into the GEO the value from the PS column of
the table. The changing of pieces through this button is more "persisting" as the change only in the
table, because after erasing every row and a new fill in, the table will show the pieces from the GEO
files.
5.15.9.12 Find identical
The "GEO" button finds geometrically equal parts - GEO files, which have less deviation at end points
and at radiuses as 0,1 mm. The "Search everywhere" check box enables finding of parts in single step
in every working directory. The button shows the created list. The list of found parts is in the ...
\_TMP\IDENTICAL.TXT file.
5.15.9.13 Copy elsewhere
The SAPS can move some parts from the actual working directory to another user directory. In the
PARTS table label the requested parts, and in the drop-down list select the target directory. The SAPS
will copy the parts (the GEO and the VYK files).
If you check before the "Copy and erase" check box, then SAPS in the original directory deletes the
files. Afterwards you can switch to the target directory, and click in the PARTS table the "Get GEO data"
button. Select the appropriate option.

56 SAPSproW v19
5.15.9.14 Optimal layout

The button will find the best layout with the maximal material utilisation. First select in the "?" column
of the PLATES table the plates, from which can SAPS compute the best layout. Afterwards place the
mouse cursor in the PARTS table to the line with the part which has the outer contour in form of a circle
(it may be a flange, or it may have more openings). Afterwards click the button.
5.15.10 "Nestings"
5.15.10.1 Select, search out... the layouts
In the "Nestings" databank there is possible to bring the following activities into effect:
-select the cutting layouts
-search out the cutting layouts
-archive the cutting layouts
-erase the cutting layouts from the table
-erase the cutting layouts with files
5.15.10.2 Reset the table
Look up the tab with the NESTINGS table and erase all lines by button. Call the window for
searching out cutting layouts (F7 or from the menu). SAPSW at the basis of existing PLA files will insert
partly filled-in lines into the table and select them. It is possible to complete the missing data by a
successive calling of all cutting layouts with the help of "List". In so doing you needn´t save the cutting
layouts , it is sufficient to close them after their display.
5.15.10.3 Cancel the nesting layouts
In the NESTINGS table there is possible to erase the cutting layouts which are for some or other
reasons inconvenient, and again let reset automatically the previous number of pieces of parts and
plates, in some case of remnant plates. Numbers of parts will come back into the VIEWER and into
appropriate tables. Select the needed lines in the NESTINGS table, click at the ERASE button and
choose the third line of the offer.
5.15.11 "Remnants"
5.15.11.1 Erase remnants
SAPS afterwards asks, if it can erase the corresponding ZBY files too.
5.15.11.2 Remnants
-the content of the table is automatically up-dated by SAPSW program
-if the table was automatically opened, i.e.a new cutting layout for a remnant plate is just being created,
then it is possible to choose the needed remnant by a double click.
5.15.12 Import tables in EXCEL

Sometimes it is useful read-in the tables into the EXCEL, work with them, and then output the corrected
tables to their initial positions. The EXCEL can not directly work with DBISAM databases, but You can
export the table data from SAPSproW in XLS format. The appropriate command is in the SAPSW
settings, on the "Service" tab. After working with the data in the EXCEL, save your corrected data with
"Save as..." and select "As text (divided by tabulators). In the SAPSproW finally import backward the
data.
5.16 Error states of SAPSproW

5.16.1 Errors in tables
For data saving SAPSproW uses databank system DBISAM from the Elevate Software company. In an
extraordinary case (sometimes after Windows blocks, power cut etc.) the inner structure of indexes in
the database files can get damaged. It is usually possible to correct this kind of faults by packing of the
tables.

How to use? 57
5.16.2 Error statistics

A majority of errors which appear in SAPSproW or in Windows is caught by the proper SAPSW.EXE
program. Then, if it is possible, SAPSW will automatically call out a regression function which will set up
the previous error-free state. At the same time it will save particular data into the ...\_ERROR directory
in order to be able to identify errors later.
If the computer is connected to the internet and an appropriate mailing program is installed (e.g.
Outlook Express), then SAPS after an error automatically creates an error message for the program
developer (at address home@antalsoftware.sk). You can afterward add to the message some detailed
information about the conditions in time of arising the error, and send the message for proving and
correcting the SAPSW.EXE.
You can also send every time a message by means of the main program menu "Support", choice "Send
question or error message". The resulting message is the same as it would be created automatically in
case of a program or data error.

Settings
Chapter
VI
Settings 59
6 Settings
6.1 Types of settings
- for changing of set-up data of the SAPSproW, without considering the selected NC machine, click
with left mouse button to
- for specific set-up of data of the selected NC machine click with the right mouse button to
6.2 Save settings

Close the setting window, the data will be saved automatically to appropriate file in the _INI directory.
6.3 Main window of the program

6.3.1 Main menu
In the menu there are possible the following main selections:
Program, Nestings, Net, Support, Stop.
In the Support menu "Send question or error message" selection, is possible to let automatically create
an archive ZIP file and send it in an appropriate email to the program developer ANTAL Software EHTi.
SAPS into the email puts the ZIP file as an attachment. This attachment contains the user program
settings and the data of a cutting layout. The layout in the attachment is:
- the actual opened active cutting layout
- if no layout is open, then it is the last layout in which an error have been raised
- if no layout is open, nor there does not exist any layout with error, then it is the first layout named in
the NESTINGS table
If SAPS in time of executing detects a system error, then it offer the possibility of automatic creation of
the error message and of the ZIP file.
6.3.2 Drop-down lists

6.3.2.1 Working directory
The name of the active working directory is written here. You will choose another existing working
directory with help of the triangle in the drop-down list. You will create a new empty working directory so
that you write a new name into the "WorkDir" drop-down list and press the Enter key.
6.3.2.2 Machine - standard data
The name for a compact group of standard data, selectable from the drop-down list. Standard data will
determine the shape of the output NC-program. The shape is different for different types of NC-
machines, different cutting media, thicknesses of material and so on. You will create a new group of
standard data so that write a new name into the drop-down list and press the Enter key.
6.3.2.3 Names of parts
The drop-down list can appear on the left side of the drop-down list, it depends on the SAPSW
setting. The drop-down list contains a list of parts, you can insert another part into the cutting layout by
clicking at the line of the drop-down list.
6.3.3 Check boxes

6.3.3.1 More
It will display several more check boxes. The number of check box's depends on the state of the
program, the number of displayed cutting layouts and the number of cutting heads in the cutting layout.
6.3.3.2 Contours
After checking it only the proper contours of parts will be drawn, without arrows for cutting direction,
without endpoints and ordinal numbers.

60 SAPSproW v19
6.3.3.3 List
The cutting layouts can be successively recalled one after another on the screen from a list of selected
cutting layouts. After closing the opened cutting layout another cutting layout from the list will be
automatically depicted on the screen. You will create the list with help of searching cutting layouts (the
F7 key), or directly by selecting cutting layouts in the NESTINGS table.
6.3.3.4 Viewer
The cutting layout will be displayed in the max. scale on the whole free part of the screen, a cutting
layout and the VIEWER can overlap. If it is not checked, the screen will be divided between the cutting
layout and the VIEWER window.
6.3.3.5 Pieces
It will switch on/off the piece control. If it is switched on, the program controls the user at inserting a
part into the cutting layout (from the VIEWER, by addition, by shift...) on basis of the pieces number in
the "Parts" databank. At the cutting layouts correction the erased number of pieces comes back again
into the table.
6.3.3.6 Thick./Qual
It will switch on/off the thickness and quality control of material. If it is switched on, the program will not
allow to insert a part with a different quality or thickness into the cutting layout.
6.3.3.7 Width
The check box can switch on/off the draw of NC machine's working width. The function of this switch
can be in the setup of SAPSW generally prohibited.
6.3.3.8 Bench
Switch on/off the drawing of the NC machine's cutting bench.
6.3.3.9 Lamellas
Switch on/off the drawing of lamellas in the NC machine's cutting bench.
6.3.3.10 Over
If more cutting layouts are displayed, it will arrange the cutting layouts over or next to each other. If less
than 2 cutting layouts are displayed, the check box cannot be seen.
6.3.3.11 Same
If more cutting layouts are displayed, it will display the cutting layouts in the mutually same scale. If less
than 2 cutting layouts are displayed, the check box cannot be seen.
6.4 Print setting, DXF

6.4.1 Basic possibilities
On the setting panel there is possible:
-to permit/forbid the print of the cutting layout title
-to permit/forbid the print of ECO-data
-to choose the scale
-to change the scale
-to enter the maximum permitted height of the drawing on paper in mm
-to enter the number of print copies
-to choose the print orientation on paper
-to start the print of one drawing
-to display the window for the cutting layout print from the list of cutting layouts
-to let print the cutting layout drawing, or let create a DXF-file from the drawing.
After setting the printer with the button, the SAPS saves the settings into the file...\_INI
\PRINTPROPS.BIN. You can set up more printers. This settings does not influence the settings used the
Windows.

Settings 61
6.4.2 Drawing layout

6.4.2.1 Layout title
It is possible to set up various kinds of printing the cutting layout title and the height of the text for the
title.
6.4.2.2 Direction of cutting
Determine the place and the way of drawing the arrows for setting the direction of cutting.
6.4.2.3 Distance
The distance of the drawing from the paper edges in mm.
6.4.2.4 Point - centre sign
The size of the sign for drawing the centres of arcs and circles.
6.4.2.5 High-speed shift
The length of the inner lines for drawing the high-speed shift in mm.
6.4.3 DXF/DWG
6.4.3.1 Length of lines
You will determine the length of lines in DXF-file.
6.4.3.2 Directory for DXF
You will determine a place where the output will pointed. There are two possibilities:
· into DXF directory which is in each working directory
· into any other directory which is then common for all working directories.
6.4.3.3 Height of the text
It is entered in mm.
6.4.4 Texts
6.4.4.1 Parts´ title
It is possible to set up different kinds of print of the parts´ text in the cutting layout (ordinal number in the
ECO table, order of cutting, name, drawing...) and the height of the text in parts.
6.4.4.2 Texts
It is possible to appoint in which parts the text should be drawn. If "Into one" is chosen, it is drawn in
the cutting layout only into the first part of each kind of parts.
6.4.5 ECO
6.4.5.1 Notes for the machine operator
If it is checked, even a note for the cutter will be printed under the drawing.
6.4.5.2 Every change of cutting heads
If You check this setting, then SAPSW will write out every change of distance or number of cutting
heads during the cutting.
If You uncheck it, then SAPSW will write out only the different combinations of distance and number of
cutting heads.
6.4.5.3 Cutting length of 1 piece
If checked, then the CUTT (m/1) value in the table of parts in the ECO printout will show the cutting
length of 1 part. This value is computed from other existing values in this way:
"Cutting by 1 burner" divided by ("PCS" div by plate count div by "BUR" count).
The state of the check box does not influence the ECO text file, nor the EXCEL file (that means, in the
files are always the whole cutting length is written out).

62 SAPSproW v19
6.4.5.4 Cutting time to the ECO

On the ECO printout there can be presented the cutting time of the various parts in the layout. The
resulting value machine time of one part is computed from the cutting time + the plate overfiring time,
and the aliquot part of the rapid transfer time. If on the plate is a remnant created and the NC machine
detaches this remnant automatically, then the aliquot part of the remnant detaching is summed to the
time too (in relation of the cutting time of one part to the complete cutting time of the NC machine). The
value on the printout will be shown up on the place of the stitches, so it is not possible concurrently
display the time of stitches and the cutting time.
If in the settings on the ECO tab there is unchecked the "Cutting length of 1 piece" check box:
- the "TIME (sec)" value shows the machine time for every type of parts for every position on the layout,
which are cutted with the same number of heads
- the sum of the machine times from the lines in the table equals to the "Time of cutting + Transfer time
+ Total times of lead-ins" value
If the "Cutting length of 1 piece" check box is checked:
- the "TIME (sec/1)" value gives the machine time computed for 1 type of part in 1 position in the layout
- if you multiple the "TIME (sec/1)" with the count of positions (that means by "PCS (pcs/C)" divided by
"BUR (pcs)"), then the sum of this multiplications will be equal to the value of "Time of cutting" +
"Transfer time" + "Total times of lead-ins"
6.4.5.5 Cutting time to TXT file
If you check the check box, then the "TIME (sec)" value will be present in the ECO printout. The value
will be shown in place of count of stitches.
The "TIME (sec/1)" value can not be written out to the ECO TXT file. If you need to know this value, you
can compute it from the existing values in the TXT file:
"TIME (sec/1)" = "TIME (sec)" divided by "PCS (pcs/C)" divided by "BUR (pcs)"
6.4.6 Lines
6.4.6.1 Thickness of lines
Determine the thickness of lines for different kinds of lines.
6.5 Machine independent settings

6.5.1 SHAPE tab
6.5.1.1 Languages
6.5.1.1.1 Language of help
You can select in the SHAPE tab the language of the help as a number from 0 to 13 (actually from 0 to
10). In some languages (in which the SAPS can be handled) there does not exist the help file. In that
case you can select the help file in other language, e.g. in English or German.
6.5.1.1.2 Languages
It is possible to select the language in which the SAPS communicate with the program user. After SAPS
installation the SAPS start in the language of the installed Windows.
6.5.1.1.3 Not translated rows
If the check box is checked, then SAPS will warn if in the selected language there are untranslated rows
in the LOKALIZ.TXT file.
6.5.1.2 Show the text of NC program
To draw the NC-program after clicking and to open automatically the next window with the text of
the NC program file.
6.5.1.3 Draw the distance
To draw the minimum distance of parts from the plate edges and the distance of cutting heads.

Settings 63
6.5.1.4 Selection box of parts

If it is checked, then in the course of interactive nesting there will be a drop-down list with the names of
all actual. This drop-down list is on the left side of the drop-down list in the SAPSW main window. It
is possible to insert a part into the cutting layout by selection in the drop-down list.
6.5.1.5 Screen
6.5.1.5.1 Percent
The "%" button sets an appropriate ratio of every window in comparison to the display dimensions,
independently from the display resolution and its physical dimensions. The changes are visible after
restarting the SAPS.
6.5.1.5.2 Font size
Font size, which is used in more windows of the SAPSW module (nesting).
6.5.1.5.3 Monitor
If there are more monitors connected to the computer, then in the "Shape, Screen, Monitor" text box
can you specify the monitor, on which the SAPS will be presented. If you change the monitor, you have
to restart the SAPS.
6.5.1.5.4 Length of the screen
The active length in mm. If the setting is wrong, the depicted dimensions on the screen do not
correspond to the real dimensions.
6.5.1.5.5 Height of the screen
The active length of the screen in mm. If the setting is wrong, the depicted dimensions on the screen do
not correspond to the real dimensions.
6.5.1.5.6 Distance from the X edge
It will determine the distance of the displayed plate from the edge of the program working area in the
direction of the X axis in pixels.
6.5.1.5.7 Distance from the Y edge
It will determine the distance of the displayed plate from the edge of the program working area in the
direction of the Y axis in pixels.
6.5.1.5.8 Icons
With the check box can you enlarge the icons in some buttons (this time only the buttons in the SAPSW
main window).
6.5.1.5.9 Colour palette
It is possible select one of four palettes. The colors will be changed as a group in every SAPS program
module. Individually change the colors with click to the icon.
6.5.1.5.10 Setting of special colours
After clicking at button it is possible to choose each color from the window or to mix up three basic
colors in any ratio. If the graphic card enables only 256 colors, some colors are displayed "in a grid"
and it is necessary to choose another one, without pattern.
6.5.1.6 Sign of cutting head
The size of sign for the position depiction of the first (or also the only one) setting of the distance
between cutting heads in the cutting layout (pixels).
6.5.1.7 Shape of the mouse cursor
After clicking at button it is possible to choose a suitable size of the mouse cursor.

64 SAPSproW v19
6.5.1.8 Cross width

6.5.1.8.1 Cross for the lead-ins control
In the cutting layout drawing mode at the lead-ins control by the "Contr" button, the width of the line for
drawing a cross. It is drawn in the contour of the part which does not have a lead-in.
6.5.1.8.2 Cross for nonexistent lead-ins
In the NC-program drawing mode, the width of the line for drawing a cross. It is drawn in NC-program
in the contour of the part which does not have a lead-in.
6.5.1.8.3 Cross for a joint cut
In the cutting layout drawing mode, the width of the line for drawing a cross at entering points of the
common edge cutting.
6.5.1.9 Hints
6.5.1.9.1 Hint time
The time to display hints (a brief help) in seconds, after this time the hint will automatically disappear.
6.5.1.9.2 Font size for hints
The size of font used to display the hint.
6.5.1.10 Flat buttons
It is possible to set it up so that:
-flat buttons are displayed everywhere
-on the panel with scale buttons
-on the panel with technological buttons
6.5.2 CONTROL tab

6.5.2.1 Automatic saving
If a nonzero value is set up, SAPSW will regularly save a cutting layout in process into the file. After the
automatic saving the "...were changes" title in the cutting layout heading will disappear. Time is set up in
seconds.
6.5.2.2 Zoom in repeatedly
After pressing a key for the scale change "0.2","1",…and clicking at the cutting layout, a cutting layout
cut will be displayed with its centre in the middle of the screen. If the check box is checked, the pressed
zoom button will not get back into its original position. Then you can only click at the cutting layout and
in this way you will successively zoom in at several places in the cutting layout.
6.5.2.3 Shift repeatedly
If the check box is checked, you must choose the shift mode of a part or group only once with
button and you can shift several times one after another. If it is not checked, you must click before
each shift..
6.5.2.4 Layouts next to/over each other
For several cutting layouts on the screen it will determine the beginning mode of depiction after the
program start. Cutting layouts are drawn next to or over each other. The state can be also changed in
the check box on the basic side of the program.
6.5.2.5 Same drawing scale
If the check box is checked and if there are several cutting layouts on the screen, they will be depicted
in the same scale.
6.5.2.6 Only for system tests
It needn´t be checked, it is only for the supplier to test the system.

Settings 65
6.5.2.7 Notes for the machine operator

If you check it, then after clicking at for saving the cutting layout a window will appear where you
can write a text note for the machine operator. This text is connected to the cutting layout file of PLA
type and it is also depicted on the printed copy below the cutting layout drawing in ECO-data. By
checking another check box you can let the note be inserted straight into NC-program.
6.5.2.8 Recall the print window
If you check the check box, SAPSW will automatically recall the preview window or the window for print
of cutting layouts after saving the cutting layout and closing the window with notes for a cutter.
6.5.2.9 Showing VIEWER with a single click
If the check box is not checked, then VIEWER shows itself by moving the mouse cursor to the status
line in the down side of SAPSW window. If checked, then You must click in the status line.
6.5.2.10 Report about torches
If the check box is labeled, then if You select a new number of heads or head spacing, SAPS verifies
the new number and distances. If there begin no chain cutting to the next part from an empty place on
the plate, then the machinist need not modify the head spacings, only switch off / on the heads. E.g.
these settings are convenient :
4x 500 mm - 2x 1000 mm - 1 head, or 6x 250 mm - 3x 500 mm - 2x 750 mm - 1 head, ...
6.5.2.11 Pull the chain cutting
The check box facilitate the drawing of chain cuttings. SAPS pulls the chain cutting's first segment to
the lead-in in the previous part.
6.5.2.12 Verification of PARTS
It exists a check box and a button with the same name on the same setup tab. The button verifies,
whether every GEO file has a row in the PARTS table, or if to every row in the table exists the GEO file.
The rows are verified to duplicates too. If there are errors, the SAPS create a file with the name TMP
\PARTS-"working directory".TXT. The check box has the same functionality, but at every change of
working directories verifies the table. We do not recommend permanently switch on this check box, the
testing of the table data is very time consumption.
6.5.2.13 Only pieces on the plate
If checked, then SAPS will count in the ECO only that pieces of parts, which lay full on the plate.
Remark:
As a special mode of nesting, it is possible to interactively create such a layout for more heads, where
the part cutted with the last active head will lay partially out of the plate (the machine operator by the
cutting then must adequately interactively activate - disactivate the heads). In case of such specific
layouts you have to check the "Only pieces on the plate" check box.
6.5.2.14 Speed up the dulications
If checked, then the copying (multiplying) of parts or groups of parts will be speeded up by 2-3x times.
6.5.2.15 JPG/PNG
You can select the format of picture files (same as the preview of ECO cutting layouts, or the preview of
parts in the SCADW). The PNG files are 3-4 times shorter as the JPG.
6.5.2.16 Step of dyn.shift
It gives a step length for a dynamic change of the cutting layout drawing position on the screen. For
example if it is set up to 3, the cutting layout will be shifted with one mouse movement by 3 mm in the
direction of the mouse movement on the screen (irrespective the actual drawing scale).
6.5.2.17 Step of scale change
It gives a constant for a dynamic change of scale with help of the mouse and the ALT or SHIFT keys.
The value can be between 1 and 2. For example if 1.1 is set up and the original scale was 10, the scale

66 SAPSproW v19
will change to 11, 12.1,... for a mouse shift. Or with the contrariwise mouse movement it will change to
9, 8.1,...
6.5.2.18 Maximum number of layouts
The maximum number of cutting layouts which can be loaded and displayed at once depends on the
extent of the computing memory. If the memory is only 32 Mbyte, set up the item to 2, otherwise
SAPSW will often use a swap file, which will make the program activity slower.
6.5.2.19 Files to the basket
If checked, then the files which are deleted directly in the SAPSproW (in the VIEWER with the DEL
button, or in the TABLES), are sent at first to the basket (RecycleBin).
If you wish to restore some deleted files, then after restoring the files physically from the basket:
- for GEO files, in the PARTS table click to the "Get GEO data" and select an appropriate mode of
restoring to the table
- for PLA files, click to the button, select and open the previosly deleted layout to the screen.
Afterwards you can without any change close the layout.
6.5.2.20 Sound signal
6.5.2.20.1 Inhibit beep
SAPS alert the user in many cases, e.g. at click to an NC segment in the picture of the NC program
and at finding the appropriate line in the text file of that NC program. Some properties of the beep may
be set. Every beep and other sounds can be forbidden.
6.5.2.20.2 System sound
If checked, then SAPS will use on every requested place the standard Windows sound signal.
6.5.2.20.3 Length of tone
SAPS alert the user in many cases, e.g. at click to an NC segment in the picture of the NC program
and at finding the appropriate line in the text file of that NC program. Some properties of the beep may
be set.
6.5.2.20.4 Height of tone
The height of tone which will be used for particular plus lengths of the tone duration. For minus values of
the beep duration the tone height is constant (system beep, a minus value in the text box for the beep
duration means the number of beeps).
6.5.3 PARTS tab

6.5.3.1 Colour in parts
It will color in parts in a cutting layout in the cutting layout drawing mode. The positions of parts in the
normal and mirror-turned position are sorted out with colors (important for parts with a one-side profiled
surface where it is important how it is situated in the cutting layout)
6.5.3.2 Draw inside points
It will draw some points, from which it "spill" the color at filling up the parts with color. It is not
advantageous to check it, only occasionally for test functions of the SAPSW program.
6.5.3.3 Draw endpoints
To highlight the endpoints of lines in drawings of parts.
6.5.3.4 Bended part rotate
You can specify in the SCADW at creating the GEO file of a part, that the part will be after the cutting
bended. SAPS do not permit rotate such parts, in order to ensure the direction of rolling. If You check
the check box, then SAPS permit the rotating of bended parts.

Settings 67
6.5.3.5 Texts drawing

6.5.3.5.1 GEO-file name
After checking the check box, the GEO-file name will be drawn into each part in the cutting layout on
the screen.
6.5.3.5.2 Drawing number
The drawing number of the part.
6.5.3.5.3 Order
To draw the actual order of the part in the cutting layout.
6.5.3.5.4 Order according to various parts
You can let draw the order of parts according to various type of parts in the actual cutting layout. This
order is the same as the order of rows in the ECO list, if in the cutting layout there are no same parts
with various number of heads or head spacing.
6.5.3.5.5 Distance of lines
The distance is entered in pixels. If you have entered more lines drawing (order, file name, ...) and you
want the lines to be close below each other, the value can be also minus.
6.5.3.5.6 Font size
The font size to draw a file name, drawing number and order of parts in the cutting layout.
6.5.3.5.7 Text in the middle
If it is checked, the text of the part will be depicted in the middle of the enclosed rectangle on the part.
This is not advantageous e.g.at the depiction of 2 right-angled triangles in the common edge cutting
when the texts of both parts will be displayed across one another, or e.g.at the depiction of a flange
which has another part in its hole.
If it is not checked, the text will shift in the Y direction so that the text falls into the body of the part.
6.5.3.5.8 Bold font
Choice of the bold font to draw the file name, drawing number and order of parts in the cutting layout.
6.5.3.6 Draw the direction
6.5.3.6.1 Draw the direction
To draw the cutting direction in the TECHNLG mode. If the check box is checked, other 3 frames will
appear to determine the place and way of drawing arrows.
6.5.3.6.2 Min.length of section
Minimal length of section in mm into which an arrow of the cutting direction can be situated in case of
needs.
6.5.3.6.3 Arrow length
Size in mm.
6.5.3.6.4 Length for arrows
Lengths of depicted sections in mm are summed up, as soon as the sum overreaches the entered
value, another arrow of the cutting direction will be depicted and the sum is reseted. The bigger the
entered value is, the less arrows there are in the part.
6.5.3.7 Line width
You can select the line width on the screen for various program modules in the SAPS:
- for drawings in the SCADW
- for lines in the layouts in the SAPSW
- for lines in the NC program in the SAPSW
- for the GEO parts in the VIEWER

68 SAPSproW v19
6.5.3.8 Automatic position of a part

6.5.3.8.1 Division number
If a part is automatically added, SAPSW is looking for a vacant place in the cutting layout in the entered
direction in steps beginning with the position of the last part. One step distance is determined as the
dimension of the enclosed rectangle on the part/group in the set direction, divided by the value in the
text box. When having found a good position the new part will be shifted to the previous one analytically,
with an adjustable exactness in the next text box.
6.5.3.8.2 Position exactness
After the automatic shift with "Shift/Turn/Mirr" or the addition with "Add", the part or group will be shifted
till the final position with this position exactness (in mm, with regards to the analytically possible
position).
6.5.3.8.3 Control of the last burner
It determines the basic setting of the check box at the part´s position change to control the collision of
the part with more cutting heads. In the case of unsymmetrical location of cutting heads it is sometimes
necessary to switch off the collision control of the last cutting head that moves partly outside the plate.
6.5.3.9 Automatic lead-ins
6.5.3.9.1 Lead-in deviation
The item is valid for the common edge cutting of shape, it gives the deviation angle of an abscissa
lead-in of the first part from the common edge. For other kinds of common edge cuttings the SAPSW
calculates the angle so that the lead-in is led in the half-size of the kerf from the 2nd part´s sections. It
means that SAPSW tries to create a lead-in which is led to the 1st part at the most obtuse possible
angle.
6.5.3.9.2 Lead-ins control
The item serves at the control of all lead-ins in the cutting layout to create a parallel control contour
round the lead-in. The distance of paral. contours is equal with the distance of parts from each other X
the entered value.
6.5.3.9.3 Lead-in in a section
The check box will permit to locate a lead-in into sections at the creation of automatic lead-ins with the
"Aut" button.
6.5.3.9.4 Flash - lead-in
A lead-in in the flash shape is used to cut with plasma. A lead-in wrapping will cause slowing down of
cutting in corners and in this way the table is well led-in although the lead-in is relatively short. The total
length of the lead-in is equal with the length entered in the STANDARD databank, the height of the lead-
in (distance from the first till the last point) is equal with the length of the lead-in x the value from the text
box. The item should be >0 and <1.
6.5.4 NESTINGS tab

6.5.4.1 Cutting order
6.5.4.1.1 "X-strip : table width" window
At the automatic determination of cutting order SAPSW divides the cutting layout in the direction of the
X axis into strips with the width set by the plate width x this value from the text box. In strips it determines
the order according to the position of referential points of parts, it is possible to choose between two
versions of the order setting.
6.5.4.1.2 "Referential point" choice
The order of parts is determined on the basis of the distance of referential points. The point can be
chosen in this way:
1. The lead-in point or
2. The centre of the enclosed rectangle on a part

Settings 69
6.5.4.1.3 "Multiplier for X" window

A bigger value of the "X multiplier" item causes that the algorithm prefers parts that are closer to the left
edge of the plate.
6.5.4.1.4 Overlap in %
SAPSW will divide the cutting layout lengthwise into strips of the same size in the direction from the left
to the right. In the actual strip there will be parts whose referential points (centre of the enclosed
rectangle or the lead-in point) belong into the strip. In addition to this also the parts that lie with
their length in the strip in a sufficient manner. The size of this overlap can be entered in the text
box as a percentage from the strip width.
6.5.4.2 Remnants
6.5.4.2.1 Create
In SAPSW settings on the "Nestings" tab in the "Remnant plates" frame there you can switch on the
automatic creation and registration of remnant cutting layouts. A remnant is created and saved at saving
the cutting layout. If the automatic creation of remnants is permitted, in NC-program there is possible to
let generate the automatic separation of the remnant from the scrap. Remnants can be saved in the
global remnants directory C:\SAPSproW\_RESTPLATE, or in individual local directories C:\SAPSproW
\xxx\ZBY (xxx... name of the working directory).
6.5.4.2.2 Create remnants from holes
It is possible to ask SAPSW to consider the holes' areas to be new remnants. Providing that there is no
part in the holes which should be used as remnants. It is possible to enter the minimum area and
dimensions for using holes as remnants. The original hole lead-in will not be depicted in the remnant
from the hole, the programmer himself must insure against crossing of this lead-in with the part put in
this remnant later.
6.5.4.2.3 Separation of the remnants
It permits the automatic cropping of the remnant for another use.
6.5.4.2.4 Global remnant plates
If you check the check box, SAPS will save remnant plates into one common directory irrespective in
which working directory you are working at the moment. In this way all existing remnants will be
available at the creation of new cutting layouts. Apart from this for each kind of machine it is possible to
enter a different directory name for saving remnants (SAPSW setting, the CONTROL tab).
If you do not check the setting, each working directory will have its own remnants and you will be able
to use only the remnants from the actual working directory to create a new cutting layout.
Location of the remnant in the face of the chosen way can be changed even in the NOTES FOR THE
MACHINE OPERATOR window at saving the cutting layout.
6.5.4.2.5 Filename - running number
With the check box you can set up the way of calling remnants with the automatic ordinal number or
with an adjustable file name which you can enter in the NOTES FOR THE MACHINE OPERATOR
window. In the _RESTPLATE\COUNT.TXT file there is the last remnant whose name was created by
SAPS as an ordinal number. Each remnant has its own number, irrespective the directory and
eventually the network computer where the remnant is situated.
6.5.4.2.6 Distance of strips
Division of the plate into horizontal strips, the maximum X-coordinate of parts will be determined in the
strips. The shape of the remnant plate will arise after the connection of max. coordinates.
6.5.4.2.7 Distance from edges
Narrow useless strips of the plate will be removed from the geometry on the lower and upper sides. The
item will determine the maximum width of strips in mm which will be still removed.

70 SAPSproW v19
6.5.4.2.8 Minimal area

Size of the remnant plate area (m2) over which SAPSproW will create a remnant cutting layout.
6.5.4.2.9 Minimal area for flattening
Because of the location of saved parts in the cutting layout, the left side of the remnant plate is usually
too rugged. If you choose a suitable item (in m2), SAPSW will not mind small free areas and in this way
it will straighten the left edge of the remnant plate. At the same time even a possible separation line will
be straighten up after cutting the scrap off the remnant plate.
Influence of the item setting on straightening up the left side of the remnant plate:
Item=0 m2
Item = 0,005 m2
6.5.4.3 Status message time

Time of the status message display in the lower part of the screen. The message is written out e.g.
when at a control SAPSW has found out invalid lead-ins, or a message about a successful creation of
lead-ins etc.
6.5.4.4 Ruler font
For a better orientation in the cutting layout it is possible to let display the length from zero of the plate
coordinate system on the lower and left sides of the plate. If you set up the font size at 0, the lengths will
not be displayed.
6.5.4.5 Screen division
It is possible to choose a number from 1-4 with help of which you can speed up the cutting layout
drawing at a dynamic pulling or enlarging with the mouse. Only the parts around the mouse are drawn
that lie in the window with the dimensions: length, let´s say width, of the drawing area divided by the
chosen number.

Settings 71
6.5.5 AUT.NESTING tab

6.5.5.1 Position of parts
6.5.5.1.1 Step
The item will determine a step in mm at looking for a good position of a part in the cutting layout in the
direction of X and Y coordinates. The speed of a good position location is higher for a bigger step, on
the other hand it is much more probable that SAPSW will not find all small empty spaces in the cutting
layout. A good value setting is 10 mm.
6.5.5.1.2 Ban on mirroring
The item will forbid mirroring for all kinds of parts, the item can be changed for individual parts with the
Pop-up window in the VIEWER.
6.5.5.1.3 Number of turnings
The program looks for a good position of part in the cutting layout so that in every theoretically possible
position it will try to turn the part by a particular angle in a permitted number of turnings. The time of a
good position location of a part is directly proportional to the number of attempts. The resulting material
use is mostly dependent on the shape and size of parts. So it is not true that the higher number of
turning (the higher number of attempts), the better use of material. The entered item is valid for all kinds
of parts, the item can be changed for individual parts with the "Pop-up" window in the VIEWER (click at
the picture of the part with the right button).
6.5.5.1.4 Analytical location
SAPSW is looking for a position of parts according to a specific, quick algorithm. After the position
location it is possible to let the part shift slightly (possible to permit/forbid) for an exact distance between
parts. The shift will be towards the plate corners. In this way the plate centre will place free, which is
sometimes advantageous because of the material use.
After the choice:
-"into 1 corner" the part will shift towards the left and then the lower side of the cutting layout
-"into 2 corners" the part will shift towards the left side. Then if the part centre is situated higher than the
upper side of the cutting layout minus the part´s width, it will shift towards the upper side. Otherwise
towards the lower side.
-"into 4 corners" the part will shift like in the previous case. Apart from this if the part centre is situated
farther than the right side of the cutting layout minus the part´s length, it will shift towards the right
side. Otherwise towards the left side.
6.5.5.2 Technology
6.5.5.2.1 Aut.lead-ins
After the automatic setting of the cutting order of parts, it is possible to ask SAPSW for the automatic
lead-ins creation.
6.5.5.2.2 NC-program
After the automatic setting of the cutting order of parts and the automatic lead-ins creation, it is
possible to ask SAPSW for the automatic NC-program creation.
6.5.5.2.3 Aut.order of parts
After the automatic cutting layout creation, it is possible to ask SAPSW for the automatic order setting
of cutting parts.
6.5.5.3 Time statement
SAPSW will display the time of the automatic cutting layout creation.
6.5.6 ECO tab

6.5.6.1 Font size
Height of the text at displaying the NC-program ECO-data on the screen and at the print on the printer.
Apart from this height you can set up the height of the cutting layout title in the drawing and the height
of the text in the parts in the drawing.

72 SAPSproW v19
6.5.6.2 ECO data into XLS file

The output into the XLS format proceeds directly, without the EXCEL program participation. The file
name is made of the cutting layout name+.XLS, the output format is for EXCEL2.1. After edits in newer
versions, EXCEL asks about the permission of the format up-dating for the new format.
In SAPSW settings on the ECO tab you can enter:
- to ask for EXCEL startup after the XLS-file creation
- a common directory for the XLS-file output. If the text box stays empty, files are saved into the
SAPSproW + "_XLS" install directory.
- data are on one plate and they are divided into 6 groups. The group positions on the plate can be
entered in one text box, the separation symbol is "|". You enter the position of the upper left cell of
individual groups.
- all kinds of data can be shifted on the plate as one unit
6.5.6.3 ECO data into TXT file
If you check "Export into TXT file", SAPSW will create a text file with all ECO-data in the ECO directory.
The file can be easily sequentially loaded into a specific user´s program for various technology
documents processing (material requisition, piece lists, dispatch notes, work plates...). It is possible to
let write up identification data in the form of #n sign into ECO (n...the ordinal number of the data group,
totally 34 different groups). An outside program should read ECO according to these signs so that it is
independent on the data names in SAPS (SAPS can be used in several languages and that´s why the
texts in ECO are different. They can differ also after a new SAPS version installation.).
It is possible to set up a global directory for TXT-files output from all working directories. If the text box
stays empty, files are saved into the actual working directory into the ECO directory.
6.5.6.4 Production management
Import directory for the REQ/MAT file types (filling the PARTS and PLATES tables)
6.5.6.5 LOGFILE.TXT directory
Directory for the LOGFILE.TXT file with the list of the created NC programs
6.5.7 NC PROG tab

6.5.7.1 Draw
6.5.7.1.1 Multi-heads
It will allow drawing of multi-head cutting on the screen.
6.5.7.1.2 High-speed shift
It is possible to let forbid drawing of the high-speed shift on the screen.
6.5.7.1.3 Square
The square size in pixels at a slowed-down NC-program drawing. It is drawn in the place of the main
NC-machine cutting head.
6.5.7.1.4 Slow down
The standard speed of slow NC-program drawing. The item is between 1 - 5, 1 draws in the slowest
manner.
6.5.7.1.5 Slowing-down step
Slowing down can be achieved by dividing each section into several parts, the item indicates the length
of these inter-sections in mm. After each inter-section depiction the program waits for a moment.
6.5.7.2 Automatic chain cutting
6.5.7.2.1 Angle of the chain cutting's side
It will determine the angle of both sides of the chain cutting with regards to the perpendicular on the
middle section. It is possible to enter even a minus value.

Settings 73
6.5.7.2.2 Distance of chain cutting

The value will determine the real distance of chain cutting from parts as a multiple of the chosen value
and the distance of parts from one another. The distance is appointed by SAPSW from the "Parts"
table. A programmer can change the distance at entering a new cutting layout.
6.5.7.3 Stitches
6.5.7.3.1 Proportions of sides
The item for setting the length of the second abscissa of stitch (the lead-out). For the value equal to 1
the second abscissa will touch the first abscissa (no gap). For < 1 there will arise a gap between the
abscissas, the length is a multiple of the item and the calculated length for the value 1. For > 1 the
abscissas will cross themselves.
6.5.7.4 LINK directory
6.5.7.4.1 BAT-file
If you check this check box, SAPSW after clicking OK button or OK+LINK (the NOTES FOR THE
MACHINE OPERATOR) will start your specific command file. The name of the command file is equal to
the machine name (standard data), the file extension is .BAT and the file should be created in the ...
\_MACHINE directory.
6.5.7.4.2 Display MSDOS
At carrying out the command file it is possible to let display the MSDOS window where you can see the
process of carrying out particular file commands.
6.5.7.5 Stop after the prog.stop
Stop the function of the program stop in NC-machine in the slow drawing mode (simulation of cutting).
Stops are generated by SAPSW automatically before the change of number or distance of cutting
heads, after marking all routes and so on.
6.5.8 NET tab

6.5.8.1 Connection path
Type the path to the data server computer in the first column of the chart in form of UNC-convention, i.
e.:
\\computer\directory
In the second column type a shortcut, which will be presented in the SAPSproW main menu:
shortcut
, where:
computer...the name of the data server in Windows
directory...the SAPSproW install directory on the data server
shortcut....any optional shortcut of the data server
You write for example:

\\NT_SERV\SAPSproW Peter
or
\\CODA_T\SAPSproW Technology
and so on.
6.5.8.2 Test
After pressing the "Test" button SAPSW will check whether the connection to the requested computer/s
is possible. If so, it will show an OK in the third column of the chart. If not, it will write a warning into the
chart and it will be probably necessary to allow the full network access to the SAPSproW's install
directory on the data server computer.
6.5.8.3 Import
In the NET tab there is the IMPORT button. It makes the installation on several computers easier, it will
transfer the SAPSproW setting files (files from _INI directory, USERSPECIFIC.TXT, DXFLINES.TXT,

74 SAPSproW v19
ISO9013.TXT, STANDARD.DAT+IDX and SHEETS.DAT+IDX) from one well-set up computer to other

computers in the network (to every computer, which is listed in the chart).
6.5.8.4 GEO files to a cache
If You check the check box, then SAPS at the first reading of GEO files create a copy of the file in the
local CACHE directory. The next readings of files will be accomplished from this CACHE. This speed up
the display of complicated cutting layouts.
6.5.8.5 Multiply connection
In the "Network" tab there is the "Multiply connection in the network" check box. If checked, then in the
same working directory can work more SAPS-es in the same time. It is not recommended, while in this
case is the right piece control of parts and plates not ensured.
6.5.8.6 Network key
SAPS can be completed with a local or network hardware key. The local key enables work with SAPS
only on the computer which is connected. The text box should be empty.
The network key enables to work on any computer from the network at the same time on the permitted
number of computers, according to the number of purchased licences. Write the net name of the
computer to which the key is connected into the text box. On this computer there is also necessary to
install the key software which works with the TCP/IP network protocol.
6.5.9 UPDATE tab

6.5.9.1 Updating of SAPSproW
If the computer with SAPSproW is connected to the Internet:
- RETRIEVE finds and shows the files, which has to be replaced from the Internet. It must be clicked.
- INFO shows the newest messages about the updated programs and functions
- DOWNLOAD realizes the actual download
- UPDATE ask, if SAPS has to make a ZIP-ed archive copy of the old SAPSproW version. After that it
make the actual updating.
Remarks:
1. With updating to a newer SAPSproW version, the old setup data as well as the old parts and cutting
layouts remains unchanged.
2. If the computer is not connected to the Internet, then update the SAPS according to the chapter
Installation.
6.5.9.2 File list
SAPS write into the table the filenames of files in the Internet, which are newer as the files in the
computer. The values in columns SIZE and DOWNL.SIZE has to match in case of successful
downloading.
6.5.10 SERVICE tab

6.5.10.1 Tables in TXT format
The data from the table can be exported to text files. The dividing character is the tabulator. This type of
files can e.g. EXCEL read and process. The processed file can be read backward in the SAPS. The
first two lines are only comment.
6.5.10.2 Tables
6.5.10.2.1 Status of tables
SAPS shows the physically existing number of lines in the databases and the number of logically erased
lines from them. The erased lines are not visible in the tables.
6.5.10.2.2 Defragmentation of tables
The button physically erases the logically erased lines in the databases. The database file length will be
shorter.

Settings 75
6.5.10.2.3 Verification of PARTS

The button is used to verify, if in the actually selected working directory every GEO file has its data line
in the PARTS table or not. And on the contrary, if to every data line in the PARTS exists a
corresponding GEO file. It is controlled too, if for a single GEO file are there present more data lines in
the PARTS or not. If SAPS finds an error, then creates in the TMP directory an error logfile with file
name PARTS-"working directory".TXT with every logged error message.
On the CONTROL tab is a check box with similar function. If checked, SAPS automatically verifies the
data. We recommend NOT permanently switch on this check box, the permanent verification is very
time consumpting process.
6.5.10.2.4 Checking REMNANTS
The button has similar function as the verification of PARTS. The name of error logfile is
REMNANTS-"working directory".TXT.
6.5.10.2.5 Clean STANDARD
If in the system settings on the "Mechanics" tag in the "Quality and sec.gravity" is selected "in the
QUALITY.TXT file", then the "Clean STANDARD" button erase from the STANDARD unneeded
duplicated lines (which has in every item the same value). If the erased lines contains also data of
quality and specific gravity, then SAPS moves their data to the QUALITY.TXT file. This button can also
change the meaning of the S2635 item, which becomes so the meaning "cutting parameter".
You can select the mode of changing the data in the S2635 column:
- to let create a sequential number from 1 to the number of the last line...
- or to let create a sequential number from 1 for every group of lines with the same material
thickness, ...
- or select do not change the values in the S2635 column
6.5.10.2.6 Create STANDARD
This button sorts the STANDARD table on existing "machines" from the drop-down list. Then moves
the created new STANDARD.DAT+IDX files into a temporary directory, named "_STANDARD" .
6.5.11 PRESENTATION tab

6.5.11.1 Repeat of presentation
If checked, then SAPS repeat the presentation, until stopped by ESC.
6.5.11.2 Speed
With the slider you can set the speed of the presentation in range 30 to 700 %.
6.5.11.3 Table of times
For every single step in the presentation can be set the time of waiting. The actual times are influenced
by the roller.
6.6 Settings, dependent on the machine

6.6.1 NC-machine and control data
In this group of data you will state information about your NC-machine and about the needed NC-
program format for this machine. SAPSproW can prepare NC programs for more kinds of machines
with different NC-program formats.
- for every NC machine exists a group of main data (provided by the machine supplier), which need not
be set up or changed in the SAPS. The data are in the _INI directory in the "MACHINE_machine" file
and from this file reads them SAPS at the program start. You can change the file with a text editor.
You can correct the data in the SAPS too, but first you should allow the correction with the ENABLE
THE BASE SETTINGS switch.
- if the "MACHINE_machine" file does not exists, then SAPS creates a default file
- for data change of a specific machine right click to the button and select the BASE SETTINGS
tab
- the corrected data are at closing of the window automatically saved in a xxx.TXT file in the _INI

76 SAPSproW v19
directory and will be used at next program start.
Warning:
The corrected base settings (correction of which must be permitted by the ENABLE switch) will be
saved only if the ENABLE THE BASE SETTINGS check box is checked !
6.6.2 Base settings

6.6.2.1 Page 1
6.6.2.1.1 Kind of NC machine
You choose here the kind of machine like a machine with the oxyfuel cutting, plasma or laser,
prospectively the producer of the machine.
6.6.2.1.2 Machine
6.6.2.1.2.1 High-speed move
It is the speed value of the NC-machine cutting heads movement with the high-speed shift, without
cutting, in [m/s].
6.6.2.1.2.2 Step in the NC program
Write into the text box the least programatical step, which the NC machine can accept. For NC
machines with ESSI format it is 0,1 mm, it comes to this that the theoretically least movement of
machine is 0,1 mm. For machines with ISO/DIN format of NC programs use value 0,001 or 0,01 mm.
6.6.2.1.2.3 Direction of cutting
It is possible to choose, which direction of cutting SAPSW has to use after inserting the part into the
cutting layout from the VIEWER. After the "?" option there is a possibility of automatic change of the
direction of cutting, with other options SAPSW will use the chosen direction of cutting (anytime this
direction can be later interactively changed). You select the direction for the outer contours of the part
in the frame.
6.6.2.1.2.4 Direction of holes cutting
It is possible to choose, which direction of cutting SAPSW has to use after inserting the part into the
cutting layout from the VIEWER. After the "?" option there is a possibility of automatic change of the
direction of cutting, with other options SAPSW will use the chosen direction of cutting (anytime this
direction can be later interactively changed). You set the direction for the inner contours of parts, holes,
in the frame.
6.6.2.1.2.5 Thickness
The set value will determine the thickness limit in mm. If you get over this limit, and in the BASE
SETTINGS on tab 1 is set a standard cutting direction (other as "?"), then SAPS asks for permission to
change the direction.
6.6.2.1.2.6 Direct connection
If the programming computer is through network connected with the NC machine, then check the
DIRECT CONNECTION check box. Two text boxes can be seen, one to write in the path to the directory
with the NC programs on the machine, the other to remnant plates, which can create the machine
operator direct on the machine. Write the path as \\NC machine's computer\shared directory.
- if the DIRECT CONNECTION is checked, then in REMARK FOR MACHINE OPERATOR window will
be visible the check boxes to enable move the NC program directly into one or more NC machines
- if the DIRECT CONNECTION is checked, then the !INFO! button in the NESTINGS table will be
visible. This button shows the content of the !INFO!.TXT file in the NOTEPAD.EXE program. In the file
(for the NC machines provided by MGM Tabor corporation) there is a list of already cutted NC
programs.
6.6.2.1.2.7 Remnant plates in the machine
If the programming computer is connected through network with the NC machine, then You should write
into the text box the path to the remnant plates in the machine as \\NC machine's computer\shared
directory.

Settings 77
6.6.2.1.2.8 NC programs in the machine

If the programming computer is connected through network with the NC machine, then You should write
into the text box the path to the NC programs as \\NC machine's computer\shared directory.
6.6.2.1.2.9 Zero of NC-machine
The zero of the coordinate system and the direction of +X and +Y axis are dependent on the physical
location of the NC-machine control system. SAPSproW must be set in accordance with it, too. The
position of the zero on the screen can be:
· down to the left
· up to the left
6.6.2.1.2.10 Cutting parameters
The text box is used for one specific NC machine. Other users have to select "without parameter".
6.6.2.1.2.11 Time of lifting the cutting head
the lifting time of the cutting head from cutting into the upper position, in seconds.
6.6.2.1.3 Cutting heads
6.6.2.1.3.1 Cutting heads
The total, maximum permitted number of NC-machine heads for multi-head cutting at the cutting layout
creation.
6.6.2.1.3.2 Driven cutting head
You can write here the serial number of the motor driven head. The nearest head to the machine's zero
is number 1.
6.6.2.1.3.3 Auxiliary equipments
On the machine can be mounted various equipments as torches, labeling units, marking units,
ArcWriter, drilling unit, etc. You have to specify, which type of unit is mounted in the actual mount.
6.6.2.2 Page 2
6.6.2.2.1 Cutting bench
6.6.2.2.1.1 Working width
It is the distance, which the driven cutting head is able ride from one end switch to other end switch on
the machine.
6.6.2.2.1.2 Bench of NC machine
SAPS can show some lines to facilitate verification of position of small parts on the bench. In the
SAPSW set-up there is possible to change the color of lines. You can switch on/off the drawing of lines
with the CONTOURS check box in the main window of SAPSW.
6.6.2.2.2 Aut.torch span
6.6.2.2.2.1 Switch on
You can check the box only in case, if the NC machine is able to automatically control the distance
between the heads.
6.6.2.2.2.2 Move to zero
If checked, then SAPS put into the NC program that control code, which moves the machine to the
machine reference point before performing the automatic head spacing.
6.6.2.2.3 |Head code
6.6.2.2.3.1 Adressing of heads
If checked, then SAPS create in the NC program codes to direct control of heads switch-on and switch
off.

78 SAPSproW v19
6.6.2.3 Page 3
6.6.2.3.1 NC program
6.6.2.3.1.1 Control
The output ESSI program format is being elected, either ESSI or DIN (ISO).
6.6.2.3.1.2 Maximum length of NC program
In the text box there is the maximum length of NC-program in kbytes, which can be accepted by the
control system of NC-machine. The value serves only for caution and it has no influence on whether the
NC-program will be created or not. If you do not want SAPSW to control the length, write zero into the
text box.
6.6.2.3.1.3 Extension for LINK
The extension of the ready NC-program's name in a form suitable for the direct NC-machine control.
6.6.2.3.1.4 Error in arcs in NC programs
Here You can enter the maximal allowed error on arcs (difference of radius in the beginning and the
ending point of arc) in the NC program. In NC programs in ESSI format the value can be e.g. 0.15 mm.
SAPS checks the arcs to this value in the NC program by drawing them. In the SCADW set up, there is
a text box on the TECHNOLOGY tab, which hold the value of the maximal permitted error of arcs in
parts. This value has to be smaller as the first one, otherwise SAPS would report more errors in the NC
programs.
6.6.2.3.1.5 Height of heads
For machines with ESSI form of programs You set here the dimensions of holes in the part. If at cutting
the part both dimensions of a hole are smaller, then in the ESSI program the code 45-46 will be used to
switch on - off the head height control.
6.6.2.3.1.6 Point of lead-in ...
The NC-machine keeps the optimal distance of cutting heads from the plate usually by the help of
cutting head´s height capacity transducers. To work properly the transducers must be situated over the
plate and that´s why it is necessary to keep a minimum distance of the cutting head´s centre from the
edges of the plate if you are choosing the point of lead-in. After the lead-in it is possible to drive the
burner even closer to the edges.
-by ticking "Remove" it is possible to order SAPSW at lead-in creation with AUT button not to insert the
lead-in point of the plate into the forbidden zone
-by ticking "Warn" it is possible to ask SAPSW after clicking "OK?" on the basic side of SAPSW to call
attention to all lead-ins whose lead-in point of plate is situated in the forbidden zone. In the cutting
layout window a circle with the radius equal to the forbidden zone is depicted, in NC-program window a
red cross is depicted.
-in "Min.distance" text box there is possible to set the size of the forbidden zone at the edges of the
plate in millimetres
6.6.2.3.1.7 Velocity
In the NC-program, there can be information for the setting of the standard speed of cutting. If you
check the "Speed of cutting" check box in SAPSW settings, NC-program will be cut in accordance
with the thickness of material according to the value set in STANDARD table. It is still possible to change
this standard speed in a certain extent on the control unit panel, e.g. minus 40 up to plus 20 per cent
(different NC-machine control units have different extents).
6.6.2.3.1.8 Change of kerf compensation
After cutting of several couples of parts in the common edge cutting, there must be a change of the kerf
compensation. If the control unit enables the compensation change in the course of cutting, then check
the check box. Otherwise it is not possible to create common edge cuttings with the cutting
compensation. On the other hand it is possible to create common edge cuttings with parts whose
dimensions are geometrically compensated in advance in SCADW program. Parts with the
compensation in SCADW are automatically cut without the kerf compensation being switched-on.

Settings 79
6.6.2.3.1.9 Identification of holes

SAPS outputs a code (code 29+1) in the checked state of the check box on the start of every hole in
the NC program in ESSI format. Acting on this code the machine can use another value of cutting
crack's compensation as the compensation on the outer contours. This can result in more precise
dimensions of cutted parts. Of course the control system has to know the 29+1 code.
6.6.2.3.1.10 Value of kerf compensation
SAPS outputs the code 40+nn in the checked state of the check box, which tells the value of cutting
crack's compensation in NC program in ESSI format. E.g. if the text box STEP IN THE NC PROGRAM
contains the value 0,1 mm, the code 40+12 represents a compensation value 1,2 mm to compensate the
2,4 large cutting crack. If the step = 0,01 mm, then to compensate a 3,2 mm large cutting crack, in the
NC program will be the code 40+160.
6.6.2.3.1.11 Minimum arc
In the text box you set the minimum allowed length of cutting along the arc, in mm. Shorter arcs will be
cut along a straight line. The value should be equal or bigger than the length which the control unit is still
able to cut as an arc (the control generates a whole circle instead of an arc under a particular limit
length). The item does not influence cutting of circles.
6.6.2.3.1.12 Control sign
It is necessary to write in here the sign after the loading of which NC-machine will stop ignoring NC-
program. It is usually % sign. The same sign has to appear in the text box "Start of NC-program".
If the machine does not know the control sign function, then the text box must be empty, without gaps.
6.6.2.3.1.13 Comment
A sign for the beginning of the comment in NC-program. For DIN format it can be "(" or sometimes "/".
6.6.2.3.1.14 Numbering of Nxxx lines
For DIN format you will set a step for numbering of Nxxx... lines. If you set zero, then there will not be
lines´ numbers in NC-program.
6.6.2.3.1.15 Start of NC-program
The text in the text box is inserted at the beginning of ESSI formatted NC-programs. More ESSI-lines
can be written, if you use separation character ";" in the text box. For example, with this text %;////;M29,
3 new lines will be inserted.
6.6.2.3.1.16 Finish of NC-program
The text in the text box is inserted at the end of NC-programs. More lines can be written, if you use
separation character ";" in the text box. For example, with this text /;%;0, 3 new lines will be inserted.
6.6.2.3.1.17 Parity
At transferring the even parity of the transferred bytes of NC-program is generated into the LINK
directory in the selected form. Parity can be important at the output of NC-program for the punch tape
or for the memory cards.
6.6.2.3.2 NC code
6.6.2.3.2.1 Control codes
In the text boxes are the control codes of the actual selected NC machine. These codes use SAPS at
creating the output NC program.
6.6.2.3.2.2 NC code for transposition
You set the NC-code for the automatic replacing of cutting head for marker. If checked, then the "11"
ESSI code will be applied.

80 SAPSproW v19
6.6.2.4 Page 4
6.6.2.4.1 Marker
6.6.2.4.1.1 Marking
-choice of the marking machine (marking with zinc-oxide powder or with the centre-punch. A special
kind is marking by cutting, when the NC-machine does not have its own marking equipment).
-time for changing the marking head for the cutting head aggregate. Set in seconds.
-time of 1 punch for centre-punching of an individual point
-speed of an uninterrupted marking in [m/s]
6.6.2.4.1.2 Offset
If the NC-machine is equipped with a marking equipment and if the machine can automatically
transpose cutting heads for markers, then check the check box.
6.6.2.4.1.3 Cutted mark length
In the "Marker" box in the "Length" text box (if selected "cutting points"), you can set the length of the
line which will be created in the NC program to mark a point on the plate.
6.6.2.4.1.4 Quick marking
If it is checked, the machine carries out marking at the speed of a quick crossing of the machine
(generally 6-15 m/min).
6.6.2.4.1.5 Stop after marking
If it is checked, the machine stops after the fulfillment of marking before the following cutting.
6.6.2.4.1.6 Mark in advance
In the setting, on the side "MACHINE" - "Mechanics" - "Mark in advance", there is possible to set the
fulfillment of all marking operations at the same time, at the beginning of the NC-program.
6.6.2.4.2 Marker MikroSchlage
6.6.2.4.2.1 Allow "MikroSchlage"
Allow the using of MikroSchlage unit in the NC program.
6.6.2.4.2.2 Offset
Put the codes to the NC program for switching the cutting head to the MikroSchlage head.
6.6.2.4.2.3 Marking at first
Every marking procedure from every part in the layout perform on the NC program beginning.
6.6.2.4.2.4 Stop before marking
Before start of the marking, stop the NC machine (only in case, if the "Marking at first" is checked).
6.6.2.4.2.5 Stop after marking
After end of the marking, stop the NC machine (only in case, if the "Marking at first" is checked).
6.6.2.4.2.6 Speed
The labeling speed, set in character per second.
6.6.2.4.2.7 Length
The active length of the MikroSchlage unit.
6.6.2.4.2.8 Width
The active width of the MikroSchlage unit.
6.6.2.4.2.9 Type of marking
You may select here the types of texts, which will the MikroSchlage unit mark to every part on the
layout.

Settings 81
6.6.2.4.3 Plasmawriter ArcWriter

Here can You set up the ArcWriter plasmawriter.
6.6.2.4.4 Power control
The frame appears if you choose "plasma" or "laser" as a kind of machine.
Applied to:
-plasma NC-machines, equipped with a continual reducing of cutting parameters before the cutting
switch-off (e.g. Messer, types HD3070, HT2000, HT4500). 162-163 codes are used. In the "Length"
text box, there is possible to enter the minimum length of the cut section under which the power control
cannot be allowed. In the "Diameter" text box, there is possible to enter the minimum diameter of the
round hole under which the power control cannot be allowed.
-a specific laser machine. 70-71 codes are used. The code 71 (power reducing) is entered when the
total cut length between the codes 7 and 8 is smaller than the entered value.
6.6.2.5 Page 5
6.6.2.5.1 Three-torch cutting
Here can be set the data for the triple torch unit for cutting machines produced by companies MGM
Tábor and Messer :
- length before the cutting kerf
- length before the cutting kerf
- compulsory torch number
- code to head change (changing to triple-torch unit)
- code to head change (changing to single-torch unit)
6.6.2.5.2 Drilling machine
You can set here various properties for drilling.
6.6.2.5.3 BAZ machine
This settings are used only for a specific NC cutting machine, don't check this box.
6.6.3 Mechanics
6.6.3.1 Quality and specific weight
You can select, where will maintain the SAPS the values of material quality and the specific gravity. This
data may be in the QUALITY.TXT file, or in the STANDARD table.
If selected to maintain in QUALITY.TXT, you can direct SAPS to show only the appropriate material
qualities:
11373|7.8 ...SAPS will show ever the 11373 quality
XCR32D|7.4|PLASMA ...SAPS shows the quality XCR32D only at creating NC programs for
machine named PLASMA
If at saving the GEO part in the SCADW you type a new quality (or at interactive creation of a new
layout) then SAPS automatically modify the QUALITY.TXT and add the new quality.
Recommendation:
At autogen cutting (when you cut only standard material, which has always the same specific gravity) is
better maintain the data in the QUALITY.TXT. At this selection then in the STANDARD are the columns
with quality and specific gravity not present.
At plasma cutting (where the cutted materials can have various specific gravity) you have two
possibilities to selection:
1. for every used material create one "Machine" e.g. PLASMA-FE, PLASMA-AL, PLASMA-CU (3
various machines with 3 STANDARD tables)
2. create only one "machine" e.g. PLASMA, and to the STANDARD add lines of the 3 used materials
(you will have 3 times more data lines in the STANDARD as in case 1)
6.6.3.2 Jet cleaning time
It is possible to enter data for testing the calculation of the jet cleaning time. You enter the length of the
cut in m, the number of lead-ins, the number of cutting heads, the number of plates. The time is
calculated in accordance with the polynomic function where it is possible to change 4 constants. If the

82 SAPSproW v19
value of some constant is zero, then the time of cleaning will be zero as well and zero will appear in
ECO - printout of the NC-program, too.
6.6.3.3 Price of the machine time
A constant for an approximate calculation of the price of the machine time or the tender´s wage, it is
entered in the text box in the settings , on the "NC-machine" side, "Mechanics". If it is zero, then the
price is not printed in ECO-data. The price is calculated as a total time of cutting in minutes x a
constant.
Note:
Besides this price, SAPSW can calculate the price from the length of cutting, the length of marking and
the number of lead-ins.
6.6.3.4 Relay of table
It is possible to input the necessary time to relay and justify the plate on the working table of the NC
machine. In the ECO printout will be this time added to the whole cutting time.
6.6.3.5 Min.high-speed shift
For NC-machine movement without cutting it is possible to enter here the minimal movement length at
which the machine high-speed shift will be already switched on. Under this limit the machine will be
moving at the working speed, without cutting.
6.6.3.6 Verify openings
In the "Verify openings" frame in the "Machine" settings on the tab „Mechanics“. Here you will find the
„Multiplier“ text box. If the diameter of the openings is smaller then (material thickness * "Multiplier"),
then the SCADW according to the "Machine function" option buttons does not draw the opening, but
exchanges it to a marking, labelling or a drilling point.
The SCADW checks the not round openings as well. In these cases it compares the surface size of the
opening to the surface size of the circle with the diameter of (material thickness * "Multiplier"). The
openings are not replaced by a point, they keep their form, but the machine is set from cutting to
marking or labelling.
In the "Verify openings" frame is also the "Remove openings" text box. This function leaves out all the
circular openings, that has a smaller diameter then the defined value.
6.6.4 Control
6.6.4.1 NCP-file
6.6.4.1.1 Notes
It inserts "Notes for the machine operator" text in the NC-program file (into ESSI-format).
6.6.4.1.2 Start-finish in NC
If it is checked, then SAPSW will label the first and last ESSI-lines of particular parts or technologically
connected groups of parts in NC-program. The label is 3 lines in the form of "3/@n-Z/4" for the first
line and "3/@n-K/4" for the last line (n...number of the part in the program)
6.6.4.1.3 Comment 3-4
If it is checked, then comment lines will appear at the beginning of NC-program. The comment contains
the program name, dimensions and quality of the plate, number and distance of cutting heads. We
recommend to check it.
6.6.4.1.4 Draw the sequence in successive steps
If it is checked, then SAPSW into NC-program will insert 3 - 4 codes to each part and at a slowed-down
drawing it will draw the serial number in successive steps before the drawing of part contour. If the
check box is unchecked, then there will not be any 3 - 4 codes in front of the parts in NC-program and
the serial numbers will be drawn at once after the NC-program drawing.

Settings 83
6.6.4.1.5 Points for the drilling gauge

If it is checked, SAPSW will create a text file with the coordinates of piercing points of the lead-ins for
each NC-program. This directory can be used at the rough-drilling of lead-in points with thick plates.
The text file is situated in the current working directory in FUR directory.
6.6.4.1.6 Automatic joint cuts
SAPSW can create multiply common edge cuttings between more parts. The exact description is in the
Tips and tricks chapter.
6.6.4.1.7 Using plate edges
You can use in case of parts with at least one straight side the plate edges and so shorten the cutting
length. The exact description is in the Tips and tricks chapter.
6.6.4.1.8 Program user
The check box serves to identificate the programmer (computer), who created the NC program. To the
NC program as well as to the ECO printout will be then the computer net name added. When you wish
to add other text, then write into the USERSPECIFIC.TXT file a new line "computer name=new text", e.g.
PENTIUM800=John Newman.
6.6.4.1.9 NC program without compensation
If checked, then SAPS will not create in ESSI formatted NC programs the control codes 29 a 30. This is
required only in that case, if the parts were created in other CAD systems, and their geometry is
already compensated to eliminate the kerf.
6.6.4.2 Speed restriction
6.6.4.2.1 According to parameters
At designing the part in the SCADW you can use the PAR button to selectively slow-down some parts in
the contours of the part. It is possible slow-down in 3 steps, in opposite to the standard cutting speed.
After selecting the slow-down level, you have to click the first and then the second point on the contour
(in counterclockwise direction). If the whole contour should be slow-downed, then you click the same
point twice.
6.6.4.2.2 Small holes
If checked, then SAPSW will automatically slow-down the cutting speed (depending on the values in
the STANDARD table, D1-M1, D2-M2).
6.6.4.2.3 On contour end
The cutting speed can be reduced at the end of every contour, before stop of cutting. It is useful e.g. to
good through cutting high quality steels of greater thicknesses. The reducing will be realized before the
lead-out, in the contours last NC data block.
6.6.4.2.4 Corner slow-down
The "Corner slowdown" function on the CONTROL tab of program settings enables for every material
thickness and quality the corner slowdown in the NC programs. Selectively can be this function
disabled, by changing the SLOWDOWN parameter from 1 to 0 in the PTV-EN.TXT file.
The number of slowdown segments can vary from 1 to 3, You can change the number by changing
the length value to zero. E.g.:
· OBTUSE_DASH_DASH=2 3 4 90 80 70 slowdown in 3 segments (of 2, 3, and 4 mm) to 70 percent of
the original speed.
· OBTUSE_DASH_DASH=4 4 0 80 50 0 slowdown in 2 segments (of 4 mm) to 50 percent of the
original speed.
· OBTUSE_DASH_DASH=6 0 0 40 0 0 slowdown in 1 segment (of 6 mm) to 40 percent of the original
speed.
6.6.4.3 Check the layouts name
If checked, then by saving the NC program to the LINK folder, the SAPS will examine if an NC program
with the same name already exists or not.

84 SAPSproW v19
6.6.4.4 Remnants to DXF too

If checked, then SAPS will create the drawings of the remnants in the layout also as DXF files. The
drawings will be created in the folder, which is named in the "Remnants" text box.
6.6.4.5 Global remnant plate directory
It is possible to save the remnant plates optionally into a global directory. From there SAPSW can call
them irrespective of the currently set working directory.
6.6.4.6 Name of LINK directory
According to the content of the text box:
1.If there is a name of a valid directory in the text box, then SAPSW saves NC-programs created for the
current kind of machine (standard data) into the common directory. You will create the NC-program
with icon, with OK+LINK button. At first SAPSW creates NC-program with ".DIN" or ".NCP"
extension in the current NCP working directory, then it will do a possible code conversion, then it will
copy NC-program into the common directory and it will change the extension of the file name. In the
end it can start a command BAT file or an outer EXE program.
2.If you leave the text box empty, then SAPSW will create NC-programs with the required extension of
file name directly in the current NCP working directory. You will create the NC program with OK
button. In the end a possible BAT or EXE-file is started.
6.6.4.7 Outer EXE or BAT- file
If you want to work up the SAPS output immediately after the NC-program creation, then write the name
of your helping program or the name of your command file in the text box. You can write even 1-3
parameters in the text box (attention, ECO and JPEG are created at the preview or at NC-program
drawing):
%1 ... the whole name of ECO-data file
%2 ... the whole name of NC-program file
%3 ... the whole name JPEG drawing file
For example, if the PRIK.BAT file contains (copy the BAT file into the install directory, where the
SAPSW.EXE file is):
NOTEPAD %1
DELETE %1
COPY %3 C:\ARCHIV
then write in the text box:
PRIK.BAT %1 %3
Or if you want to work up the ECO-data output in your own program called SezPisW, then write in the
text box e.g. :
D:\PROGRAMY\SEZPISW.EXE %1
6.6.4.8 Global details directory
In SCADW there is possible to save details (files like DTL) optionally into the global details directory.
From there SCADW can call them irrespective of the currently set working directory.
6.6.5 Control 2
6.6.5.1 Drive burners away
If you cut the same NC-program several times one after another and the working desk is equipped with
stops for the precise setting of the plate, then it is possible to set SAPSW so that after the parts´ cutting
the machine portal automatically drives away into the space outside the plate and the machine stops. It
is easier for a machine operator to change plates. Then he must let the machine finish the NC-program
from his control desk, burners move back into their new precise starting position. Finally he can start
the NC-program again from the beginning, without another setting of a new plate cutting.

Settings 85
6.6.5.2 Detaching of stitches

You can set up the SAPS to create NC programs, where the NC machine after cutting a part detaches
the stitches too (if there are any in the program). It is technologically a critical operation, while we use
the stitches on that places, where in accordance of big heat load the parts twist and moves themselves
on the plate. By not appropriate and not controlled detaching of stitches can the machine cut into the
neighboring parts, or in the worst case, the heads can be damaged if the machine moves above a
raised section of a part. The detaching of stitches is in that order, in which the programmer connected
them to the part in the cutting layout. We recommend this setting of SAPS only for skilled NC
programmer and machine operators.
You can set up on the CONTROL2 tab:
- the distance of the detaching line from the contour. By greater value the probability is less that the own
part will be damaged, but on other hand the probability encreases at neighboring parts.
- the angle of lead-in. By autogen cutting use e.g. 125, then the lead-in will not cross the break's lines.
By plasma cutting can be used e.g. the value 45.
- if the machine have to stop before detaching the first stitch, or before every one break. The machine
operator so has the opportunity to inspect the situation and eventually to stop the cutting in case of not
appropriate part's positions on the plate.
6.6.5.3 By-pass of table
6.6.5.3.1 Create
In the checked form a by-pass of a plate is generated into NC-program. The by-pass can be used for
two reasons.
6.6.5.3.2 Kind of by-pass
You can let a by-pass create for two reasons:
1.By-pass by high-speed shift. Burners of NC-machine really move with high-speed shift round the
plate. The by-pass serves for the control of good setting of the plate on the working desk of the
machine.
2.By-pass by "cutting". With this kind of by-pass there will appear commands and lines for cutting in
ESSI-format of NC-machine, but NC-machine does not move and in fact it does not cut. The only
purpose of the by-pass is to make the plate contour visible on the screen of the NC-machine control
unit.
6.6.5.3.3 Direction of by-pass
The plus direction is anticlockwise, the minus one is clockwise.
6.6.5.3.4 Program tracks
The machine can be made to stop after each side of the plate, or it is possible to drive through the
whole contour of the platewithout stopping.
6.6.5.4 Drive-away in the end
Click at a point to set the corner of the plate where the burners arrive at the end of cutting. If you click
at the point in the plate picture, then the burners stay at their last working position after having finished
cutting.
6.6.5.5 Cutting order of holes
You can select on the "Control2" tab the cutting order of holes (continuous contours, where the first and
the last point are the same). The "0." selection leaves the cutting order unchanged. Every other
selection changes the cutting order.
For example the option 3 usually minimalizes the total length of rapid transfers between the holes. On
the other hand the option 4 will lengthen the transfers. It is useful in the case when it is necessary to
spread the temperature load on the largest possible area in order not to deform the plate.
SAPSW will determine the order in one part or in a group of connected parts as well (chain cutting,
common edge cutting or bridge).
If there is at least one interactive change of the order of holes cutting in the part or in the group, then
the order of holes is not changed automatically.

86 SAPSproW v19
An example of parts connected by a chain cutting. The holes in the order from 1st to 9th are cut at first
and the outer contours in the end.
6.6.5.6 Enable automatic changing...
The "Aut.changing of direction" and "Aut.changing of order" check boxes works for drilling, marking,
labeling, profile cutting (uncontinuous) contours. If they are checked, then SAPS can automatically
change the working sequence and the direction of contours (that means the first worked point of the
contour will be the originally last point of contour) to achieve the minimal transfer path to the next
contour.
If the boxes are not checked, then the order and the direction remains the same as they were created
by part's design in the SCADW program module.(default direction and sequence created automatically,
or interactiv).
6.6.5.7 Bridge with arcs
If you check this check box, then the bridges which cut themselves through (the narrow bridges) will
connect themselves to the contours of parts through arcs. The radius of the arc is equal to the actual
cutting kerf.
6.6.5.8 Cut the scrap
In the text box "Cut the scrap" can you specify the length of shortening of the detaching line, if that line
runs between two parts in the layout.
6.6.5.9 Cut the scrap on plate edge

In the text box "Cut the scrap on plate edge" can you specify the length of shortening of the detaching
line, if that line runs between a part and the plate edge.
6.6.5.10 Minimal detaching length
You can set in the text box the minimal length of detaching lines. SAPS create a detaching line on that
position in the layout, where minimal "Min.detaching length" + 2x "Cut the scrap" free place is.
6.6.5.11 Maximal length of label
This is the maximal number of characters of automatically by SAPS created labels. SAPS creates the
label by combining the material thickness and the quality.
6.6.5.12 Actuate the amount
When the check box is checked, then in moment of a new cutting layout creation SAPS subtracts the
amount of plates of the new cutting layout from ACT number in the PLATES table. When the new cutting
layout was created on a remnant plate, then SAPS subtracts it in the REMNANTS table.
6.6.5.13 Ride to the base side
If checked then in case that the NC program contains change of burners, then the machine rides to the
side of the plate, so makes it easier the changing of head spacing.
6.6.6 Lead-in / lead-out / transition

6.6.6.1 Aut. lead-in
6.6.6.1.1 Aut. lead-ins
You can choose from 8 directions for the automatic determination of the approximate point of automatic
lead-ins´ connection. It is possible to choose it extra for part´s holes and extra for the outer contour. At
the same time:
-the program tries to connect the lead-in into the endpoint of the section which is the nearest one to the

Settings 87
chosen point
-the lead-in will be, if possible, led in the direction of the first cut section as if the "Tang" check box (on
TLG panel) was checked.
-if the chosen kind of lead-in can´t be connected without collision and the "In section" check box (TLG
panel) is checked, then the program tries to connect the lead-in also inside the part´s section.
6.6.6.1.2 Kind of lead-in
Click at the favored shape of the automatic lead-in. SAPSW in position in the lead-in creation mode
will automatically choose this kind of lead-in. The automatically chosen kind of lead-in can be anytime
interactively changed.
6.6.6.1.3 Preferred direction
If checked, then SAPS will prefer the creation of such lead-ins, which leads in direction of 0 or 180
degrees to the contour. The checking of the check boxes is valid only, if selected is one from the two
middle check boxes for selection the point of connection to the contour.
6.6.6.2 Initial ...
You can select in the "Initial..." box the mode of overfiring (marking, labeling, drilling) for the thick
materials, where the machine is not able overfire the material in its normal mode.
Various selections:
"Overfire":
In place of lead-ins is it possible to overfire the plate with a short abscissae or small diameter circle. The
real mode can be more precisely specified by:
- "Thickness", the overfire will be created only in case of thicker materials
- "Length", the length of line which makes the overfire
- "Cut lead-in circles", if checked, then will be shown a chart with the diameter of the small circles to
piercing
- "Overlap", a constant, it defines the lengthening of piercing circles
"Cut mark", "Mark", "ArcWriter":

The machine will label the needed overfire position with a mark, which can be used for positioning of the
external drilling machine. The form of the mark can be designed by SCADW as a detail drawing, with
filename "!.DTL". The order of lines by the labelling will be the same, as the order of lines by designing
(you can use only abscissae or open polygon function to draw the mark). If you does not specify an
own mark in the SCADW, then SAPS will use a standard mark (a mirrored number "4", height 25 mm).
6.6.6.3 Triangle
The item determines the length of the equilateral triangle side for a lead-in with a triangle .
6.6.6.4 Lead-out
6.6.6.4.1 Elongation, in holes
It is possible to write a plus number from 0 to about 2 to the text box. If the number is not zero, then the
automatic lead-outs in holes will be lengthened by a short section in already cut part of the hole and the
quality of the cut can be sometimes better. The length which the burner follows in the cut line is set as a
multiple of the kerf and the set number.
6.6.6.4.2 Elongation, in outer contour
It is possible to write a positive number from 0 to about 2 to the text box. If the number is not zero, then
the automatic lead-outs in holes will be lengthened by a short section in already cut part of the hole and
the quality of the cut can be sometimes better. The length which the burner follows in the cut line is set
as a multiple of the kerf and the set number.
SAPS create the elongation on a corner, providing the angle on the corner sides is greater as the value
in the MIN. ANGLE OF CORNER.
If the part is to the next part linked with chain cutting, then SAPS create the elongation in two cases:
1. If the "Chain cutting with lead-out" check box is checked (not preferable on autogen cutting), or...
2. If the angle between the elongation and the first segment of chain cutting is greater, as the value in

88 SAPSproW v19
the "Min.angle of chain cutting" text box.

6.6.6.4.3 Min. angle of corner
SAPS create the elongation on a corner, providing the angle on the corner sides is greater as the value
in the text box.
6.6.6.4.4 Min. angle of transition
The value in the text box is used with the "Elongation, in outer contour" check box.
6.6.6.4.5 Transition with lead-out
SAPS generate lead-outs in the checked state of this check box also in parts with chain cutting. The
chain cutting will begin on the endpoint of the lead-out.
6.6.6.4.6 Direction in holes
This constant can change the direction of lead-out in holes. The difference between the lead-in angle
and the first cut hole section is multiplied by this constant. For the rate:
0.5...the lead-out halves the area between the lead-in and the first section.
0.....the direction of lead-out is exactly opposite to the lead-in
1.....the lead-out is exactly in the kerf of the first cut hole section.
6.6.6.4.7 Direction in outer contour
This constant can change the direction of lead-out. The difference between the lead-in angle and the
first cut section angle is multiplied by this constant. For the rate:
0.5...the lead-out halves the area between the lead-in and the first section.
0.....the direction of lead-out is opposite to the lead-in, the lead out lays exactly in the cutting of the
lead-in. The autogen cutting quality can be so better.
1.....the lead-out is exactly in the kerf of the first cut section
Note:
If the value in the ELONGATION IN OUTER CONTOUR text box is zero, then a small value in
DIRECTION IN OUTER CONTOUR pulls the end of lead-out to the lead-in, as it is written therein before.
If however the ELONGATION IN OUTER CONTOUR text box is not zero, then a small value cause, that
the end of lead-out will be pulled to the first cutted line in the part (so will be a salient angle achieved,
which can lead to a good separation of burnts from the plate).
6.6.6.4.8 After common edge cut
If You check the check box, the SAPS create the lead-out after the common edge cutting. The common
edge cutting will be created only in case, when the common line length is the same in the both parts. In
other cases create interactive lead out.
6.6.6.4.9 Deflexion
In the text box is the value of the lead-out's deflexion from the common line of the common edge cutting.
The deflexion has to be zero or a negative number.

Settings 89
6.6.7 Import
6.6.7.1 Import setup
You can set up the importing of the NC programs from other program systems:
- Analyse
- Piece control
- Code ESSI
- Permitted error ESSI
- Code ISO/DIN
- Permitted error ISO/DIN
- Prefix GEO
- Cutting crack
- Min.width of stitch
- Width of stitch
6.6.7.2 Analyse
If You check the check box, then SAPS before creating new GEO files scans in the PARTS table the
labeled lines and the corresponding existing GEO files. If it finds the same geometry, then it use the old
file and do not create a new GEO file.
6.6.7.3 Piece control
If You check the check box, then SAPS increment the pieces of the used parts and into the cutting
layout put the part with piece control (underlined part's serial number). In the PARTS table in the PC
column it write in the count of parts, in the ACT column it puts zeros.
6.6.7.4 Code ESSI
You should enter that codes into the text boxes, which are used in the imported NC program.
6.6.7.5 Control sign
It is necessary to write in here the sign after the loading of which NC-machine will stop ignoring NC-
program. It is usually % sign. The same sign has to appear in the text box "Start of NC-program".
If the machine does not know the control sign function, then the text box must be empty, without gaps.
6.6.7.6 Step in the NC program
The text box is used for NC machines with ESSI format. For standard ESSI format write in the value 0,1
mm.
6.6.7.7 Permitted error ESSI
The value in the text box is used to find continuous contours in the NC program. The inputted number
may not be lower as the cumulative error in the NC program. For NC programs in ESSI format You
should use e.g. the value 0,2. This number has no influence to the precision of the new cutting layout,
the precision depend only on the original precision of the imported NC program.
6.6.7.8 Code ISO/DIN
You should enter that codes into the text boxes, which are used in the imported NC program.
6.6.7.9 Permitted error ISO/DIN
The number in the text box is used to find continuous contours in the NC program. The inputted number
may not be lower as the cumulative error in the NC program. For ISO/DIN format of NC programs You
can enter the number 0,1 mm. This number has no influence to the precision of the new cutting layout,
the precision depend only on the original precision of the imported NC program.
6.6.7.10 Prefix GEO
The characters in the text box are used to create a new partname.

90 SAPSproW v19
6.6.7.11 Kerf
SAPS looks for couples of parts with a common edge cutting. The inputted value serves to find shorter
segments in outer contour of parts, and so to detect parts with the common edge cutting. E.g. if the
cutting kerf is 2 mm, You should enter 3 mm. For 4 mm kerf enter the value 6.
6.6.7.12 Min. width of stitch
Write into the MIN.WIDTH OF STITCH and WIDTH OF STITCH text boxes the values, which serves to
detect stitches in the NC program. SAPS search the NC program for one or more cutting gaps with
length in the inputted range of lengths.
6.6.7.13 Max.width of stitch
Write into the MIN.WIDTH OF STITCH and WIDTH OF STITCH text boxes the values, which serves to
detect stitches in the NC program. SAPS search the NC program for one or more cutting gaps with
length in the inputted range of lengths.
6.6.7.14 Sort of stitch
Here can You select the type of stitch, which will be used in the parts in the new imported cutting layout.

SAPSW
Chapter
VII
92 SAPSproW v19
7 SAPSW
7.1 Nesting of layouts
7.1.1 A new nesting layout creation
7.1.1.1 Plates on the working table
When the NC machine is cutting together more plates with more heads, then in the text boxes besides
other values has to be written:
- number of plates on the benches
- distance of first plate's border from bench's border
- distance between the plates
In NC MACHINE setup on the MECHANICS2 tab are these values:

- working width. It is the distance, which the driven cutting head can run in Y direction from one limit
switch to the other.
- number of benches abreast in Y direction
- distance between the benches
- bench width
- position of the first bench, measured to working width
Attention:
Following the input values and the setup data SAPS shows the initial position of plates on the machine.
When:
- number of plates on the machine is greater as 1 and...
- number of heads is greater as 1 on 1 plate and...
- the NC program is designed so, that the initial count of cutting heads is decreased at cutting and...
- the plates on the bench are not in the same position as designed in SAPS, ...
then in accordance the position of the parts on the cutting layout can happen, that the machine will be
driven to a limit switch.
In the case that on the machine is only one plate, or the head count is constant in cutting process, then
it is not necessary to assure the precise mutual distance of plates. It is enough to position the heads on
every plate to the initial starting point designed in the cutting layout.
Example:
Setup data:
Creating the cutting layout:

SAPSW 93
Showing the cutting layout:
7.1.1.2 Nesting layout for a whole plate

It is advantageous before creating a new cutting layout to click at icon and label the parts you
want to insert into the cutting layout. Although it is not necessary it will make another manipulation with
parts and plates easier.
- click at . A window appears where:
· click at the left button and transmit the data from the "Plates" table onto the input window with
OK or with double click. In the PLATES table in the MatPrice column (price/kg) there is the
material price, which can depend on the dimensions of plate. SAPS at computing the prices, look
up first the value of price according of PlatNum value. If the MatPrice in the PLATES is zero, then
SAPS looks up the price in the STANDARD table.
· or enter the plate data on the keyboard. We recommend to set up the values of "Dist", "DistX1",
"DistX2", "DistY1", "DistY2" in the "Plates" for zero. In this case SAPSW will use the "Dist" and
"Edge" values from the "Standard" table instead of zeros from the "Plates" table.
- if you have labeled the parts you want to insert into the cutting layout, click at the "Parts (label)" drop-
down list. Here are all possible labels of the parts, that are situated in the actual working directory (the
"WorkDir" window contents). Click at the needed line of the drop-down list. Generally, if you display a
cutting layout, the VIEWER will take the cutting layout label and it will display only the needed parts
with the same label. There is a special meaning in "*" label (all parts from the "Parts" table will be
displayed) and "?" (only the parts with a quality and thickness equal to the cutting layout will be
displayed).
- if you didn´t labeled parts before a new cutting layout creation, write into the "Parts (label)" window
now
- it is possible to choose a text from the drop-down list into the Note window. Contents of a current text
file with the REMARK.TXT title are offered in the drop-down list. The file should be in the C:
\SAPSPROW directory. The chosen note is printed into ECO, or it is saved into NC-program. The
note can be visible, or corrected, in the "Notes for the machine operator" window before saving the
cutting layout.
Note:
- displayed data can be corrected from the keyboard, the program calculates and displays a new
distance of cutting heads according to new values.
- if You double click the NAME OF cutting layout input window, the SAPS find the last used cutting
layout's name. If this name ends to a number, then SAPS create the same new name, but add a one

94 SAPSproW v19
to the ending number. If the name ends to a character, the SAPS adds a "1" to the name. After that
SAPS write in every input window the same data as are used with the old cutting layout.
- if You write a material thickness or quality at input, which is not yet in the STANDARD table, then
SAPS offer the possibility to automatically create a new line in the STANDARD. At positive answer it
look up a line in the STANDARD with the same or greater value of thickness and set accordingly the
value in the new line. If finds farther a line with the same material quality, then set the specific gravity
too. If not, then SAPS ask the proper new value.
7.1.1.3 Working with remnants
SAPS can maintain the remnants in more ways, the most appropriate are:
1. For every working directory it creates a remnant's directory and table of remnants, but common for
various NC machines (it corresponds to the case, when the user saves the material for every single
external cutting order in an own store of plates, later the remnants)
2. Common for every working directory, but apart for every NC machine (case of own store for every
single NC machine)
3. Common for every working directory and for every NC machine (only one common store)
4. Common for every working directory and for every NC machine and for every SAPS in the network
(only one common store
At selection of 2 - 4 (setting on NC MACHINE, CONTROL tab) may be collected in the same common
remnant's directory large number of remnant files, which would the SAPS repeatedly read in (at
creating of new layouts, at displaying the remnants in the VIEWER, etc.), what would be on the network
a slow process. That's why by working in the network, the actual state of the VIEWER is not updated
immediately automatically, but instead of it if the state of the remnants changes, then the VIEWER
enables the "REFR." button and the REFR text changes its color to red on every computer in the
network. The text in the hint of the "REFR." button then shows the reason of the enabling. The user can
click the button, and so update the state of the remnant's table and the VIEWER only when it is needed.
7.1.1.4 Nesting layout for a remnant plate
-click at . The remnant can be chosen in two ways:
· click at the arrow in the "Name of remnant plate" drop-down list. Click at the line with the remnant
name. Or...
· click at button next to the window. Find a suitable line in the "Remnants" table and transmit the
data with a double click from the table's line.
· it is possible to choose a corner for the best turning of the remnant plate on the NC-machine
working desk (the window with the data about the distance of parts from the edge). The item can
be entered for a new cutting layout or changed in the course of the cutting layout creation. The
remnant plate is turned over for the "lower right" and "upper left" corner choice, that is why, in the
case of one-side rastered plates, it is necessary to mirror the parts where it is specified which
side should be rastered.
-then follow the instructions of the cutting layout for a whole plate
Notes:
1.In SCADW the remnant shape can be corrected before a cutting layout creation. But the remnant can
also be drawn from the total beginning in SCADW and you can save it as a ZBY type file. The
remnant can have any shape and you can even draw arcs, circles and holes in it.
2.For a remnant plate the initial position of the cutting head is in the left lower or upper corner of the
remnant. The corner point need not be always equal to the corner of a enclosed rectangle for a
remnant. Coordinates of the point with regards to the upper or lower corner of the enclosed rectangle
are set in ECO.
3.The initial position of the cutting head can be later interactively changed with the icon.
7.1.1.5 Duplicate from a layout
It is possible to create a new cutting layout as a copy of an existing cutting layout from the "Nestings"
menu. If you switch on the piece control in SAPSW and there are not enough pieces for the new
cutting layout, you can decide whether to let the cutting layout create or not and how to control the
number of pieces in particular parts.

SAPSW 95
If the control of pieces is switched off at the moment of a cutting layout duplicate creation, not the only
number of pieces of a part will be controlled in future.
7.1.1.6 A copy of the nesting for another machine
A cutting layout created for a particular machine can be used for NC-program creation of another
machine. Display the cutting layout on the screen, click the line of the needed new machine in the
drop-down list and click "Yes". SAPSW will copy the cutting layout into the PLA directory of the
requested machine and it will load necessary standard data.
7.1.1.7 Layout from circles
The button will find the best layout with the maximal material utilisation. First select in the "?" column
of the PLATES table the plates, from which can SAPS compute the best layout. Afterwards place the
mouse cursor in the PARTS table to the line with the part which has the outer contour in form of a circle
(it may be a flange, or it may have more openings). Afterwards click the button.
7.1.2 Automatic nesting

7.1.2.1 Automatic nesting of one layout
-create a new empty cutting layout or call on the screen an existing cutting layout
-with button start the automatic nesting. It is possible to create it into an empty cutting layout or
anytime let the prepared cutting layout be interactively completed with smaller parts.
-with another click at button it is possible to stop the automatic nesting before it is completed
-if not the only part on the cutting layout is chosen (does not have a yellow order), the AUTO function
will try to insert all parts of the VIEWER into the cutting layout. If you choose some parts (with a
window or ALT, they will have a yellow order), only the chosen kinds of parts will get into the cutting
layout.
-the PIECE CONTROL switch has influence to the nesting process
Warning:
For the automatic nesting it is not always possible to use parts with plasma arcs and triangles, because
a part of the arc or triangle can reach into the body of another part. If you still want to use such parts,
make a control of the plasma arc and triangle position after the cutting layout creation and, if it is
necessary, correct the position of the part on the cutting layout.
7.1.2.2 Automatic nesting of all layouts
7.1.2.2.1 Automatic nesting of all layouts
Sphere of use:
Typically you will use this possibility in cases when your aim is to work out quickly a big group of parts
many various kinds but small numbers of pieces (e.g a group of 105 parts with 183 pieces in total, 23
different cutting layouts will arise). For the case when you have only few kinds with a big number of
pieces (3 different parts with 826 pieces in total, 2 different cutting layouts will arise that are cut 6
times), it is more suitable to solve the problem with an interactive cutting layout creation.
The need of a quick preparation arises as a request for:
- a calculation of a standard of plate material consumption, on the basis of which you can calculate the
prices and make orders for material
- NC programs for cutting. You can anytime change the automatically created cutting layouts before
transmitting them into NC-programs with help of all SAPS means.
Preparation for start:
- appoint (with a double click or with CTRL) the suitable lines in REMNANTS, PLATES, NESTINGS
tables. SAPS will nest at first to the partly filled old cutting layouts and remnants with parts (if you have
appointed such lines), and then it goes on to whole plates.
- appoint the lines in the PARTS table
- set up a suitable order for the parts sorting in the VIEWER. The best use of material usually arises
after sorting according to the area, in some cases after sorting according to the length of parts.
- switching off of the PIECE CONTROL switch has no influence to the nesting process, the piece
control is on

96 SAPSproW v19
- click at the =AUTOMAT= button in the NESTINGS table

Heads:
- SAPS will use on new cutting layouts to new plates that number of heads, which is in the data line of
the plate
- at nesting to old existing cutting layouts can be significant the state of FORCE check box's and the
number of heads in the text box on the TLG panel. If You switch on the check box, than SAPS use the
inputted number of heads. If not, then will use the same number of heads as the last existing part in the
cutting layout.
Start:
- after recalling the window for the automatic creation, in the line of particular parts, you can still
selectively change some permitted angles under which SAPS will try to insert the parts into the cutting
layout
- click at in the window (not in the main window of SAPSproW). It is possible to interrupt the
cutting layout creation by pressing ESC.
7.1.2.2.2 Preparing for the nesting
- select appropriate lines in the PLATES table (or also in the REMNANTS or the LAYOUTS table). SAPS
starts the nesting at first to the old existing layouts and the remnants (if they were selected), afterward
starts the nesting to new whole plates.
- select in the PARTS table the requested parts (or every part, various material thickness or quality may
be selected too)
- in the VIEWER appropriately sort the parts. The best material utilisation can be achieved, if the parts
in the VIEWER are sorted by area or by length. In the VIEWER settings there is the "Slender parts"
check box. You can try to check it, sometimes it helps to achieve better utilisation. If checked, then
the sort algorithm prefers the parts, which are longer as 1 m, and the proportion of length : width is
greater as 6.
- if you need to create all layouts for every part with various material widths and qualities, then the
"Thick/qual" and the "Piece" check boxes should be checked.
At the end click the button, and the nesting window will open. Here can you set the nesting
parameters on the "In", "Pair", "TLG", "Out" tabs.
After some testing and probing the user gets enough practice, to set the parameters to appropriate
values, which are appropriate to the most of nesting tasks. Afterwards it is enough to use the SPEC,
CYCLE, SPEED, NORM, PAIRS buttons to achieve good nesting results by various cutting orders.
Remark:
If the length of the part is greater as the width of the plate, and the proportion of "length : width" is
greater as 6, then the nesting automat will select the "2x180" rotation, independently from that, what is
selected in the "Rotation" drop-down list
7.1.2.2.3 Setting
7.1.2.2.3.1 "In" tab
Names :
The base of the new file names of layouts, it will be expanded with a running number.
Angle :
Number and angle of rotation on one place at finding a good position. It is not through, that a greater
number of rotations will always achieve better material utilisation. Optimum is 4x90 degrees.
Corner :
Choice of the corner of the plate for final positioning of the part. At first the nesting automat roughly
place the part to the layout (with "Step" resolution), then if the "to 2 corn." is selected and the part is
enough near to the left upper plate corner, then it will move the part into that corner direction.
Step : Step in mm for finding a good position of the part on the layout. A smaller step will achieve

SAPSW 97
sometimes (not always) better material utilisation, but the nesting time is longer. Optimal setting is 5 mm.
Plates :
Requested number of plates (how many times will be the NC program cutted). SAPS will inspect the
value, and if it is not possible with this plate count achieving of good material utilisation, then SAPS
automatically set down the number.
Percentage :
To begin with the nesting, the summed area of parts to area of every plate must be greater as the
percentage.
If e.g. you set the percentage to 150, then SAPS will compute check the "Plates" number so, that for
every plate should be the area of parts minimally 1,5 x more as the area of the plate. If not, than SAPS
decreases the "Plate" number.
Tiny parts :
Nesting of tiny parts into one streak on the left side of plate. Black checking label will nest the other
parts into a new streak on the right side. Gray checking label enables the nesting of other parts closely
to the tiny parts.
without caption : Limit of tiny parts, which will be nested to the left side of plate [m2]
without caption : Streak width for tiny parts on the left side of plate [mm]
Forbid mirroring :
Forbid mirroring for all kinds of parts. If not checked, than the mirroring enable/disable status which
was executed at creating of the GEO file comes to existence.
16x22,5° :
Rotate parts with less area/length of circumscribed rectangle 16 times by 22,5 degrees [m2]|The
selection depends on the used sorting mode in the VIEWER settings.
As rectangle :
The automatic nesting sometimes creates visually better ordered layouts if checked this check box.
SAPS will place the parts, at which the proportion of the outer contour area and the umscribed
rectangle area is higher as the set percentage, as rectangles.
Acc.to min.area :
GEO rotation in accordance with the area of the minim.circumscribed rectangular
7.1.2.2.3.2 "Pair" tab
Create :
Create pairs of parts. In the pair are the parts rotated at 180 degrees to each other. Creating of pairs is
recommended for long slim parts.
m2 :
The part's area should stand in the selected range, otherwise the pair will be not created
%:
SAPS will create the couple, if the distance of centerpoints of the parts in the couple will be percentile
less in ratio to the part's length as the value.
Common edge cutting :

If possible, cut the pairs of parts with common edge cutting
Cusped lead-in :
Cusped lead-in from two abscissas
without caption :

98 SAPSproW v19
Minimal angle between of 1. segment of lead-in and 1. segment of the part, to create cusped lead-in
7.1.2.2.3.3 "TLG" tab
Aut.lead-ins :
Create automatic lead-ins after layout creation
Small holes lead-ins :

Automatic creation of lead-ins for small holes (Circle,Rectangle,Nut)
Aut.order :
Set the order of cutting after layout creation
Forced head count :

Force to the selected head count
without caption :
Number of requested active burners;
7.1.2.2.3.4 "Out" tab
Less plates :
Decrease the number of plates, when bad material utilisation was achieved and try create a new layout.
"%" :
Minimal material utilisation percentage, to book a not last cutting layout as a good cutting layout;
"%" :
Minimal material utilisation percentage, to book the cutting layout on the last plate as a good cutting
layout;
Create remnant :
Automatically create the remnant. The remnant can be modified in SCADW.;
Rectangle : Create the remnant plates in form of rectangle
Stop 1 : Stop after creating the individual cutting layouts
Sum : Shows the piece list of created nestings, shows the tables
Price : In the piece list show the price list of parts too
Disallow speed-up :
If not checked, then SAPS create to every part or pair a compulsory file, which enables at repeating of
the nesting to spead-up the nesting time 2x - 3x. If you perform the nesting once, than there is no
reason to uncheck the box.
7.1.2.2.3.5 List of parts, plates
In the nesting window there are the plates list and the parts list.
List of parts:
- it is possible to change the order of lines. Right click to the "Name" column in the requested line, then
to the target line. The nesting will be performed in the actual order of lines in the list.
- it is possible to change the number of rotations. Click to the "Rotate" column, and select the
appropriate value.
- the other data can be change to, with retyping the data
List of plates (old layouts, remnants):

- it is possible to change the order of lines. Right click to the "Name" column in the requested line, then
to the target line. The nesting will be performed in the actual order of lines in the list.- the order of lines
may be interactively changed.

SAPSW 99
- the other data can be changed to, with retyping the data
7.1.2.2.4 Start of nesting
The automatic nesting can be started with 5 buttons, every button performs the nesting with other control
parameters.
SPEC:
It starts the nesting with that settings, which are actually set in the moment (on the In, Pairs, TLG, Out
tabs).
CYCLE:
The button starts the nesting more times, with various by user requested parameters. These are in the
AUTONESTPARAMS.TXT file. The file may be corrected directly in the SAPS, or by any text
processing program e.g. the NOTEPAD.
At nesting end, the SAPS select the best resulted layouts. The CYCLE creates layouts only to whole
plates.
NORM:
It is a normal set of nesting parameters.
SPEED:
The nesting will be ready at shortest time. The material utilisation is not the best.
PAIRS:
It is a normal set of nesting parameters, but pairs of parts will be created too.
Remarks:
· Right click to the SPEC, NORM, SPEED, PAIRS shows the nesting parameters in the
AUTONESTPARAMS, and you can change then interactively
· The AUTONESTPARAMS.TXT file is created at the first click to the CYCLE button, and it becomes
some standard parameters. Right click shows the content of the file, and you can change the
parameters.
· The CYCLE button is active only in case, that the selected material are only whole plates.
7.1.2.2.5 End of nesting
The SAPS creates and shows a summarizing list (if the "Sum" check box is checked).
On the results can you decide, if the layouts are okay, or not. If not, then you can click the "Erase"
button, which:
· erases every new layout
· the number of plates and parts in the tables sets to the original values
· set the original piece count in the VIEWER
Afterwards can you let start the nesting with another button, or with the same button but with other
nesting parameter.
7.1.3 Old layouts

7.1.3.1 Recall the last layout
Click at button from the SAPSW programs panel or click at the "Last nesting" in the "Nestings"
menu or press the F10 key. With repeated click at button can You show more cutting layouts, to
the maximal permitted number of cutting layouts on the screen.
Note:
If there were one or more cutting layouts displayed on the screen at the moment of the previous
SAPSW program ending, this cutting layout or more cutting layouts (or the same cutting layout cut out)
will be displayed automatically after a new SAPSW start.

100 SAPSproW v19
7.1.3.2 Recall one nesting layout

Possible in 3 ways:
1. With the help of the VIEWER:
-recall the VIEWER. Click at "NCP".
-click at the picture of the requested NC-program and then into the area for the cutting layouts
depiction. (A click with the right button at the picture will not recall the cutting layout, it will only enlarge
NC-program on the whole screen.)
2. From the menu
-click at "One old nesting" in the "Nestings" menu (or Shift+F3)
-a double click at the chosen line or choose a line in the table and click the OK button
3. From the table
-click at button and the "Nestings" tab. A double click at the chosen line.
7.1.3.3 Recall a nesting from the list of layouts
Cutting layouts can be successively recalled from the list of selected cutting layouts:
-create the list by selecting or finding the requested cutting layouts.
-check the "List" check box in the SAPSW main window. SAPSW will find the first selected cutting
layout in the "Nestings" table and depict it.
-after closing the actual cutting layout another cutting layout from the list will be automatically depicted
-the "List" check box will be automatically annulated after the last cutting layout from the list
-recalling cutting layouts from the list can be interrupted by checking off the "List" check box
7.1.3.4 Recall more layouts at once
- select the cutting layouts you want to recall. You can recall only the cutting layouts that have the same
item in the LABEL column, i.e. cutting layouts were created from the same group of parts in the
VIEWER.
- click at "More old nestings" in the "Nestings" menu (or Ctrl+F3). All selected cutting layouts will be
displayed on the screen.
Note:
1.After loading more as one cutting layout, the "Over" and "Same" check boxes will be visible
2.On the "Shape" tab in the "Max.nestings" text box ( button) there is possible to set up how
many cutting layouts can be loaded and displayed at the same time on the screen.
7.1.4 Remnants
7.1.4.1 Remnants creation
It is possible to create remnants in these ways:
1.Automatically in the NOTES FOR THE MACHINE OPERATOR window by clicking at OK or OK+LINK.
A remnant can be created even from bigger holes.
2.Straight by drawing in SCADW and saving as a ZBY type file.
3.Interactively, in TLG window, REMNANT tab. It is possible to choose the kind of remnant, like the main
remnant (the biggest,k on the right side of the cutting layout), or other remnants (usually smaller
ones). Several remnants can be created in one cutting layout. A remnant be created on a remnant
plate as well (remnant from remnant).
The main remnant:
- click the initial point of the new remnant on the contour of the plate or of the remnant plate, then create
an angle line arcing the left side of the remnant contour. It is possible to handle only the edges of the
plate while drawing the lines of the remnant, it is not possible to handle parts. Collision of the line with
the parts on the cutting layout is not controlled. It is possible to change the direction of the line, after a
click with the left mouse button an orthogonal line stretches, after a click with the right button an
oblique line stretches. Finish the last section of the line on the plate contour again, let us say on the
remnant plate contour. After a click at the endpoint SAPSW will complete the other points so as the
line runs from the initial point anticlockwise.
Other remnants:
- click at the initial point of the remnant, then create an angle line arcing the whole contour of the
remnant. The last section of the line should finish in the initial point of the remnant.

SAPSW 101
4.By a correction in SCADW. Click at in TLG window. SCADW will be called out and all lines from
the cutting layout will be displayed. Create the remnant by erasing the unnecessary lines, let us say
the correction of the lines into the remnant shape.
7.1.4.2 Interactive remnant
On the TLG panel in the "Remnant" tab there are the check boxes:
· "Follow the plate". If checked, then it enables to catch a corner or catch a point on the sides of the
plate or remnant
· "Paralell contour". If checked, then you can catch a first point on the plate side, then you can click
any number of corner points of the new remnant, and finally the ending second point of the remnant
on other side of the plate. SAPS will automatically create the remnant in such a way, that the two
points will lay on the remnant in counterclockwise position .
· "Follow the contour", it enables using of the lines in the parts of the layout, to build the sides of the
new remnant. The beginning and the ending point can you click as in the former description, in
between you can click to any two points on the appropriate parts in the layout. Remnant from a hole
can you create easily, by clicking one point of the hole.
During drawing the remnant can you draw lines with left click vertical or horizontal, with right click
slantwise.
7.1.4.3 Remnants cancel
On the REMNANT tab in TLG panel it is possible with the REMOVE button to erase any remnant from
the cutting layout.
7.1.4.4 Remnant separation
If an automatic creation of remnants and at the same time remnant separation are permitted on the
"Nestings" side in SAPSW setting, then SAPS will generate the scrap separation out of the remnant
plate into NC-program. The automatically created remnant and thereby the separation line as well can
be eventually arranged in SCADW, before the final creation of NC-program.
It is also possible to separate the remnant plate for an interactive created remnant plate.

102 SAPSproW v19
7.1.5 Max.window dimension for a nesting

The working area on the screen can be enlarged by checking the "Max.dimension" check box. If
unchecked, the area of the screen is divided between the VIEWER and the working area for a cutting
layout creation.
7.1.6 Zoom in
The zoom can be changed by a click at the screen buttons, or dynamically by pressing a particular
key and pulling the mouse.
1. Click a button of 0.2, 1, or 2 rate scale and click at the cutting layout in the place which should be
zoomed. SAPSW will display a cutting layout cut out in the chosen rate scale, the place where you
have clicked at will be shifted to the middle of the screen. If you want to look at another place of the
cutting layout, press the ESC key or click the "Max" button (the whole plate will be displayed) and
then at another place in the cutting layout. Working in this way you control the mouse with your right
hand and the ESC key with your left hand.
2. It is possible to zoom the cutting layout in the maximum size by clicking at "Max" with the left mouse
button. You can overdraw the cutting layout in the current zooming with by clicking at "Max" with the
right mouse button (the screen refresh).
3. By buttons with a magnifying glass picture:
· it is possible to choose the cut out of the cutting layout after clicking at button, you create the
window for the cut out with the mouse
· button will bring back the previous drawing rate scale (it can remember 10 last zooms)
· It is possible to watch the screen with the cutting layout or with NC-program like with help of a
magnifying glass after clicking at button.
Note:
-in you can set up for the first one that the button stays still in the pressed position and then it is
sufficient to click only at the cutting layout and shift successively in the cutting layout and zoom in
several places
-the cutting layout will zoom in the whole screen and will be overdrawn after pressing the ESC key
7.1.7 Shift of the table picture

You usually create a cutting layout and a technology while zooming in the window where only a
particular part of the cutting layout is displayed. If you want another part of the cutting layout to be
depicted, you can use some of the methods described at the change of zooming or you can use
dynamic shift of the picture with the mouse.
7.1.8 Choose a part or a group

Before parts addition, change of position, change of cutting heads etc. you must inform the program
which part or group you want to work with.
One part choice:

-if button for parts addition or change of position is pressed, then you will choose a part by
clicking at a line or into the colored area of the part. If the part is technologically connected to other
parts with a common edge cutting or with chain cutting, then all connected parts will be chosen.
-before a change of burners , before a change of geometry in SCADW etc. press the ALT key
and click at the needed part in the cutting layout

SAPSW 103
A group choice:
-you can choose it by pulling the window over the needed parts. The parts which lie restless in the
window will be chosen. Or...
-press the ALT key and choose successively particular parts into the group
Removal of a part from a group:

-press the ALT key and click at the part.
Removal of all parts from a group:

-press the ALT key and click in the cutting layout where there is no part.
In the chosen parts of the group the color of the ordinal number will turn yellow.
7.1.9 Dynamic zoom, shift

7.1.9.1 Dynamic zoom-in, shift
The mouse enables us to change the scale of drawing dynamically and to shift the cutting layout on the
screen. These functions can be carried out in SAPSW also in the course of inserting a new part or
moving an old part into a new position. In SCADW in the middle of drawing sections as well, e.g.at
drawing an abscissa it is possible to enter the starting point, zoom in and shift the drawing with help of
the mouse, and finally click the left button at the endpoint of the abscissa. It is possible to change the
scale and shift the cutting layout from the keyboard as well.
7.1.9.2 Dynamic shift
Use the cursor to show at any place, press CTRL and keep. Pull the mouse in one of the 4 directions. It
is not necessary to press the mouse button.
7.1.9.3 Dynamic zoom-in
Use the cursor to show at the place you want to zoom in, press SHIFT and keep. You will zoom in the
picture by moving the mouse to the right, you will zoom it out by moving the mouse to the left. It is not
necessary to press the mouse button.
7.1.10 Burners
7.1.10.1 Changes of cutting heads
The number and distance of parallel cutting heads can be anytime changed in accordance with your
needs, it is not important how many times and in which order the change was carried out. Burners can
be changed by clicking at the panel button over the cutting layout window. There are two possible kinds
of changes:
- the change of the number and/or the distance of cutting heads for the new parts of the cutting layout
- the change of the number and/or the distance of cutting heads for the parts of the cutting layout which
have been already inserted
- in the NC MACHINE / MECHANICS tab have You to select the number of the driven head (from the
machine's null point numbered)
- in the or window is possible to select the active cutting heads to cutting
- in cutting layouts with more heads is possible unrestricted change the number of heads, the active
heads and span of heads
- parts cutted with the driven head are on the cutting layout colored
- with the driven head cutted parts are on the cutting layout and on the NC program numbered
- in the on the CONTROL tab is possible to select, that SAPS report inconvenient span of heads
(when the positioning of heads is unnecessary)
- the numbers of active heads are listed out in the ECO printout (the driven head is with # character
labeled)
Remark:
SAPS at closing the window controls the convenience of selected number of cutting heads and the
distance. If no speed traverse line of machine start on an empty place in the cutting layout, then the

104 SAPSproW v19
machine operator need not change the distance of cutting heads, only switch on or off. Preferable
setting of cutting heads is e.g.:
4x 500 mm - 2x 1000 mm - 1 cutting head, or 6x 250 mm - 3x 500 mm - 2x 750 - 1 cutting head, and
so on...
7.1.10.2 Change for new parts
- before clicking at button make sure that no part in the cutting layout has the yellow ordinal
number
- click at button. SAPSW will limit the extent of enterable distance values to the minimum distance of
cutting heads, let´s say the width of the plate.
- select the active heads and the number and pitch of heads
Maximum number of cutting heads:

Click at the "Max.number" button. The distance will be determined according to the minimal distance of
cutting heads.
Interactive change:
Click at the needed number of cutting heads. You can change the distance for an asymmetric one by
the scroll bar. The distance can be exactly arranged in 1 mm steps with help of á or â keys. The
good position will be confirmed by pressing ENTER.
Symmetrical:
The distance will be changed into a symmetrical one, the number of cutting heads will not change.
7.1.10.3 Change for saved parts
- before clicking at button choose a part or a group (the chosen parts must have yellow ordinal
numbers)
- click at button. SAPSW will calculate the minimum possible distance of cutting heads for the one
chosen part or a group of parts and it will limit the extent of enterable distance values. When you have
chosen a group of parts, it will arrange the distances of individual parts to the value of the biggest
distance within the group.
- select the active heads and the number and pitch of heads
Maximum number of cutting heads:

Click at the "Max.number" button. The distance will be determined as the smallest possible distance
without collision.
Interactive change:
Click at the requested number of cutting heads. Choose the distance by the scroll bar. The distance
can be exactly arranged in 1 mm steps with help of á or â keys or by writing a numerical value into the
text box. You will confirm the good position by pressing ENTER.
Symmetrical:
The distance of parts or a group will be changed into a symmetrical one , the number of cutting heads
will not change.
7.1.11 Change of layout's data

-click at button over the cutting layout
-you can choose any item entered at a new cutting layout creation
-you can automatically make the plate dimensions smaller. Click at "X", "Y" or "X,Y". SAPSW will
calculate on the basis of the inserted parts the minimum possible dimensions of the plate in one or both
directions. If a part overreaches the original plate dimension, SAPSW on the contrary can enlarge the
new plate dimension.
-you can change the number of plates. SAPSW at the same time controls the needed number of parts
pieces and it allows an increase of plates only in the case that there is a sufficient number of parts
pieces available in the "Parts" table.

SAPSW 105
-finally click at "OK"
7.1.12 Save a layout and NC-program

There are 3 possible ways:
1. On the basic side click the button with the left mouse button. If it is set up like this in , then
the program will show the window for notes for the machine operator. You can create some notes,
erase old notes or change them. It is also possible to click at OK or OK+LINK buttons in the window.
These buttons work according to set-up and contents of the LINK window in the MACHINE table the
CONTROL tab.
2. Click the button with the right mouse button. SAPS will save the cutting layout and the NC
program too. Choosing this saving selection, You can not write a message for the machine operator.
3. In the "Nestings" menu click to the "Save one cutting layout". Choosing this saving selection, You
can not write a message for the machine operator.
Notes:
1. After a cutting layout saving or a cutting layout loading with a remnant, the remnant will be
automatically loaded after a click and it will be possible to make an interactive correction of the
remnant shape.
2. At a cutting layout saving the SAPS may automatically subtract the used number of plates from the
PLATES table for whole plates and from the REMNANTS table for remnant plates. Tables can be used
in this way even for the evidence of a plate reserve in-store.
3. The output of ECO-data into TXT or XLS files is carried out at the NC-program transfer into the LINK
directory, it means after a click at OK+LINK button in the "Notes for the machine operator" window,
or after a click with the right mouse button at icon for a cutting layout saving.
4. On clicking the OK+LINK button, the SAPS can create or modify a LOGFILE.TXT file. This file
contain the date, time, computer name, cutting layout name, and the ECO file name. You can specify
in the SAPS system settings in the ECO tab the directory name for the LOGFILE.TXT file.
7.1.13 Move a layout to other directory

It is possible to transfer in an automated way a cutting layout from one working directory into another
one, including all GEO parts which are situated in the cutting layout. SAPSW asks about the transfer of
GEO and PLA files at a working directory switch-over.
7.1.14 Move many layouts to other directory

It is possible to transfer in an automated way a group of cutting layouts from one working directory into
another one, including all GEO parts which are situated in the cutting layouts.
- switch off the control of the number of pieces on the basic side of SAPSW
- in the NESTINGS table select (double click or CTRL) lines of the cutting layouts which are to be
transferred
- click at the TRANSFER button
- click at the TEST button. SAPSW will create and display the list of parts and cutting layouts that have
been saved in the destination working directory under the same name. If you want these files to be
kept, then archive them because they would be overwritten at the transfer execution.
- click at CARRY OUT for the proper transfer of files
7.1.15 Technol-economic data

SAPSW automatically creates a summary text file (ECO-file) with all possible data about each cutting
layout and NC-program. These are mainly the data about:
· the sheet material plate
· appropriate kinds of parts
· the time use of NC-machine
· weights
· approximate cutting price

106 SAPSproW v19
-in the menu click at the "Nesting" menu, the "Techno-economic data" line. The data will be displayed
on the screen.
Note:
1. At the NC-program depiction it is possible to let even the contents of the ECO-file print out under the
cutting layout drawing, a detailed and exact production documentation arises from this.
2. The item following the "Setting of a cutting head" text in the print-out or ECO preview determines the
position of a cutting head in regard of the machine zero. In the drawing there is the cutting head
marked which the item refers to. (However the item with the position of the cutting head at the
beginning of the NC-program file is always set up in regard of the left lower corner of the plate,
regardless the chosen position of the machine zero.)
7.1.16 One step UnDo

Before each erasing of parts from a cutting layout, or a change of a part position, or a collective
change of technology (e.g. automatic lead-ins) SAPSW will save the actual state of the cutting layout
into its inner memory. In this way you can go back, after carrying out a change, in case of need, to the
previous state by clicking button on the basic side of SAPSW.
7.1.17 Groups in the VIEWER

Group of parts from a visible cutting layout can be saved to the VIEWER. Create the group by marking
the parts (yellow serial numbers) and click to the icon in the VIEWER. The name of groups begins
with XYZ. Do not use this name in SCADW for single parts.
You can interactively put the groups to various cutting layouts as one unit. SAPS can put the groups
automatically to the active visible layout ( button on the SAPSW main window). SAPS can put the
groups to many layouts in the multiply automatic nesting module ( button in the LAYOUTS table)
In the layouts will be present the lead-ins, transition, joint cuts,... originally used in the single parts. At
sorting the VIEWER, the groups comes first in the list. If the piece controlling switch is checked, the
SAPS controls the number of pieces of single parts in the group. The showing of the groups in the
VIEWER can be switched off
7.1.18 Insert a part

7.1.18.1 Insert a part into the layout
you usually insert parts from the basic working directory where you stayed in the beginning at the
cutting layout creation. You can switch the working directory over even in the course of the cutting
layout creation and in this way insert parts from any other directory. In this case the function of the
piece control cannot be switched on, SAPSW always controls numbers of pieces only in the basic
working directory.
-switch on/off the piece control
-in case of need choose another working directory
-insert the part from the VIEWER, or...
-choose from the drop-down list with the part names under the "WorkDir" drop-down list
-move the part like at the change of the part´s position.
-after moving the part into a suitable position confirm the part´s position .
7.1.18.2 Insert a part from the VIEWER
-click at the kind of GEO-file. In the VIEWER you can see only the parts which have a GEO-file and are
saved in the "Parts" databank
-click at the drawing of the part, the name of the chosen file will appear in the lower text box (text box
without title, under the "Label" text box)
-click at a depicted cutting layout, the particular chosen part will be situated into the cutting layout
Note:
A double click at the lower text box with the name of the chosen file will cancel the choice of the part
and "---" signs will appear in the text box.

SAPSW 107
7.1.18.3 Insert according to the name

Parts can be inserted into cutting layouts also according to their names, if SAPSW is set up like this.
The names are mentioned in the drop-down list under the "WorkDir" drop-down list, they are sorted in
the alphabetical order.
-click at the drop-down list button and click at the needed line. Or...
-click twice at the drop-down list text. Here is the name of the first or last clicked part according to the
alphabet.
7.1.18.4 Confirm the part´s position in the layout
1. Press the ENTER button, or...
2. Click the mouse if the cursor in the cutting layout has the "OK" button shape. It is approximately in
the middle of the moved part or the group of parts.
7.1.18.5 Correct a part of the layout
In SCADW there is possible to choose a part for correction with help of the VIEWER.
The second advantageous way can be used when the cutting layout where the part is situated can be
seen on the screen. Then it is possible to choose a part for correction (the order color will change to
the yellow one) and then to click at button. The SCADW window with the chosen part will appear.
The corrected part will automatically appear in the actual cutting layout and in all other cutting layouts
after closing the SCADW window after the part´s correction and saving the GEO-file of the part.
7.1.18.6 Use of material
The text box on the SAPSW basic side shows the actually achieved use of plate material in per cents
for the just active cutting layout.
7.1.19 Simpler handling

The moving or the duplicating of parts the most often used procedure by interactive nesting (the same
guilt for group of parts). SAPS can perform this in two ways. The faster but more difficult to learn mode,
and the slower but easier mode - more suitable for beginners with the SAPS.
For beginners:
In the "Shape" tab check the "Simpler handling" check box. In the main button bar of SAPS will show up
two button, the button will serve only for the moving of parts. For duplicating will serve the other
button, the .
Faster mode:
Don't check the "Simpler handling". In the main button bar will show up only the button. If you wish
to move, then click or drag the part with the right mouse button. If you wish to duplicate, then you have
to click or drag with the right mouse button.
7.1.20 Add a part

7.1.20.1 Add automatically
The same technology of cutting as in the original part will repeat in the added part. That is why it is
usually advantageous to carry out some technological changes of cutting in the original part or group of
parts before adding the part.
-click at button
-in the "Delta" text box there is possible to enter an distance in mm. If the text box is not empty, then the
resulting distance between the parts will be equal to the requested distance.
-it is possible to check the "Rotate by 180 deg" check box. Parts will be turned with regards to the
previous part by 180 degrees.
-choose a part or a group
-pull the mouse so that an arrow with the needed direction of cutting would be created in the cutting
layout. If you wrap the arrow, the addition will be carried out at first in one direction into a column or a
line, and then this column or line will be added in the other direction. If you move away by more than
20 mm from the centre of the part or group at pulling the arrow, the addition takes place at the
backstops to the edge of the plate or to other parts. Otherwise the addition will take place only once.

108 SAPSproW v19
Visually these 20 states are distinguished like this: there is a double arrow at the multiplied addition.
-click with the right mouse button
7.1.20.2 Add interactively
-click at button
-pull the copy of the part or group with the right mouse button (a mouse click in any point on the plate
- keep pressed - move the mouse). As soon as the copy appears in the cutting layout, you can make
all position changes with it like at the position change of parts in a cutting layout
-confirm the position in the cutting layout
7.1.20.3 Add in a column/line of parts
In the case of a big number of parts it is often advantageous to cut parts situated exactly next to each
other or over each other, connected in chain cutting. Such a cutting layout can be easily created, the
use of material is good and the number of necessary lead-ins will be minimal.
7.1.20.4 Optimalization
SAPSW is able to calculate the best location of parts with the outer round contour (circle, flange and so
on) so that the biggest possible number of parts was situated in an rectangular area:
-insert one round part (there can be already other parts in the cutting layout)
-click at button
-check "Circles"
-pull a selecting rectangle with the mouse. The rectangle can be pulled partly outside the plate, only the
area within the plate will be applied. The part can be but needn´t be in the rectangle. The rectangle can
be even over the whole plate. An optimal cutting layout like this will arise:
7.1.21 Change the position of the part

7.1.21.1 Change the position
-click at button
Then you can:
· pull
· mirror
· turn
· shift to the stop
· shift a step further
The part or the group can be positioned analytically straight in face of:
· The edge of the plate
· A corner of the plate
· Any point of another part

SAPSW 109
7.1.21.2 Control of the last head

At the position change of a part with several cutting heads there is a collision control of all cut parts in
parallel with the edges of the plate as well as the collision with other parts in the cutting layout. If the
cutting heads are laid out in unsymmetrical way because of the maximum use of NC machine, the last
cutting head may partly move outside the plate. In this case it is necessary to check the "Without last"
check box and SAPSW then does not control the collision of the last cutting head.
7.1.21.3 Enlarge distances automatically
- it is possible to enlarge the distances between parts automatically by clicking at -in the heading of
the cutting layout. In the case there is a narrow stripe of unused plate left on the right or upper edge
of the plate for which there are not so small parts (up to 100 mm), then it is possible and good
because of technological reasons to enlarge the distances to the highest possible value.
- if you click at with the right mouse button, then you can choose the direction of distance
enlargement and divide the cutting layout to stripes with selectable width. With a good selection of
width can the number of collisions of parts decrease.
- SAPS after enlarging the distances automatically calls the OK? function, to verify the collision of parts
in the new positions
7.1.21.4 Reduce distances automatically
You can reduce with the icon the distances of selected (parts with yellow running number), or
every part in direction of the NC machine's zero point (left bottom, or left upper corner on the cutting
layout). SAPS processes the parts in the cutting sequence. The reducing cycle executes more times,
until it can not any more reduce the distances. SAPS after every 5 seconds shows the actually position
of parts on the cutting layout. Cycle can be interrupted with ESC. You can change before the start of
distance reducing the value of the starting global distance between the parts with click to icon.
7.1.21.5 Types of changes
7.1.21.5.1 Pull a part
If the left button is pressed, you can pull a part. If you want the collision to be controlled even in the
course of pulling a part, then check the "Int.control" check box. However it usually only delays.
7.1.21.5.2 Mirror a part
You can mirror a part with the middle button of a three-button mouse. If you have a two-button mouse,
you can mirror by clicking at button.
7.1.21.5.3 Turn up a part
A part or a group of parts can be fluently turned up around the centre of a enclosed rectangle. Choose
a part or a group, remove the mouse cursor for a sufficient distance from the centre point so as the
cursor stays in the arrow shape, press the right mouse button, keep pressed and move the mouse.
You can turn up within exactly 90 degrees with the space key, or turning by one step.
It is possible to turn up within exactly 0,90,180,270 degrees compared with the previous valid position of
the part or of the group on the cutting layout with 1,2,3 and 4 keys.
7.1.21.5.4 Turn up by one step
In the "Angle" drop-down list click the step of the angle. Click at "+" or "-".
7.1.21.5.5 Shift to the stop
The collision distance is set up in the STANDARD table as a distance between parts. For specific kinds
of common edge cuttings it is possible to set up the collision distance with help of the check box as a
width of the kerf.
-in the "Step" drop-down list, if it is not chosen, click at the "Aut" line
-you can check one or both check boxes for the control of the lead-ins collision, the control of the
contours collision is switched on automatically
-with help of the mouse pull the arrow from the centre of the part or the group in the needed direction
and click

110 SAPSproW v19
7.1.21.5.6 Shift by one step

-click at the size of the step in the "Step" drop-down list
-you can check one or both check boxes for the control of the lead-ins collision, the control of the
contours collision is switched on automatically.
-with help of the mouse pull the arrow from the centre of the part or the group in the needed direction
and click
7.1.21.6 Analytically exact position of parts
7.1.21.6.1 Shift exactly to the corner of the plate
You can shift the part which has been situated in the cutting layout. You cannot use this way to shift it
exactly while choosing from the VIEWER.
-click at button
-check the "Exactly" check box
-choose a part or a group of parts. From this moment on the mouse cursor will change into a round
shape if the cursor occurs in a point where you can click. Otherwise the cursor has an arrow shape.
-click at a suitable endpoint in the chosen part or group
-write the needed distances of the endpoint from the corner of the plate into DX and DY text box
-click at the corner of the plate
7.1.21.6.2 Shift exactly to the edge of the plate
You can shift the part which has been situated in the cutting layout. You cannot use this way to shift
-click at button
-check the "Exactly" check box
-click at a suitable endpoint in the part or group
-write the needed distances of the endpoint from the edge of the plate into DX and Dy text box
-click at the edge of the plate
7.1.21.6.3 Shift exactly to another part
You can shift the part which has been situated in the cutting layout. You cannot use this way to shift
-click at button
-check the "Exactly" check box.
-click at the endpoint in the part or group
-write the needed distances of the endpoint from the edge of the plate into DX and DY text box
-click at the endpoint in the other part (which you want to shift the first part/group to).
7.1.22 From a layout to another layout

7.1.22.1 Transfer a part or a group
The needed two cutting layouts must be visible on the screen. The cutting layout dimensions, the
number of plates and the number in case of need the distance of used cutting heads can be different.
The piece control can be switched on/off according to your needs.
-if you want to keep the part or group in the first cutting layout, click at button. If you want to erase
it, click at .
-click inside the destination cutting layout. The part will appear in the cutting layout and it is possible to
make the position change .

SAPSW 111
7.1.23 Erase parts

7.1.23.1 Erase parts
-click at button
7.1.23.2 Erase the last part
Click at button
7.1.23.3 Erase by ordinal number
-click at button
-write in the ordinal numbers in the interval from - to and press ENTER, or...
-write in the beginning ordinal number and click the "End" button (erasing from the entered to the last
part in the cutting layout)
7.1.24 Work with layouts in the table

7.1.24.1 Select a line of the layout
Three possible ways:
A. By searching out cutting layouts
B. By a double click
C. By pressing the CTRL key
- on the basic side click at button and the "Nestings" tab
- double click the line in the table or press CTRL. The line will be marked with a red rectangle and the
controller move onto the next line.
- a double click at a selected line of the cutting layout or CTRL will erase the selection
7.1.24.2 Search out layouts
In the main menu in the "Nestings" menu click at the "Search out cutting layouts" line, or press the F7
key.
Search of layouts, witch contain a particular part:

- choose searching by name or drawing number and write the GEO-file name or the drawing number
into the text box (it is possible to write an uncompleted name with an asterisk in the end). In the text
box there may be present more part names. In this case the divider character is the ";". You can as
an option click the "Today's" button, it fills the text box with the today created parts.
Searching out cutting layouts created this day (today´s cutting layouts):
- choose "...acc.to the date, today's"
Refreshing the NESTINGS table:

- choose "All existing PLA files". SAPSW will search out all cutting layout files of the PLA type (in case
of need it is possible to check also "Search for all machines" and "Search in all directories") in the
actual working directory, and it will insert partly filled-in lines into the NESTINGS table and it will select
them. It is possible to complete it with missing data by a successive recalling of all cutting layouts with
help of the "List". Cutting layouts needn´t be saved, just close them immediately after their depiction.
Finally click the "OK" button. SAPSW will mark - select the searched out cutting layout lines with a red
rectangle at the beginning of the line and it will create a text file with the NOTESxxx.TXT name in the C:
\SAPSPROW\_TMP directory. The file can be loaded with help of the F8 key or from the Programs
menu, the NOTEPAD choice.
7.1.24.3 Create a list
Layouts can let be searched out even for a group of parts. SAPSW will make a list of cutting layouts
including every part which has the entered label.
-in the "Nestings" menu in the main menu click at the "Search out cutting layouts" line, or press the F7

112 SAPSproW v19
key
-choose "label of parts". Write the label of parts, whose cutting layouts you are searching into the text
box.
-it is possible to write ":" sign and a comment that will appear on the first line of the list into the text box,
next to the label, e.g.(label is KZO): KZO:Send the list to NETW-K
-the list will be saved in the _TMP directory, in the text file with the NOTESxxx.TXT name, where xxx is
the ordinal number. It is possible to recall it from the menu, with icon, or with F8.
7.1.24.4 Count of parts
In the NESTINGS table there is a button to create a list of the number of pieces. In the list there will
appear pieces of parts from the cutting layouts whose lines are selected in the NESTINGS table (the red
sign in the cutting layout line). The list can be recalled from the menu, with icon, or with F8.
7.1.24.5 Erase layouts from the table
-on the basic side click at and click at "Nestings"
-check the "Corrections" check box
-with button it is possible to erase all depicted cutting layout lines at once
-with button it is possible to erase the cutting layout line where the cursor is situated. If the "Disk
files" is checked, even the proper cutting layout file of PLA type will be erased.
-lines of several cutting layouts and files can be erased also in another way
7.1.24.6 Erase layouts with files
-on the basic side click at button and at the "Nestings" tab
-select the cutting layouts you want to erase
-click at button. SAPSW will erase for the selected cutting layouts:
· particular data lines in the "Nestings" and "Parts" tables
· cutting layouts in the PLA directory in the working directory
· the GEO-files in the GEO directory which are situated in the selected cutting layouts
· finished NC-programs in the NCP directory
7.2 TLG tab - technology of cutting

7.2.1 Lead-ins
7.2.1.1 Lead-ins
-at constructing parts in SCADW program it is possible to draw lead-ins on the contour and even in the
holes of a part, but it is not usually necessary and it is not advantageous.
-at a cutting layout creation it is impossible to insert lead-ins into the contours where the lead-ins were
created by SCADW program
-the dimension (length, radius) of the lead-in is determined according to the thickness of the plate in the
STANDARD databank. But the dimension can be changed even before or in the course of the lead-in
creation, in the "L" text box
-lead-ins can be connected to any point or also inside the part´s section
-with the "OK?" button it is possible to make a control of the position of all lead-ins
-all lead-ins in the cutting layout (except the lead-in of the common edge cutting and the lead-in from
SCADW) can be canceled by button
7.2.1.2 Cancel a lead-in
-click at button, the "Lead-ins" tab (possible to cancel also in the "Cancel" tab)
-click at button and the particular contour where the lead-in is situated
-all lead-ins of all parts in the cutting layout can be canceled at once by button

SAPSW 113
7.2.1.3 Automatic lead-ins

7.2.1.3.1 Setting aut.lead-ins
The way of automatic lead-ins creation can be set up in SAPSW setting in the "Lead in/Lead out/
Chain" tab in the "Aut.lead-ins" frame. SAPSW will connect the lead-in to the place which is the nearest
possible to the pressed point.
Next it is possible to check the "Lead-in into small holes" check box. If it is checked, SAPSW at the
automatic lead-ins creation, after clicking the "AUT" button. It will pull the lead-in for the maximum
possible length like this:
L = "hole diameter" -"kerf" - "hole in piercing point"/2
If you don´t check the check box, another "Aut." button will appear on the - Lead-ins panel and
after clicking here it will create lead-ins in the same way as the previous one. Lead-ins into small holes
are created only for the holes of these shapes: circle, square, rectangle and slot (for slots that were
created in SCADW).
1. If you click at and check the "Tang" check box, all lead-ins created by SAPSW will at the
endpoints of the parts in the arrow direction or in the direction of the arc tangent.
2. If you don´t check the "Tang" check box, SAPSW will try to locate the lead-in:
-at the endpoint in the section direction
-if it is impossible, then at the endpoint vertically on the abscissa or the arc tangent
-if it is impossible and the "In section" check box is checked, then successively vertically at
several inner points of each abscissa or arc
All lead-ins in the cutting layout (except the lead-in of the common edge cutting) can be canceled by
the button.
7.2.1.3.2 Automatic lead-ins
-click at button
-click at the "Lead-ins" tab
-click at the button with the requested shape of lead-in , , , or
-click at "AUT." or "Aut."
Note:
If it is not possible to create a lead-in on a contour automatically, SAPSW will mark this contour with a
cross. If more lead-ins are missing, you can try another setting aut.lead-ins,or you can also try
lead-in. This one usually needs less space than the other ones but it has specific limitations. The
missing lead-ins can be also created interactively.
7.2.1.4 Interactive lead-ins
7.2.1.4.1 Abscissa lead-ins
- click at button
- click at the "Lead-ins" tab
- if you want an abscissa lead-in from several abscissas (max.5), choose a suitable drawing scale. It is
not necessary to change the scale for a lead-in in the shape of one abscissa or a flash.
- click at . Before the creation and anytime in the course of lead-in creation it is possible to change

114 SAPSproW v19
the requested length of lead-in in the "L" text box.

- with right click can You draw orthogonal partial lines of a lead-in. In the same lead-in can be straight
and slant lines too.
1. An abscissa lead-in in any direction

-the "Tang" check box must not be checked
-click at any place of the part contour where the lead-in should be connected. The total necessary
length of the lead-in will be displayed. With the mouse movement the whole lead-in length rotates. If you
click:
· outside the displayed lead-in length, the displayed lead-in will be created
· inside the displayed length, the lead-in will be wrapped and the new lead-in abscissa can be turned
into another angle. Go on till a click outside the displayed lead-in length
· you can click the third part of the lead-in shorter than the standard length entered in the "Standard"
table. Also the second one if you click twice at the same place at the lead-in creation.
2. An abscissa lead-in in the first section direction

-check "Tang"
-click at the endpoint of the abscissa on the contour where the lead-in should be connected. The total
necessary length of lead-in will be displayed, with the mouse movement the whole lead-in length
changes. If you click:
· outside the displayed lead-in length (the cursor cannot be neither over nor under the abscissa),
the displayed lead-in will be created
· inside the displayed length (or over or under), the lead-in will be wrapped and the new lead-in
abscissa can be turned into another angle. Go on till a click outside the displayed lead-in length.
The first (or another) lead-in section will be held in the first section direction.
7.2.1.4.2 Arc lead-ins
-click at button
-click at a button for lead-ins with an arc. lead-in can be used for all part´s contours, even inside a
section. lead-in usually needs less space but it can be used only for outer contours and at the
endpoints of parts. After its creation it is necessary to make a visual control of the position of this kind
of lead-in.
-click at any place and any section of the part (except the prenominate lead-in )
-apart from the length of the abscissa part it is possible to change in the text box also the standard
radius of the arc lead-in part. SAPSW will calculate the standard radius on the basis of the length of
the abscissa part (it is set up in the STANDARD table according to the thickness of material),
R="abscissa length"/Pi. The radius is always bigger than the actual kerf.
7.2.1.4.3 Flash - lead-in for plasma
-click at button
-click at
-click at any place of the part´s contour where the lead-in should be connected. A lead-in in the flash
shape will be displayed. It turns with the mouse movement.
-click at a suitable place
Note:
The lead-in is used for cutting with plasma. The sum of lengths of lead-in segments is equal to the length
entered in the STANDARD databank, the lead-in height (distance from the first to the last points) is
equal to the length of the lead-in x the value in the "Flash - lead-in" text box in (the value should be
>0 and <1).

SAPSW 115
7.2.1.4.4 Lead-ins for thick sheets

7.2.1.4.4.1 Lead-ins for thick plates
-click at button
-check "In the kerf"
-click at
-click at the contour of the part where the lead-in should be connected
-similar to the "Abscissa lead-in" it is possible to lead the lead-in into max. 5 abscissas. At the last lead-
in section click at an already cut contour of a part. It does not matter if the lead-in does not reach the
cut contour before the click, SAPSW will lengthen the lead-in for the exact size. (The place of click
should be outside the endpoint of the displayed lead-in, otherwise SAPSW will only wraps the lead-in,
like at abscissa lead-ins)
Note:
The program will calculate the "lead-in" point so that it is on the edge of the kerf of the previous part cut
contour. In this way it is not necessary to lead in the material with an increased gas pressure, it saves
the jets and time. It is technologically similar to rough-drilling holes for a lead-in. For the first cut part on
the plate, where it is not possible to use this kind of lead-in, we can use the lock - lead-in.
7.2.1.4.4.2 Lead-in with a triangle
lead-in can be created in the same way as lead-in. But in addition SAPSW will create a small
triangle and it will connect the lead-in outside the part contours to this triangle. It forecloses the
possibility of influencing the cut by a jet gust, mainly at thick plates. It is necessary to cut off the
remnants of the triangle after cutting the part.
7.2.1.4.4.3 Lock - profile
Parts with big thicknesses which do not have holes can be well cut with help of the "lock - lead-in" from
plate edges, by starting in the area outside the plate. The lock can be drawn in SCADW program as a
profile from several section, for example in shape. The lock sides are approximately 20 mm long and
serves as a prevention against outstretching of the plate material.
The process of NC-program creation is as follows:
- lay down the part into the needed exact position with regards to the plate edges or to the plate corner
- in the part create an abscissae kind of help lead-in. Direct the lead-in to the real endpoint of the part,
it is not possible to connect a lock in the middle of sections. The angle oft the lead in is important, the
angle of the lead out is in the middle of lead-in and the first cutted contour section in the part.
- the lock - profile should be situated so that the endpoint of the lock blends with the connection point of
the helping lead-in (there should be zeros in DX and DY text boxes)
- if necessary change the cutting direction of the lock
- change the cutting sequence, right after the lock has to come the part
Example:
Lock - profile advantages to Lock - transfer:

- it is possible to use on parts with bridges
Lock - profile disadvantages to Lock - transfer:
- more complicated positioning
- it is not possible to use on parts with holes
Notes:
At shifting a part with a connected lock-profile only the proper part will shift and the original helping

116 SAPSproW v19
lead-in will appear on it. The lock - profile will stay in the original place.
7.2.1.4.4.4 Lock - transfer
With help of the chain cutting it is possible to cut even the outer contour of a part with holes. Draw the
"lock" as a current part, only miss one side, and connect the contour with the "interruption" line . Save
the lock to GEO file under a name, which start with "LOCK", e.g. LOCK-80. In this case the surface and
weight of the part will be zero a the part will be not inserted in the ECO list. After putting the lock on the
cutting layout, choose the direction of cutting and connect the lead-in to the "interruption". Lead the
chain cutting to the needed part from the same point (the line will then jump to the place where it should
be).
Example:
Lock - chain advantages towards Lock - profile:

- easier to create
- it is possible to use on parts with holes
Lock - transfer disadvantages towards Lock - profile:
- it is not possible to use on parts with bridges
7.2.1.4.4.5 "Redrill" for advance
At cutting thick plates often is it necessary to redrill the plate in positions of lead-in starting points.
Instead of redrilling there can be cut (setting on the NC MACHINE, LEAD-IN/LEAD-..., INITIAL
OVERFIRE, CUT LEAD-IN CIRCLES) an auxiliary hole with a short lead-in there. This hole will be
created on every position, where the lead-ins in the cutting layout consists minimal from 2 segments.
If You are using also lead-ins which start at the plate edges, then create these lead-ins consisting only
from 1 line.
7.2.1.4.4.6 "Overfire" for advance

Generally exists some lead-ins, which can start on the same position in the plate. At thick plates so can
be reduced the wear-out of heads. In addition, if in the NC MACHINE, LEAD-IN/LEAD-OUT/CHAIN
CUTTING tab the INITIAL OVERFIRE is enabled, then only the really requested number of overfires (or
boreholes) will be created. E.g. if in the cutting layout there are 5 parts with 5 lead-ins, of it 3 has lead-
ins beginning on the same place in the plate, then the created number of overfires will be 3.
The lead-ins which has to start from the same place should You create interactively. You need not click
exactly the lead-in starting point (overfiring point), SAPS computes the exact place. To end the lead-in
line, double click on the requested place on the cutting layout.
If the INITIAL OVERFIRE is enabled, then in the TLG window left from the lead-in selection buttons a
new check box will be visible. With this check box You can for every new lead-in selectively determine,
if the lead-in should be pre overfired resp. boreholled, or not. So it can be selected, e.g. at lead-ins
which start at sides of plate, that no initial overfire (borehole) will be created. At lead-ins, which start in
kerf of previously cutted parts, no initial overfire (borehole) will be created, regardless of the state of the
selection check box.

SAPSW 117
7.2.2 Chain cutting

7.2.2.1 Interactive chain cutting
- click at button
- click at the "Chains" tab
- click at
- click in the previous part (where the chain will come from) at the point where a lead-in is connected to
this part
- at the chain there is possible to click at maximal 4 other points outside the contours of all parts
- finally click at a suitable place of the part to which the chain is directed. If there is a lead-in with a
triangle somewhere on the contour, a triangle will be created and the chain will be led at the top of
the triangle. If there isn´t the lead-in, or there is a kind without triangle, a triangle will not be created at
the chain.
- with right click can You draw orthogonal partial lines of a chain cutting. In the same chain cutting can
be used straight and slant lines too.
Note:
1. The direction of cutting and the lead-in of part are necessary to be chosen so that in case of
autogen cutting the cutting couldn´t be interrupted owing to the total crossing of lead-in kerfs with
the chain cutting, eventually crossing of chain cuttings (a partial crossing till approximately the kerf
half is possible and advantageous).
2. The check box PULL THE CHAIN facilitate the drawing of chain cutting. SAPS pulls the chain
cutting's first segment to the lead-in in the previous part.
7.2.2.2 Automatic chain cutting
-click at button
-create lead-ins of outer contours of the parts you want to join by chain cutting. SAPSW will connect
the automatic chain cutting to the connection point of created lead-ins in the parts, let us say if you
create lead-ins, the chain cutting will be directed to the top of the triangle.
-click at the "Chains" tab
-click at the "Aut." kind of lead-ins
-pull the window to appoint the parts which should contain the chain cutting
The chain cutting will be created at the parts which:

· are situated restlessly in the created window, parts needn´t be of the same kind
· have a lead-in, lead-ins needn´t be in the endpoint
· parts are connected in the upward order, meanwhile the order needn´t be coherent, e.g. the
3,4,15,16,23 parts can be chosen.
the program does not change the direction of cutting at automatic lead-ins
Note:
The original lead-in will be replaced with a lead-in consisting from two abscissae. At the other parts will
be the lead-ins replaced by the chain cutting. The interactive lead-outs will be replaced as well. The
chain cutting has a defined shape and it always consists of 3 sections. The angle of the side lines in the
chain cutting and the size can be set up in .
7.2.2.3 Chain in a column/line of parts
In the case of a big number of parts it is often advantageous to cut parts situated next exactly to each
other or over each other, connected by chain cutting. Such a cutting layout can be easily created, the
use of material is good and the number of necessary lead-ins is minimal.
There are 2 possibilities:

A. The same part is repeated in a column/line
- insert a part (1st) which should be repeated
- add another (2nd) part into such a position in which it should be situated in the column/line. The
position of the 1st and 2nd parts will determine the distance between parts and the direction for

118 SAPSproW v19
unsquashing.
- change the technology of cutting in the 1st part according to your needs
- lead a chain cutting from the 1st part to the 2nd part
B. A group of parts (they can be of different kind) is repeated in a column/line

- created the 1st group of parts which should be repeated
- add the 1st part from the group into such a position in which it should be situated after unsquashing
in the 2nd group of parts. The position of the 1st parts from the 1st group and the position of this
added part will determine the distance of arising groups and the direction for unsquashing.
- change the technology of cutting in the group according to your needs (common edge cutting,
stitches, chain cutting, direction…)
- lead the chain cutting from the last part of the 1st group to the added part
- click the "Column/line" button. If the parts were selected (yellow serial numbers), then the new parts
will unfold automatically.
- if were not selected, then pull a selection window over the parts
7.2.2.4 "Tree" chain cutting
"Connect 2+1" button
It serves for the connection of parts by chain cutting. SAPSW will after clicking the button automatically:
- change the lead-in shape into angled in the first part, from 2 abscissas
- connect with a straight line the connection points in the penultimate and the last part of the cutting
layout
- add a new part in the cutting layout and it will connect it with the previous part by an angled line
- change the directions of cutting and it will highlight all 3 parts (with yellow ordinal numbers)
So for connecting parts:

- insert 2 parts next to each other or over each other, they can be of different kind
- connect both lead-ins, only the place of connection is important, neither the shape nor the kind of
lead-in are important
- click "Connect 2+1"
For the complete creation of the part tree, connected by chain cutting, we only need to:
-click "Column/line"
Example:
a. The basic parts position
b. After clicking of "Connect 2+1"
c. After clicking of "Column/line"
"Connect 4+1" button

It has a similar function as the "Connect 2+1" button, it is advantageous for parts of a triangle shape.
Example:
a. The basic parts position
b. After clicking at "Connect 4+1"
c. After clicking at "Column/line"

SAPSW 119
7.2.2.5 Chain cutting in a hole

Standard chain cuttings connect outer contours of several parts. Holes of all connected parts are cut
first and finally the chained outer contours are cut. In the case of a big part which contains one or more
smaller parts in its hole, we can save the lead-in for the hole.
Example:
7.2.3 Direction of cutting

- click at button
- click at the "Direction" tab
1. Change of the cutting direction of one part

- click at any section of the needed part
2. Change of the cutting direction of several parts

- click at the kind of change (change with regards to the original direction, set up the direction of cutting
counterclockwise or set it up clockwise)
- click at button for the change of holes
- click at button for the change of contours
- click at button for the change of contours and holes
- pull the window
Note:
If "?" is set up in the "Direction of cutting..." drop-down list in the STANDARD databank, then in the
course of the interactive creation of a chain cutting SAPSW can automatically change the direction of
cutting so that there would not be a crossing of cuts.
7.2.4 Stitch
- click at button
- click at the "Stitch" tab
- click at a button to select the kind of stitches. By the stitch you can change the sides height.
- click at the contour of the part
Notes:
- stitches can be also inserted into holes
- stitches can be inserted too into the common edge of parts with common edge cutting (they will be cut
without sides)
- you can, but don´t have to, create a lead-in in contours where you will use the stitches. If you do not
insert a lead-in, the machine will start cutting from the first inserted stitch.

120 SAPSproW v19
- if there is not a lead-in on the contour, SAPSW will automatically locate a 10-mm long lead-in in the
middle of the first inserted stitch in the direction of the stitch sides. This lead-in will not be created into
NC-program, it only serves to mark the first stitch for drawing on the screen.
- if you locate any kind of lead-in interactively somewhere inside another stitch, cutting will start from
this stitch and the lead-in will not be cut.
- some stitches (the "Zero" stitch ) can have different, adjustable heights of edges even in the same
part
- with help of button you can erase one particular stitch, with button you will erase all stitches
in one particular contour
7.2.5 Bridges
7.2.5.1 Bridge
A group of parts can be connected by a bridge which will connect particular parts into one unit after
cutting. This type of bridge can be used for example
· for small parts which could fall through the NC-machine desk and get lost after individual cutting
· to reduce the number of lead-ins, if it is not possible to use chain cutting among parts because of
space reasons
· when the spacing of parts on the plate does not enable to choose a suitable lead-in point and a
direction of cutting (providing that the part will not be shifted at the end of cutting, the aim is to
choose always such a direction when the part is held at finishing cutting by the maximum possible
area of the not-yet cut plate)
For a bridge creation:
-click at a point in the section of the part where the bridge will start
-click at a point in the section of the part where the bridge will finish. In all parts where the bridge line is
situated there will be bridges. The original order of parts in the cutting layout is not important, SAPSW
will determine the order automatically. The direction of cutting will be determined according to the first
part in the bridge.
-you can continue with a new bridge from the last part of the bridge to another part. You will use this if it
is not possible to go through all needed parts with one straight bridge line.
7.2.5.2 Bridge for a cut-off
You can create this type of bridge in the same way as a common bridge. Unlike the common bridge the
parts will not stay connected after cutting, so the main advantage is a reduction of lead-ins number. The
distance of bridge sides must be chosen on the basis of the thickness of material approximately as a
kerf width : 2. The chosen distance value must not be too big, because then the cut could cross and in
the case of oxyfuel cutting the material separation could stop. It must not be too small either, because
then the bridge could stay uncut and parts would stay connected.
Note:
If you choose right distance values, the bridge lines will cross on the screen. As the NC-machine makes
a kerf compensation at cutting, the real routes do not cross, they only overlap partly.
7.2.5.3 Bridge by one line
It is similar to the cut-off bridge, it only starts in corners of parts. It connects a group of parts next to or
over one another, you should click the starting bridge point in the first part of the group and the
endpoint in the last part of the group. With this type of bridge you can connect the side of the parts
which is made of only one abscissa.
7.2.5.4 Bridge between circles
The SAPS can automatically connect with bridges any number of parts which has their outer contours
in form of circles. Select on the TLG panel the BRIDGE tab. The button creates such bridges,
which remains after the cutting and holds together the parts (it is convenient at tiny parts).
The button can be used at plasma cutting, the bridges disappears after the cutting. In the left text
box can you set the greatest distance between the parts, which shall be connected with bridges. In the
right text box can you set the maximal number of parts, which can be connected together. The number
may not be to high, while the parts in process of cutting moves a little themselves.

SAPSW 121
7.2.6 Lead-outs
7.2.6.1 Automatic lead-out
A lead-out is created by SAPSW automatically on each joint contour of parts, except the outer contour
of the 2nd part of the common edge cutting. In that case You should switch on the AFTER COMMON
EDGE CUTTING switch on the setup tab NC MACHINE, LEAD IN/LEAD OUT. If a lead-out is necessary
at the 2nd part of the common edge cutting, You can create it interactively too.
A lead-out is not visible at drawing a cutting layout until NC-program is depicted. In the "Standard"
databank there is possible to enter the lead-out values separately for outer contour and for holes. It is
also possible to enter a zero value, in this case the lead-out in the hole will not be created.
The lead-out can be:

-an arc, a minus value is written into the STANDARD table as the arc radius
-an abscissa, a plus value is written into the STANDARD table as the abscissa length
Notes:
-an arc - lead-out is created on the contour only in the case when the lead-in is directed into the section
(except the endpoints of the part)
-the lead-out in the hole can be lengthened by a short route in an already cut contour
-the lead-out can be lengthened by a short route in the outer contour too
7.2.6.2 Interactive lead-out
-click at button
-click at the "Lead-out" tab
-click at any line of the part
-by moving the mouse set up the lead-out length and angle and click
Notes:
An interactive lead-out can be created on the outer contour of a part. In the case of a common edge
cutting it is not important at which part you will click, the lead-out will be always created in the final
cutting point of the 2nd part of the common edge cutting.
7.2.7 Common edge cutting

-click at button
-click at the "Common edge" tab
-select the type of common edge cutting with a click to , ,… . In the first type of common
edge cutting is the common edge cutted without kerf compensation and the parts are not shifted with
regards to one another. At the other kinds the common edge is cut with the same compensation as the
first part and the parts are shifted by several mm with regards to one another. For the last button you
can set up the shift size of the other part.
-if the first cut part of the common edge cutting has a higher ordinal number in the cutting layout than
the second cut part, check "Order 2-1" (the change of order compared with the actual state in the
cutting layout)
-click at the common edge of both parts, except the endpoints of the edge
-click at one of the endpoints of the common edge (on yellow cross).
Note:
The second part does not have to be located in the exact position and rotation angle compared with the
first part. Nevertheless after clicking at the common edge both edges must be in the mouse cursor
circle (it is also valid for both first points at clicking at the endpoint).
7.2.8 Cancel the technology of cutting

-click at button
-click at the "Cancel" tab
-stitches and lead-ins will be canceled only in the contour (i.e. only in the hole or on the contour) where
you will click
-chain cutting will be canceled in the group of parts joint by the chain beginning with the part at which

122 SAPSproW v19
you have clicked. The chain will be canceled till the end of the group.
-all technology of one parts can be canceled with the button
-all technology of all parts in the cutting layout can be canceled with button
7.2.9 Cutting order

7.2.9.1 Cutting order
The real cutting order of parts can be determined automatically or interactively. The automatic modes of
order determination will state successive cutting order from the parts with the highest number of cutting
heads to the parts with the lowest number of cutting heads. Interactively you can determine any cutting
order.
7.2.9.2 Automatic cutting order
At the automatic cutting order determination SAPSW will divide the cutting layout into a particular
number of strips in the X axis direction. In these strips it successively determines the cutting order of
parts. It is possible to choose various kinds of automatic determination of order in .
-click at button
-click at the "Order" tab
-if you want SAPSW not to change the parts order in a particular interval of ordinal numbers, check
"Right order from-to" and write the ordinal number of the first and last part that are in the right order
into the text box.
-click at , the first part will be located by turns up or down according to the position of the last part in
the previous strip
-or click at , the first part in the strip will be always down
7.2.9.3 Interactive cutting order
-click at button
-if you want SAPSW not to change the parts order in the particular interval of ordinal numbers, check
"Right order from-to" and write the ordinal number of the first and last part that are in the right order
into the text box.
-click at button if it is not pressed
-click at the other part in order. If you click at any part in the "Right order from-to" interval, all needed
from-to parts will join. It does not matter if you click at a part which has been clicked, the order will not
change.
-it is possible to cancel the order in an already-clicked part so that you click once more at the part while
keeping the ALT key pressed
-the order entering will stop automatically after the last part. It is possible to stop clicking earlier by
pressing the ESC key.
7.2.9.4 Cutting order in a window
-click at button
-click at button
-create a window to limit the space in which the parts order will be changed.
7.2.9.5 Holes cutting order
-click at button
-click at button, SAPSW will depict changes of holes cutting order in the whole cutting layout
-click at the part in which you want to change the order
-click at a point in the hole which you want to cut as the following in order. If the hole order has been
changed, the change of order will be canceled.

SAPSW 123
7.2.10 Cut scrap

The "Cut scrap" tab enables to define the lines for the scrap firing. There can be more dividing lines,
they can be also angled. Click the beginning of the line at the edge of the plate or on the contour of a
part, in a similar way end the line. The line will be shortened or lengthened based on the values in
settings on the "Control2" tab.
If You click the first point on one side of the plate and the endpoint on the opposite side of plate, then
SAPS compute every intersection with every between laying part and create the appropriate number of
dividing lines.
If you wish create a cut-up line which ends in the plate, then click 2x in the endposition of that line.
The plate may be cutted also in stripes with the "X x Y" button. Lines can be erased individually or at
once.
7.2.11 Stop/No cutting

Stop:
Sometimes it is advantageous when the NC-machine interrupts cutting and stops. SAPSW creates such
a programmed stop automatically if the following part should be cut by a different number of cutting
heads or if the cutting head distance is different.
You can stop interactively the machine after cutting an arbitrary part. Switch to the TLG, STOP tab and
click on the part. You can erase the stop with a repeated click. On the cutting layout the part with a stop
has expanded serial number with the "-S" characters.
At every place, even in the middle of a part cutting, there you can enter the stop in the window by a
editing directly the NC program.
No cutting:
With this selection you may temporarily disable the output of some parts into the NC program. The
change will be performed only in the NC program, the layout, the count of layed parts, the ECO listing,
will remain in the same condition as they are after a normal way of programming and cutting.
With "Cut every" button the output of every part will be permitted again. The "Change condition"
changes the disabled parts in the layout to enabled parts which will be output to the NC program, and on
the contrary.
7.3 Technologie řezání

7.3.1 Change of the curf compensation
The right compensation of the kerf is automatically chosen by SAPSW. You can interactively enter only
the compensation at profiles.
-click at button
-if you also want to follow the NC-program, check the "NC-prog" check box
-click some of these buttons , , for the requested compensation
-click at a section of the profile. The compensation will be changed in NC-program (the NCP type file)
and in the cutting layout (the PLA type file).
Note:
If "NC-prog" is checked, apart from the change of compensation SAPSW will also seek through the
NC-program text file and it will highlight the found place (it will write a line with =signs over the searched
line).
7.3.2 Change of the cutting speed

The standard cutting speed can be set up in NC-program. An NC-machine tender can then change this
speed on the machine control unit panel in particular limits. According to technological demands for
exactness and quality of edges you can set up the cutting speed in SAPSW even according to the
concrete cut geometry of parts.

124 SAPSproW v19

NC-programs are usually created with a switched-on kerf compensation. The compensation creation
and switching over into the needed direction is automatically carried out by SAPSW according to the
geometrical shape of particular parts and the real direction of cutting. In the case of NC-program in the
DIN format you can choose among 5 different sizes of compensation according to the technological
needs and the geometrical shape of the contours. In the case of NC-program in the ESSI format there
is only one compensation and its size is a 1/2 of the kerf from the STANDARD table.
If it is technologically advantageous, it is possible to switch off the automatic compensation creation for
some parts.
7.3.4 Marking by cutting

It is often advantageous to mark in parts e.g. points for small holes rough-drilling, or points for
connection of welded constructions etc. If the NC-machine does not have a marking equipment,
marking can be simulated by a specific parameters setting for the lead-in.
Follow this technique:

-in SAPSW in the "Machine" table, "Mechanics", "Marker" set up "by cutting"
-on the "Control" tab, "NCP-file" set up "Mark in advance" and "Stop after marking".
-draw marking points at the needed places into the parts in the common way
The working process will be as follows:

-the machine tender will set up marking parameters on the control unit (e.g. for the exact plasma HD-
3070 typically 10A current and 0,1sec lead-in time)
-NC-program is started. It will carry out marking of points from all parts of the cutting layout and the
machine will stop.
-the tender will change parameters for real cutting and NC-machine will continue.
7.3.5 Shortening of last segment

Sometimes the cutting quality may be better, if the last cutted contour segment is shortened before
cutting the led-out. This shortening can be set in the "Lead-in/lead-out/chain cutting" tab in the
"Elongation,..." text boxes. At setting a negative number to the text box, the SAPS will create not
elongation of the last line, but shortening. At cutting on plasma, sometimes the best cutting quality may
be achieved with last line shortening, arched lead-in and arched lead-out.
7.3.6 Automatic common edge cuttings

SAPSW is able to create multiple common edge cuttings automatically. SAPSW will determine the
information about whether to cut or not according to the position of particular parts in the cutting layout,
the order of cutting, the position of lead-ins and the direction of cutting.
Click at the icon. Click the "kerf" (shift at the distance of the kerf). Multiply the part or the group in
the needed direction, or change mutual distances between the part exactly at the distance of the kerf.
Add lead-ins interactively, the cutting direction will be determined by the SAPS self. Check the resulting
NC program visually, some part of the component contour can stay uncut if the lead-in point or the
direction of the cutting are set not appropriate.
Example:
Firstly we inserted the parts No.1 and 2, then multiplied the group 1-2 in the X direction, added lead-ins.

SAPSW 125
The common edge cutting arose in NC program automatically:
In the next case we leave out the part No.3 from the previous cutting layout, the common edge cuttings
will change automatically and this NC-program will arise:
Another example:
The parts No.2÷4 were shifted to the part No.1. And here is a group of parts No.1÷4 with common edge
cuttings.
Another example:
At automatically created common edge cuttings is usually possible to have such a direction of cutting,
which ensures vertical edges without bevel even for the plasma cutting (in the case of ordinary
common edge cuttings in form of "eight shape" there are the edges of one of the components bevelled).

126 SAPSproW v19
7.4 Controls, measurements

7.4.1 Collision control
-the part contours control for collision is switched on automatically after clicking button at the
automatic shift of a part
-after checking the "Act.lead-in test" check box, the program also asks for the lead-in control of a
moving part with regards to the contours of already saved parts
-after checking the "Saved lead-ins test" check box, the program also asks for the control of lead-ins
and chain cuttings of already saved parts with regards to the contour, eventually also the lead-in, of a
moving part
-it is possible to control the collision even in the course of interactive pulling of a part, by checking the
"Int.control" check box. It is suitable only for quick computers, otherwise the pulling of more difficult
parts will get much slower. At pulling a part the lead-ins are controlled according to the state of check
boxes.
Note 1:
At saving the setting on a disk drive even the actual state of the "Act.lead-in test" and "Saved lead-ins
test" check boxes is automatically saved together with other settings.
Note 2:
In a completed cutting layout there is possible to control the collision as a control of lead-ins.
7.4.2 Check of torch collision

SAPS can test the path of rapid transfer over the already cutted out parts. If there is a part with
"dangerous" dimensions which could tumble out from the plate, then this part could theoretically cause
the collision with the crossing torch.
To test the transfer paths, check the "Torch collision" box in the machine dependant settings on the
"Mechanics" tab. SAPS will afterwards show on the button panel the new "Tilt?" button.
This test works only with NC programs in ESSI format, or in NC programech in ISO/DIN format for NC
machines VANAD B&R, PIERCE-ISO, FANUC1, PTV-MC.
7.4.3 Piece control

If you create at once more cutting layouts with a bigger number of various parts, with a different
number of cutting heads, eventually a different number of plates, then the control of the number of
parts is really tiring. The NC-machine programmer can get rid of this with the automatic piece control.
-if you cannot see the "Piece control" check box, set up the main window of the program and check the

SAPSW 127
"More" check box

-check "Piece control"
-you can see on the screen which parts with a switched-on piece control are inserted into the cutting
layout. Their ordinal numbers are underlined.
Notes:
In the line in window, the "Parts" tab, there are 2 numbers of pieces for each part:
· "Num" - total requested number
· "Act" - actual number, of not-saved-yet parts in the cutting layouts on the disk drive. In this number
there are not parts in the cutting layout on the screen.
In the VIEWER there are also 2 numbers of pieces (if it is set up like this):
· not layed parts, not saved yet in cutting layouts to the disk drive neither in the cutting layout on the
screen. At the moment of saving the cutting layout on the disk drive the "Act" value in "Parts" will
change into this "not layed parts" number. On the other hand if the cutting layout is not saved, this
number in the VIEWER will come bigger, but "Act" will not change.
· the same value as in "Num" in "Parts"
7.4.4 Control of the geometry change

At loading each cutting layout SAPSW controls the time and date of the part creation with regards to the
time and date of the cutting layout. If the part is newer than the cutting layout, it will remove all
technological changes of cutting from the part on the cutting layout. The part on the cutting layout will
appear in the position like at the first insert from the VIEWER. New changes of cutting technology can
be entered interactively according to your needs.
7.4.5 Measurement in the plan

Display the main window of the program and click the "InfoXY" button. In the cutting layout or in NC-
program there is possible to measure exactly with the InfoXY button, for example the distances of
parallel abscissa or the circle diameter or the arc radius. It is also possible to click the arc centre and
the edges or corners of a plate.
Coordinates of a point in the cutting layout:
- click at a point in the cutting layout. SAPSW will write out the absolute coordinates of the mouse
cursor in the cutting layout. If a endpoint of a part section is situated in the cursor, SAPSW will beep
and display analytically exact coordinates of this endpoint.
Distance in the cutting layout:
- click at the point from which you measure the distance. SAPSW will depict a cross and the point
coordinates. After another click SAPSW will write out the distance between the first and the second
clicked points and the coordinates of the second point.
Radius of arc:
- on the cutting layout as in the NC program too is possible to inspect the value of radius. Click to the
arc (into the arc, not to endpoints)
7.4.6 Measurement in NC-program

Click at button. The technique is similar to the one in the measurement in the cutting layout.
7.4.7 GEO-file name of a part

At measurement in the cutting layout the name of the part GEO-file will appear in the first line of the
window. It is also possible to let depict the GEO-file name into each part of the cutting layout.
7.4.8 Number and distance of burners

If one or more parts have a yellow number and you click button, then you can see the number and
distance of cutting heads in mm for the control purposes. At the same time SAPSW will calculate the
minimum possible distance of cutting heads at cutting the "yellow" parts and it will set up this value as
the lower limit into the scroll bar.

128 SAPSproW v19
7.4.9 Collision contour round a part

If a part has a yellow number and you click the INFOXY button with the right mouse button, you can
see a parallel contour round the outer part contour in the distance of the distance of parts. It can be
good for the control of the collision distance or for fine positioning of a part.
7.4.10 Verification of finished layouts

-click at the "OK?" button on the SAPSW basic side
-the program makes a control of the collision of the parallel contour round the lead-in or chain cutting
of one part with regards to other parts. At the collision the parallel contour will be depicted and the
beginning of the bad lead-in will be marked. The first section in the chain cutting which is connected to
the previous part is not controlled.
-it also makes a control of the mutual collision of parts. At the collision state the first collision part in the
order will change its color.
-clicking the left mouse button makes a control of collisions, lead-ins and chain cuttings to the requested
distance among parts. Clicking the right button to the distance of a kerf.
Note:
SAPSW automatically after the NC-program depiction marks all contours with a missing lead-in with a
cross, "OK?" does not make this control.
7.5 NC programs
7.5.1 NC-programs
Click at button in the main window of the program. SAPSW will create and save NC-program on the
disk drive (the NCP type file). The saved NC-program will load and depict presently.
Note:
For archiving it is sufficient to save files from the GEO and PLA directories. NC-program will be created
automatically from the PLA and GEO types files after loading the cutting layout into SAPSW program.
7.5.2 Measure in NC-program

The way of measurement is equal to the one at cutting layouts.
7.5.3 Searching in NC-program

-click at button
-check the "NC-window" check box
- , , buttons for the change of compensation should not be pressed
-click at a section in the NC-program picture. SAPSW will search NC-program through and it will insert
an identification line with the ordinal number of the searched line into the window over the searched
line. In this way SAPSW will make the NC-program editing much easier.
7.5.4 Draw NC-program

-click at button
-After checking the "Cont" button (only contours) only that track of the machine is drawn during which
the real cutting is going on
-after checking the (CutCrf) check box a circle around the lead-in point and the proper kerf at cutting
are drawn
-with button you can draw at an adjustable speed. The speed can be set up in the text box or by
pressing the arrow keys, a lower value draws in a slower way. The maximum speed is in this mode
drawn at the value 5.
-in the course of slow drawing you can stop drawing anytime by another click at . The slow NC-
program depiction can be stopped and started again by any key.
-with button the cutting layout will be depicted at once, at the maximum possible speed

SAPSW 129
7.5.5 Production weight

In the settings of the print window on the ECO tab there is the "Prod.weight" switch. You can select with
this switch the mode of computing the production weight of parts:
1. Divide the scrap to various parts based on their real weight. SAPS will compute the production weight
as: the real weight + proportional fraction of scrap, based of the proportion of real weights of parts. This
algorythm is disadvantageous to parts in shape of rectangle to flanges (extrem example, when a big
rectangle is layed and many flanges)
2. Divide the scrap to various parts based on the weight of their circumscribed rectangle. The rectangle
is computed from the layout positions of parts on the plate (which takes in account also the rotation of
parts), and at end will be computed the average rectangle for every sort of part in the layout. From the
weight of the average rectangles then will be computed the production weights.
3. The production weight will be computed from the real weight, but without the holes in the parts (as it
were parts without holes at all).
7.5.6 Preview before print

Before printing the cutting layout you can display a preview of the layout drawing and the ECO.
-click for one preview, or for depiction of several selected layouts in the "Nestings" table
Note:
In the LOKALIZ.TXT file you can set up the way of ECO print. We recommend to change the file only
for experts, while after a not adequate modifying of the file the SAPS may not start.
The meaning of characters:
@...bold
~...underline
|...columns separator
#...grid drawing, 1st sign of the line with the columns width [mm]
7.5.7 Print an NC-program

- click button on the main window
- if you want to print the cutting layout ECO-data after the cutting layout, check the "Eco-data" check
box
- check "JPG/PNG" if you want to let create a not compressed JPEG or PNG formatted file with NC-
program drawing, including ECO-data. JPEG or PNG files are saved in the actual working directory in
the JPG directory and they are created after clicking at a button for preview drawing or print of
drawings.
- click at a suitable drawing scale. After clicking at "Maximal" SAPSW will calculate the scale so that the
cutting layout gets just within the width of paper.
- it is possible to write the maximum permitted height of the drawing into the "Max.height" text box
- in the ISO9013 drop-down list there is possible to choose among texts which will be printed below the
cutting layout name. According to your needs introduce the texts into the ISO9013.TXT file in C:
\SAPSproW directory. In one file line there can be more text files, the separation character is "|". The
maximum number of signs in 1 file line is 255.
- after pressing it is possible to choose the text contents in the line below the cutting layout, the
"Note for a cutter" print, the height of the text can be set up, even other information for drawing.
- click to print one program or to print more programs, or...
- click at the "DXF" button to export the drawing into file in DXF format
Note:
It is not possible to interrupt print directly in SAPSW. Before print it is advantageous to install a printer
from the Control panel into the lower panel of active WINDOWS programs. In case of need it is then
possible to interrupt or cancel printing.
7.5.8 Print more NC-programs

The list of programs ready to be printed can be prepared in several ways:
A. Before clicking :

130 SAPSproW v19
- select with a double click or CTRL the cutting layouts in the "Nestings" table, or...
- search out the cutting layouts with a particular part with help of F7 or from the "Nestings" menu by the
"Search out cutting layouts" choice
- click
- if the "Today´s cutting layouts" check box is checked, uncheck it
- click button and OK.
B. In window for print:

- click button
- it is possible to check the "Today´s cutting layouts" check box, the list of today´s programs will appear,
or ...
- it is possible to erase the window, the list of cutting layouts selected in the "Nestings" databank will
appear
- click the OK button
7.5.9 Import NC-programs

NC-programs created in another program system can be overtaken into SAPSproW. SAPS can create
every necessary file in the SAPS system in the process of importing. You can use and change in the
imported cutting layout every feature of SAPS. You start the import with a left click to the IMPORT
button in the window. With a right click to the IMPORT button You call up a popup menu. You can
select:
a. Only NC program. It import only the text to draw the NC program or to edit it in a text window.
b. As in a., but for every file in the IMPORT directory
c. Import and create every SAPS file (parts - GEO files, cutting layout - PLA file, new data in tables
and in the VIEWER)
d. As in c., but for every file in the IMPORT directory
The name of the new cutting layout is the same as of the original NC program file. Only in the case that
the filename already exists, the filename will be widened with an X character. It is possible to import NC
programs in ESSI and in ISO/DIN format. The new cutting layout will have imported mirroring, lead-ins,
stitches, common edge cuttings, chain cuttings. A group of parts with a bridge will be imported as a
single part. A couple of parts with a common edge cutting, if the length of the common segment has not
the same length, will be imported as a single part.
It is possible set up the import method on the NC MACHINE, IMPORT tab.
7.5.10 Edit NC-programs

NC-programs created in SAPSproW don´t have to be anyhow corrected. In an extraordinary case (e.g.
after the import of NC-program from another program system, or after creation of a specific NC-
machine test) it is possible to edit the NC-program. SAPSproW makes editing much easier because it
will search out the requested lines for the program correction. SAPSW will also carry out a formal
control of the interactively changed NC-program.
Editing process:
-after the NC-program depiction check the "NC-window" check box and search out the line for
correction. You can arrange the width of the window by pulling it, SAPSW will remember the value.
-carry out the correction in the text window. After the first program change the button with an arrow in
the window heading will loosen
-click at the button, the changed program will be saved on the disk drive and at the same time it will be
depicted on the screen
7.5.11 Transfer NC-programs into NC-machine

7.5.11.1 Insert into the LINK directory
SAPSproW insures transfer of NC-programs into the specific LINK directory (the LINK directory name
and the NC-program name extension can be set up). The proper transfer into the control unit of the NC-
machine will be carried out from the LINK directory with help of DNC, TRANS, LapLink, the floppy

SAPSW 131
disc…and so on, outside the SAPSproW program system.
The transfer into the LINK directory can be made in 3 ways:

1.
-click at with the left mouse button. If SAPSW is set up like this, you will see a window where you
can click the OK+link button which will transfer the active NC-program into LINK.
2.
-click at icon with the right mouse button
3.
-click at button
-click at the "Nestings" tab
-select the cutting layouts
-click at LINK and "Insert the NC-program..."
After the proper transfer SAPSW can also start your specific command file.
7.5.11.2 Load from the LINK directory
For echo check of an earlier created NC-program it is possible to load NC-program from the LINK
directory back into SAPSW.
-click at button
-click at the "Nestings" tab
-click at LINK and "Load NC prog..."
-choose NC-program from the drop-down list by a double click
7.6 Ending of SAPS

- at ending of SAPS the program verifies, if through the net works some computer with a cutting layout
with that computer. If yes, then SAPS reports the cutting layoutname and the computer name and
warn the user not to switch off his computer.
- SAPS remembers the last filter set-ups in the PLATES, PARTS, REMNANTS tables. At a new start
SAPS shows the old filter set-ups

SCADW
Chapter
VIII
SCADW 133
8 SCADW
8.1 Program control
8.1.1 Drawing scale
It is possible to change it with buttons, or you can write just the needed drawing scale into the "Scale"
window. The "1" and"0.1" scale buttons stay in buttoned position. It enables a comfortable detail viewing
of parts if you service the mouse with your right hand (you click at the needed place on the screen) and
you press the ESC button with your left hand (it displays the whole part again).
A comfortable way of zoom-in is a dynamic zoom-in with the mouse. Use the cursor to show the place
you want to zoom in, press SHIFT or ALT and keep pressed. You will zoom in the picture by moving the
mouse to the right, you will zoom it out by moving the mouse to the left. It is not necessary to press the
mouse button.
8.1.2 Change the centre of drawing

After SCADW invoking the standard drawing scale is to be set up and the zero of the system of
coordinates will be depicted in the lower left corner }adjustable in ). If you want to draw capital -X
and -Y coordinates and you do not want to change the drawing scale, it is useful to shift the center of
depiction.
-click at "Change" in the menu
-click at the first and second points in any suitable place of the screen. The center of depiction will be
shifted by the coordinates difference of the clicked points.
A comfortable way of depiction change is a dynamic shift with the mouse. Use the cursor to show any
place, press CTRL and keep pressed. Pull the mouse in one of the four directions. It is not necessary to
press the mouse button.
8.1.3 Stepping in construction

In the course of construction there is possible to make an arbitrary number of steps back and
further (UnDo and ReDo).
The system state for stepping is displayed by "N-<>-M" window. It is:

· N, the number of all drawn or erased sections
· <>, the current construction step in the system
· M, the number of memorized construction steps
Note:
You can get rid of the erased sections by a double click at "N-<>-M" window. This usually makes some
space for drawing other valid sections (maximum number of sections is 5,000). At the same time the
memorized sections are reset.
8.1.4 Snap of points

It is possible to use the mouse for handling the endpoints of abscissae, arcs, centers and crossing
points of any 2 sections (there needn´t be a point, this is the difference from the points of intersections,
created by button). The handled point can be used anywhere, e.g. for an abscissa, arc etc.
drawing. The mouse cursor changes dynamically when you show the final and the center points ( ),
or the point of several sections crossing ( ), or the center of an abscissa or an arc ( ). The
cursor then shifts (jumps) into the exact position. If there are more points or crossings in the cursor
surroundings, then SCADW always chooses the points which is the nearest to the current cursor point
(fingertip). It is possible to forbid the change of the cursor.
If you use the cursor to show one section outside its endpoints, then the section will change its color. It
is possible to choose a color or to forbid the change of the color.

134 SAPSproW v19
8.1.5 Selection of contour segments

8.1.5.1 One section choice
While designing a part in SCADW program you often need to inform the program which section you
want to carry out an operation with. If you click at the section and the program finds out that the mouse
cursor is situated in several sections, it will start to offer these sections (it will depict them one after
another in the red color). If you click:
· within the red section, the operation will be carried out with this section, irrespective whether there
is another section under the cursor (black colored)
· outside the red section, then the program will offer (depict in the red color) another section
· if you do not click any of the offered sections, then the operation will not be carried out and the
button for the operation invoking will be set up into the unpressed position.
The program uses this way e.g. for section erasing, section division into more parts and so on.
8.1.5.2 More sections choice
With some commands there is possible to carry out an operation at once with a group of sections, e.g.a
shift or a rotation . The sections can be chosen in three ways:
· Individually. Click at the particular sections you need and after the last one click at an empty
place of the screen.
· By a window. Pull the window where all the needed sections are situated. The sections which are
restlessly situated in the window will be chosen.
· A whole closed contour. click twice at a section in the needed contour, except its endpoints.
8.1.6 Erasing
8.1.6.1 Erasing sections
-click at , , , button for the choice of lines (to erase points click at ), only the chosen kind of lines is
always erased
-click at button for erasing
-use the left button to click at any place of the line in the needed section, or...
-if the section is crossed with other sections, then use the right mouse button. It is possible to cut off an
overlapping section part in this way or cut out a part of a section between two crossing points. It is not
necessary to create real points of intersection with icon. Or...
-pull the window. If the other corner of the window is to the right of the starting corner, SCADW will
erase all sections lying restlessly in the window. If the other corner is to the left of the starting corner,
SCADW will erase all sections lying restlessly or even only partly in the window.
-the button is functioning contrary as the . It erases that lines (the texts too), which are NOT
selected with the selection window. This button is useful e.g. at erasing all at once the unneeded parts
from an imported complex DXF drawing.
Note:
1.If you want to erase the last drawn section, the fastest way is to use button for a step back in
construction.
2.If you want to erase all sections of one kind, the fastest way is to press "All".
3.If you want to erase just one section, and several sections are situated under the mouse cursor, then
the program will depict the first section in red color and it asks for showing the section once again (it
is possible to point at any part of the red section). If you do not appoint this firstly offered section, the
program will offer you all sections lying previously under the mouse cursor step by step.
4.If you erase everything from the screen with the ALL button by mistake, the picture can be refreshed
from the VIEWER, the RESTORE.VYK file.
8.1.6.2 Erasing dimension lines
-click at button
-click at the black dot at the end of the dimension line.

SCADW 135
-it is also possible to erase all dimension lines at once. Click at button and then the "All" button.
8.1.6.3 Erasing a text
-click at button
-click at the dot on the left over the beginning of the text.
-it is also possible to erase all texts at once. Click at button and then the "All" button.
8.1.7 Cutting without waste (COPY)

The parts which exactly fit into each other (e.g. concentric circles or cylindrical knee unfolds in air
conditioning, but also concentric parts of generally all shapes) can be cut without waste of material.
Construct the parts in one GEO-file and interrupt other inner contours except the biggest and smallest
ones. The interruption can be as big as approximately a half of the kerf. SAPSW will create an NC-
program so that at first inner contours without the kerf compensation are cut and then the smallest inner
contour with compensation and at last the outer contour also with a particular compensation.
8.2 Read and import of files

8.2.1 Loading a file from the VIEWER
-click at GEO, DXF, VYK, ZBY or MKR in the VIEWER
-click at the part picture, let´s say the drawing
Note:
There can be data necessary for saving into GEO format in DXF/DWG file. For example information in
AUTOCAD can be created with the TEXT command, the text string must be in the form:
SAPSPROW: number_of the drawing thickness quality number note
The order of information in the chain is important, the particular items are divided by at least one gap.
There cannot be any gaps in the middle of the particular data (except the note). Some data in the
direction from the right end can be missing, you can state e.g. only the drawing number, or the drawing
number, thickness and quality and so on.
At the output into GEO file format the SCADW will get the data from the text string and put them into the
text boxes of the saving window. There can be the data inspected and corrected if needed, still before
creating the data line in the PARTS table.
An example of the string:
SAPSPROW: RK-120C 12 11353.1 140 Spare part YAMOTO
8.2.2 Loading a detail from the VIEWER

-click at DTL in the VIEWER
-click at the detail picture
-in the part click at the point where the zero point of the detail should be situated (the red point in the
VIEWER)
-click at the other point, the join of the first and second points will determine the rotation angle of the
detail. If you do not want to rotate the detail, then click twice at the first point.
Note:
If the position of the detail in the part needn´t be analytically exact at inserting from the VIEWER (e.g.
inserting a specific type of lead-in as a detail). then it is not necessary to create a point in the part in
advance. It will be created automatically in the point of the click.
8.2.3 Loading a macro from the VIEWER

In the VIEWER there is possible to call out macro pictures and insert a macro into SCADW, like GEO,
DTL, VYK... files. It is necessary to click the MKR button after completing the numeric value of
parameters.
There are some optional parameters at MKR4,5,8 macros. These windows have a different, adjustable
color. If the data is not entered into the windows, only ENTER or TAB are clicked, then the voluntary
window disappears. It is not necessary to click the MKR button at the end of entering the data, the part

136 SAPSproW v19
is created after the last click of ENTER or TAB.
Remark:
The user can himself extend the set of usable macros.
8.2.4 Loading an external drawing

The DXF or DWG files can be loaded from any directory after checking the "External drawings" check
box, irrespective the thickness or quality of material.
After clicking a drawing name in the selection box, SCADW shows the preview of the drawing. The
preview shows every entity in the drawing, as painting, dimensions, text attributes and so on.
Working with the preview:
· The preview will be shown with right click in the working area of SCADW, magnified to the whole
area.
· Left click into the preview window magnifies the surroundings of the clicked position in the preview,
magnified by value which is set in the selection box on the left side.
If you change the magnification in the working area (e.g. with the mouse roller), then the importing
window disappears. You can open it again with right click to the "External drawings".
Import of the drawing, phase 1:

SCADW will import the drawings in 2 phases. With ENTER or double click or "Imp." button the drawing
will be imported and the layers, colors, line types will be presented. So it is possible to check the
appropriate layers, colors and line types, which should remain in the cutting part.
Import of the drawing, phase 2:

The final importing will be made by closing the importing window. On the screen there remains only that
colors and that line types, which are defined and possible for the selected NC cutting machine.
If there are still some other lines, which are not desired in the drawing, then they should be removed
before saving the part as GEO file.
Group import of drawings:

It is possible to import all DXF-files from one directory at once with the button. Using this mode of
import you cannot change the order of holes at saving into GEO, the order will be determined
automatically. The part data can be entered continuously in the window, or they can be entered straight
in DXF-file in the TEXT command
8.3 First row of buttons

8.3.1 Straight line from an angle
-click
-write in the angle value. If the angle value is relative, let´s say the destination angle is a sum of another
straight line/abscissa angle and the write-in value, then click at a needed relative straight line/abscissa.
-click at the point, or write in the coordinates of the point, which the straight line should go through
8.3.2 Abscissa from an angle

-click
-write in the value of the angle and the length of the abscissa. If the angle value is relative, let´s say the
destination angle should be a sum of another straight line/abscissa angle and the written value, then
click at a needed relative straight line/abscissa.
-click at the starting point, or write in the coordinates of the abscissa starting point
8.3.3 Abscissa, open polygon

Apart from the current section drawing it is possible to use the mouse for drawing abscissae and
open polygon under the right angle with adjustable exactness, tick "Orthogonally". It is possible to set
up whether to draw in the X or Y directions according to the mouse-pull direction in the surroundings of
the abscissa starting point. It is possible to enter the endpoint coordinate from the keyboard (if you

SCADW 137
enter it in relative coordinates, then the sign is important), or to click any existing point. Only one
particular coordinate of the clicked point will be used.
8.3.4 Duplication
You can duplicate any portion of the drawing along a straight line, or along an arc. The selection of the
lines can be made:
1. With single clicking
2. With a selection rectangle, only that lines will be selected, which totally lay in the rectangle
3. With double click to a continuous contour. Attention, click somewhere to the middle of a line in the
contour, not to an endpoint.
Duplicating along a straight line:

- click the
- type the number of duplications
- select the lines
- click two points, or type two pairs of coordinates. That will set the step of duplicating.
Duplicating along an arc:

- click the
- type the angle of duplicating
- type the number of duplications
- select the lines
- click an appropriate point or type the coordinates of the duplication centerpoint
Remark:
It has meaning, by which mouse button click you. You can see the difference on the following picture:
8.3.5 Shift of sections

- click at
- choose the sections you want to shift
- choose the first and second point for the shift or...
- it is possible to shift exactly the chosen sections towards the X or Y coordinates by clicking at or
.
8.3.6 Open polygons

-the open polygon is created by entering/clicking a series of points.
-the line is finished:
· by another click in the endpoint of the last section (a double click of the last section)
· by choosing another command from the menu
· by pressing another button for a direct choice

138 SAPSproW v19
8.3.7 Mirroring
For mirroring you can select the lines with single click, or with a selection rectangle. If by single click,
then after the last line click to a free place on the screen. Afterwards click a straight line - the axis of
mirroring (or click 2 endpoints). It has meaning, by which mouse button click you. The difference can
you see on the picture.
8.3.8 Point of intersection

The point of intersection can be constructed in two ways:
A.By clicking at particular sections

-click
-click at the part of the first section where it should be retained (the place where the sections are
crossing and a point of intersections will arise later divides the first and second sections into 2 parts)
-click at the part of the second section which should be retained
-SCADW will calculate the point of intersection which will divide the previous 2 sections into 4. Then it
will erase those parts which you didn´t click at the identification of sections.
-the calculation of the intersection points of arcs or of an arc and an abscissa can be applied for the
sections that do not cross as well. Both sections will accordingly lengthen then, let´s say redundant
parts will be removed. The point of intersection will be created on the side where it is nearer to the
clicked point at clicking the first section.
B.By clicking at the crossing point of two sections

-click at
-click at the point of crossing. 4 sections will arise and all will stay on the screen.
Note:
If a different type of line is chosen ( , ,...) from the type of lines you point to, then the sections will not
be divided, but a helping point or a marking point will be created there.
8.3.9 Extension to the point of intersection

With help of the button you can also lengthen particular sections. If
2 sections of any kind...
1. DO NOT CROSS:
-after a click at the first section and then at the second one the sections will lengthen till the point of
intersection. All parts of the sections (2 or 3) will stay on the screen.
2. CROSS:
-after a click at the crossing point a point of intersection will be created. All parts of the sections (4) will
stay on the screen.
-after a click at the first section and then at the second one a point of intersection will be created and
only 2 parts of the sections (those you clicked) will stay on the screen.
8.3.10 Corner chamfer

The chamfer will be created by function. You can click directly the needed corner, or alternately (or
if the corner does not exists yet) click to the first and afterwards to the second contour segment.
SCADW can chamfer more corners at once, if you check the MORE check box. The chamfering will

SCADW 139
continue from the selected first corner, until the corner where the chamfer can not be constructed
anymore. This group chamfering will be provided only for corners created from two abscissas.
8.3.11 Corner cut-out

It is possible to choose the "Corner cut-out" function in the arc shape by button. If a minus radius is
entered, you will cut out a different shape, suitable for bended parts.
8.3.12 Corner cut-off

Cutting off contiguous sections will be carried out after clicking at and at the corner of the part. It is
also possible to cut off the corner of two crossing abscissae whose top is not created by individual
clicking at the first and second sections. Those parts of the sections you have clicked will stay on the
screen.
8.3.13 Corner refresh (COPY)

The corner will disappear after using the function for a corner fillet. For a check or a part
dimensioning the corner can be easily refreshed with help of the intersection point function (at first
click , then the button of helping "yellow" lines, then click at the first section and then at the second
one). The created corner needn´t be erased before saving into GEO or VYK.
8.3.14 Tangent under an angle

-click at
-write in the tangent angle
A.
-click at an arc, 1 tangent straight line will arise
-if you need only one half line, then click at the part of the straight line. If you need a whole straight line,
click outside the straight line.
B.
-click at a circle, 2 tangent straight lines will arise
-if you need only one half line, then click at the needed part of one the straight lines. If you need two
half lines, then click outside both straight lines. Those half lines lying on the side where you clicked
(with regard to the join of the straight line tangent points) will remain on the screen.
8.3.15 Tangential arc

- click
- enter the fillet radius
- if you tick the "Erase" check box, then SCADW will erase unneeded section after the fillet creation
- click any combination of sections or points where it is possible to link a tangent arc. For example 2
arcs. a point and a circle, a circle and an abscissa etc.
If you use e.g. the or commands for construction of tangent sections, then the program will
depict all possibilities in red color and it is possible to choose one of them. It is similar to erasing some
already drawn objects.
8.3.16 Axis, vertical line

An axis and a vertical line can be constructed not only for an abscissa, but also for a virtual join
of 2 points. The points can also be entered by the point of two lines crossing.
8.4 Second row of buttons

8.4.1 Point
-click at for drawing the marking point (center-punch or powder machine). For drawing the marking
point it is possible to click any other buttons , ,
-click at

140 SAPSproW v19
-write in the coordinates or click at an existing point on the screen
8.4.2 Extension/shortening of abscissae

-click at
-write a plus value in mm for abscissas extension into the window, or a minus one for shortening
-click at the endpoint of the abscissa from which the extension or shortening should be applied, or...
-click at an abscissa nearer to the endpoint from which the extension or shortening should be applied
8.4.3 Drawing of curves

We speak about interpolation, when the curve pass through nodes, and about approximation, when they
do not. We can use three sorts of curves with the button:
· arcs, interpolation. The B-SPLINE switch has to be switched off.
· B-spline, approximation. You have to switch the B-SPLINE on, THROUGH NODES off.
· B-spline, interpolation. You have to switch on both the B-SPLINE and THROUGH NODES.
The node coordinates can you interactively input (the last node two times, or click), or read in as a file.
The filename is xxx.APR, it has to be in the APR directory. The file can you prepare outer SAPS's, or
interactively input the nodes and afterward save as a file with the button. SCADW draw the new
line as cutting linetype, and the original polygon as help linetype. The helping lines can you erase
before the input to GEO file, but you need not to do it. The number of new computed nodes is
specified as the whole length of the polygon divided with the value in the STEP.
Remark:
The first interpolation method create arcs and they pass exactly through nodes of the open polygon.
There are always two arcs between two nodes. It is not advantageous to enter the nodes close,
because then a lot of points arise and unwanted inflexions can occur. In window in the
"Technology" bookmark there is possible to set up the deviation for leaving out close nodes of the
polygon. For example the 2nd node of the trio is left out if it has a bigger distance from the join of the
1st and 2nd points of the trio than the entered item. The minimum number of entered nodes of the
polygon is 4.
8.4.4 Plasma arc

A plasma arc can be used in a corner with not too acute angle. A better solution for acute angles is a
plasma triangle because it needs smaller space.
-click at , or at the "Plasma arc" from the main "Technology" menu
-write in the arc radius, in mm
-click at the corner of the part
8.4.5 Plasma triangle

A plasma triangle can be used in corners with acute angles. In such corners the plasma arc runs out
too much from the part and it needs more space.
-click at , or at the "Plasma triangle" from the main "Technology" menu
-write in the length of the triangle side, in mm
-click at the corner of the part
8.4.6 Lead-ins
While constructing parts it is not usually necessary to draw lead-ins. In the course of the nesting layout
creation the SAPSW program has several more comfortable possibilities how to create the missing
lead-ins automatically or interactively. It is advantageous to draw lead-ins only in the case the part has a
lot of small holes and therefore the lead-in must have a special shape or a shorter length than it is
technologically requested in the STANDARD databank.
The lead-in drawn in SCADW can have any shape and length and it may contain 3 abscissae and arcs
in maximum. A simple lead-in in the shape of one abscissa can be created in this way:
-click at button

SCADW 141
-set up the length of the lead-in in the text box

-click at any section of the part (possible even outside the endpoints)
-set up the direction of the lead-in with the mouse move and click
8.4.7 Ellipsis
-the center and the dimensions of the enclosing rectangle are entered
-in button , in the "Technology" bookmark, there is possible to set up the way of ellipsis
approximation (abscissae or arcs) and the permitted deviation from the theoretical line
8.4.8 Text drawing

-click at button
-write the text into the text box
-if you want to rotate the text by exactly 90 degrees, then tick the "90" check box
-click the screen with the left mouse button, a little square will be depicted and the text will be situated
under and to the right of the square
-you can move the text while keeping the button pressed:
· you can pull the text with the left one
· you can rotate with the middle one
-the size of the text can be changed with the "Height" shifting
-you confirm the text position by clicking at "OK" or by a double click of the mouse
Note:
The and buttons for stepping in constructions cannot be used for texts. Texts can be erased
with the "Texts" button within the buttons for erasing geometrical sections.
8.4.9 Text cutting

SCADW can use the icon to import texts and create profile - cutting contours from any Windows
TrueType sign set. The particular signs can be in case of need shifted after the import.
You can enter:
-the needed height of signs in mm
-the gap between signs in mm
-the width of signs with regards to the standard width, in per cents
-the number of points for the replacement of curves (each sign usually contains more curves, each
curve will be replaced with an angled line of a set number of points)
-the deviation from the theoretical curve, the item serves for a reduction of angled line points (after the
import of one sign SCADW will try to leave out the points of the angled lines which are unneeded after
keeping to the permitted deviation)
-the text itself, the text must be in one line, the maximum number of signs is 256 and the total number of
lines is 15,000
-the writing, there are only TrueType writings in the combo box
-the setting of the sign position change in the horizontal direction, or a free shifting (after clicking any
line it is possible to move the sign, by another click the new position will be confirmed)
8.4.10 Text marking

Any text can be situated on the cut-outs at machines with a marker (center-punch, powder, needle).
Create a suitable set of signs for it in SCADW and save them as details. Each sign is in an individual
file, the name is identical to the sign. For example the file name for "A" is "A.DTL". Small letters from
capital letters can be distinguished by an underliner, e.g. "a" has the "_A.DTL" name. As a help before
sign drawing you can draw a grid with helping lines, or you can use the icon for creation of cut signs
outlines. It is important to create easy signs with the longest possible inner lines, otherwise the marking
machine will not transfer the text on the sheet in a satisfactory quality.
Here is a suitable technique for a sign creation with help of outlines:
- click at icon, choose the "yellow" line type, choose an easy sign set (e.g. ISOCP) and create the A
sign with OK
- choose the "blue" line type, draw the A sign with several lines, you can erase the yellow lines but it is
not necessary.

142 SAPSproW v19
- click at icon for saving the file, tick the format of the DTL file, tick off the other ones, write in A as
the file name and save it with OK.
- repeat the technique for other signs. While creating the outline at small letters change the size for e.
g.60 per cent of the capital letters size.
- while drawing the gap sign choose the "cutting" line type (black) and draw a rectangle as high as the
capital letters and as long as the needed gap. Choose the ^ sign as the gap file name. the sign set can
be drawn in any size, e.g.100 mm. The text itself for marking will be created with icon by a
technique similar to writing a text into a part drawing. Choose the "marking" line, write in the text,
choose the writing size in the text box, click the position of the text. After clicking the OK icon the
written text will disappear from the screen and the text drawn with marking lines will appear.
8.4.11 Grid
The drawing function for a grid drawing enables to draw a grid with a frame or without a frame. You
enter the number of strips in X and Y directions and the dimensions of the frame.
8.4.12 Grid with more parts

It is possible to create in the SCADW a group of parts in grid form. The whole grid will use only one
lead-in, thanks to the side loops on the parts. You can use this type of grid also to autogenous cutting in
the case, that the plate does not moves on the working table through the cutting process. For every NC
machine and every material quality is preferred to test at first the usability of this method and to test the
maximal number of parts in the grid, at which the geometric dimensions of parts are yet good. SCADW
can create 6x6 parts in the grid, in the practice the real number of parts is less. In the grid can You use
square, rectangle, rhomboid, orthogonal triangle, orthogonal trapezoid (holes are allowed):
For creating the grid at first create a new nesting layout (or call an old one), click the SCADW, from
VIEWER click an appropriate part in GEO format (not VYK !) and after that right click on the . After
creating the grid click on button ( button has to be in down position before the click to ) and
write out the GEO file under a new filename. SAPS in the nesting layout can verify the number of grids
and the number of origin parts too. In the ECO list there will be present the origin partname and the
number of cutted parts.
8.4.13 The order of marking and holes cutting

The order of marks, marking contours and the order of holes cutting can be at saving a part influenced
by " Int" button:
-if you do not click at the button, then SCADW will determine the order automatically (you can set up
the mode)
-if you want to change the order individually, then click at " Int" and then click individually in the
requested order at a endpoint of the contours. It is possible to enter a good "From - to" order of holes.
-if you want to change the order of several contours at once, create a window for a group choice. It will
ease the determination of cutting marking order in a part with many holes where there is necessary to
divide the plate temperature load in order to keep to the accuracy of cutting. SCADW will determine the
order in the window according to the first corner of the window, the hole nearest to the corner will be
cut first. The order will be appointed for all holes lying totally in the window.
A group choice by window and an individual choice by clicking can be repeated several times
according to the needs.
8.4.14 Contour order in a part

In the geometric file of the part (GEO-file) there is possible to depict the contour order for marking and
the contour order of holes with the following buttons:

SCADW 143
· will show the current order which will arise by a successive drawing of the part or by loading
the part from a disk drive
· will show the automatically determined order which will arise after geometry output of the part
onto the disk drive.
The real order will not be changed only by pressing the buttons. The order will be changed after saving
the part in the GEO-file.
8.4.15 Measure the geometry, correct

The part geometry can be checked up by dimensioning or with help of , , , , buttons. The
last button is good for smaller geometry arrangements directly by a change of coordinates. Click at
"XY?" button and then:
1. At the endpoint
-in the info window for points there is possible to change the coordinates of the endpoints and the
centers of arcs and circles. Write the changed item into the "X" and "Y" windows (you can also use
arithmetic operations and brackets). Then click the left or middle button in the info window headings.
2. or at an arc or a circle
-in the info window for arcs there is possible to change the arc radius, write the change into the "R" or
"D" windows
Note:
This button can also change the diameter of the same round holes en masse. Click at the "XY?" icon, at
any hole with the requested diameter, overwrite the old diameter with the new item, click at "=" button
and choose the 2nd line in the menu.
8.4.16 Lower the point count

The icon lowers the number of points of dense open polygons.
8.4.17 Change of dimensions

The whole geometry of part can be enlarged or made smaller in a constant rate by button. You write
the change rate into the text box, e.g. for a double enlargement you write 2 in the text box.
8.4.18 Additions
-click at , or at the "Additions" from the main "Technology" menu
-write in the addition size in mm
-click at the first point you want to make an addition from
-click at the second point where the addition ends. The order of clicking at points is anticlockwise
following the part contour.
Notes:
1.If you want to make an addition round the whole contour, click twice the same point.
2.If you enter a plus value of the addition, then the outer contour will become bigger and the holes will
become smaller (you will add material). If you enter a minus value, the contour will get smaller and the
holes will get bigger (you will take material away).
8.4.19 Addition for shortening

Oblong parts of bigger thicknesses (over 10 mm, length over 1 m), which are welded along their whole
length into bigger construction arrangements, can later shorten their length even by several mm. The
shortening must be compensated by an addition in several places inside the part. It would be tough to
construct such additions with a complicated shape of the part by a current technique.
A. Click at .
B. Write in the addition size.
C. Click:
-at the crossing points of a helping abscissa/straight line (necessary to create in advance, choose
yellow) with 2 sections which are to be prolonged, or...
-at the points created in these sections in advance, or...

144 SAPSproW v19
-in the middle at the sections

According to the order in which you click at the sections, the side where the part will be prolonged is
chosen. If the prolonged section is an arc, SCADW will calculate a new, optimal radius of this arc.
Note:
It is possible to tick "Orthogonally" before creating the addition. Then it is sufficient for the determination
of the addition place to click in the middle of convenient sections only approximately. The second point
will be automatically chosen in the direction from the first point from the 0 or 90° angle.
For a division from a current angle it is the most advantageous to create a helping line (yellow). For
the addition creation it is sufficient then to show the crossing places. Before saving the part into GEO-
file it is not necessary to erase the helping lines.

SAPSproW enables to create an NC-program:
· with the automatic kerf compensation. In this case you construct parts with exact dimensions and
in the end you save it on the disk drive. Before cutting such a part, ESSI-commands for the
automatic kerf compensation (29,30) or the G42 and G43 functions for DIN format will appear in
NC-program.
· without the automatic kerf compensation. You construct parts with the requested dimensions as
well, in the end before saving on a disk drive you use function for the automatic change of
dimensions. SCADW will enlarge the outer dimensions and it will make the inner ones smaller by
a half of the kerf.
· with DIN format it is possible to choose one of 5 compensation values for each contour (Dxxx
function). You call out the chart and enter the compensation for the needed contour in the same
way as in the cutting speed.
8.4.21 Dimensioning
8.4.21.1 Automatic dimensioning
The button can automatically dimension a part. This dimensioning serves only for the first rough
check-up of the part. On the "Look" side in the setting window there is possible to set up the data for
aut. dimensioning.
8.4.21.2 Abscissa dimensioning
- click at button
- click at the abscissa
- click under or over the abscissa in the distance where the dimension line should be situated
8.4.21.3 Circle or arc dimensioning
- click at button
- click at the arc/circle. A radius is dimensioned in the arc, a diameter is dimensioned in the circle.
8.4.21.4 Dimensioning of the arc length
- click at button
- click at the arc/circle with the right mouse button
8.4.21.5 Proportions dimensioning
It serves for dimensioning maximum proportions of a group of sections with help of the right and lower
dimensions. Using this way you can even dimension e.g. a whole part or a hole. The distance from the
part in which the dimensions are created is determined by the criterion for print and by the dimensions
distance on the "Look" tab in the window.
-click at button
-click at the arc/circle
-pull the window where all sections forming a group are situated. Choose the window so that no section
is situated under the cursor while clicking the corners.

SCADW 145
8.4.21.6 Angle dimensioning

-click at button
-click at the first abscissa/straight line
-click at the second abscissa/straight line. The dimension size is determined by the point of the second
click. The order of clicking at the first and second abscissa influences the dimensioning of a bigger or
smaller angle.
8.4.21.7 Distance of a point
-click at button
-click at the first point or at the crossing point of 2 sections
-click at the second point, at the crossing point of 2 sections, at the abscissa or straight line
-move the mouse. Depending on the angle of the pulled abscissa between the first clicked point and the
cursor there arise the dimension lines for vertical or oblique dimensions. Vertical dimensions arise
around the 0, 90,180, 270 angles.
-click at the place where the dimensioning line should be situated
8.4.21.8 Distance of parallel sections
-click at button
-click at the first abscissa/straight line
-click at the second abscissa/straight line
8.4.22 PAR - cutting speed

In NC-program there can be information for setting the standard cutting speed. Apart from this basic
speed, in SCADW there you can assign an elective number (parameter) in 1 - 3 range to any part
contours. In the course of NC-program creation before cutting the contours SAPSW will set up the
cutting speed for the requested value. For entering the parameters:
-click the "Par" button
-click twice at a endpoint of the contour where you want to change the standard cutting speed .
Note:
The parameters will change, in the case of oxyacetylene and plasma machines, the cutting speed with
help of 39+xxxx functions for ESSI format, or Fxxxx for DIN format of the NC-program.
The parameters in the case of laser BALLIU 1500 LC machine will be used for entering R501-R506
parameters.
8.4.23 Print of drawings

After clicking at you can choose:
-drawing scale
-contents of the text line under the drawing
-zero sign drawing in the system of coordinates. Make up the sign under the COORD_ORIGIN name full
scale, as any drawing in the VYK. COORD_ORIGIN.VYK form it will be automatically saved even into
the SAPSproW install directory (default is C:\SAPSproW), it means it is necessary to draw it only
once and it will be valid in all working directories.
-drawing of arc centers
-thickness of drawing lines
-size of signs
-shift of the drawing on the paper
-direction of drawing (vertically - horizontally)
Before printing it is possible to display the "printed" component on the screen. One component with help
of button, more components with button.
Print of a new-displayed drawing:

-click at button

146 SAPSproW v19
Print of all today´s drawings:

-click at button
-the "Today´s parts" window must be ticked
-click at "Print"
Print of all with the same label:

-in SAPSW window select the needed group of parts with one identical label
-display the group in the VIEWER (click at the "Label" combo box and click the line with the chosen
label)
-click at
-click at button
-the "Today´s parts" must not be ticked
-click at "Print"
8.4.24 Change of line type

With the button the type of drawn lines can be changed, e.g. cutting replace by marking etc. Select
the desired new line type, click to the button and afterwards on the respective line.
You can also change the line type for a group of lines:
· with a selection rectangle (it does not matter from which side you pull the rectangle)
· for a whole continuous contour, with a double click to any segment in the contour (but not to any
endpoint in the contour)
8.5 Side panel

8.5.1 Line types
Volí se některým z následujících 5 tlačítek:
.…kreslení čar pálení, tyto úseky budou skutečně páleny
.…kreslení pomocných čar, úseky se nepálí
.…kreslení čar pro důlčíkovací nebo práškovací hlavici NC-stroje
....kreslení popisovacích čar pro plazmový popisovač (tlačítko vidět jen tehdy, když v nastaveních
stroje je povolen popisovač)
….kreslení spojovacích čar. Vnější obrys součásti kreslíte zpravidla čarami pálení (a tím později
pálíte) jakou uzavřenou křivku. Spojovací čáry umožní, pro speciální případy pálení,
zpracování součástí s neuzavřenou vnější konturou.
Poznámka:
1.Mazat lze tlačítky pro mazání ( , , …) jen ten druh čar, který je navolen některým ze čtyř výše
uvedených tlačítek.
2.Když je stisknuto , tak lze kreslit značkovací bod. Pro ostatní tlačítka se kreslí vždy pomocný (žlutý)
bod.
3.Popisovací čáry vytvoříte podobným způsobem jako u značkování práškem nebo důlčíkem. Když
použijete ikonu , tak bez ohledu na to, jakou čarou byly znaky (soubory ve formátu DTL)
nakresleny :
- když není na stroji ani značkovač ani popisovač, tak podle nastavení na straně NC STROJ, okno
ZNAČKOVAČ se kreslí jen text nebo se pálí text
- když na stroji je značkovač i popisovač, tak se značkuje nebo popisuje podle toho, jaký typ čáry je
tlačítky ve SCADW právě navolen
- v dalších případech, když je pouze značkovač tak se značkuje, když je pouze popisovač tak se
popisuje bez ohledu na stav tlačítek volby typu čar
--------------------OLD_TEXT---------------------
It can be chosen by one of the following 4 buttons:
.…drawing of cutting lines, these sections will be really cut
.…drawing of helping lines, the sections will not be cut
.…drawing of lines for the center-punch or powder head of NC-machine

SCADW 147
….drawing of linking lines. You usually draw the outer contour of the part with cutting lines (and
that is why you cut them later) as a closed curve. Linking lines will enable, for special cases of
cutting, to work up the parts with an unclosed outer contour.
Note:
1.Erasing is possible with the buttons for erasing ( , , …) only for that kind of lines which is
chosen by one of the four mentioned buttons.
2.If is buttoned, it is possible to draw the marking point. For other buttons the yellow (helping) point
is always drawn.
8.5.2 Coordinate types

1.Absolute coordinates
-the button with the "Abs/Rel" sign next to the , , ,… buttons must be set up into the "Abs" position
2.Relative coordinates
-the button must be set up into the "Rel" position. In this position a circlet for marking the actual
referential point will appear. The absolute coordinates are made up of a sum of the referential point
coordinates and the entered relative coordinates.
-the position of the referential point can be changed in this way:
-click at the "Abs/Rel" for the "Rel" position
-click at the "Point"
-click at the point which should be the new referential point.
Note
-the position of the referential point can be changed even in the course of a section drawing. For
example: you will enter the first point of the abscissa in relative coordinates with regard to the actual
referential point, then you will change the referential point and at last you will enter relative coordinates
of the endpoint with regard to the new referential point.
-both the absolute and the relative coordinates can be entered as an arithmetical expression with
brackets , e.g.
782+400/3 or
(720/5+12)*5 and so on
8.6 Upper panel

8.6.1 "Last" button
The button shows the last imported drawing, which was imported with "External drawings" button. It
simplifies the actions of the programmer, if the imported drawing holds more parts for cutting. After
clicking "Last" the whole previously imported drawing will be shown, and the button will be
automatically activated. Its enough afterwards to pull a selection frame across the first part in the
drawing, and the not required lines will be erased. The part can be thereafter saved to form of GEO file.
The next click to "Last" shows once more the whole drawing, the will be activated and so on.
8.6.2 "Paint" button

The button enables to paint up any continuous contour in the drawing of the parts. So it makes a better
visual view to the part. The button has no direct effect to the nesting layout nor for creation of the NC
programs.
8.7 Saving and correction of parts

8.7.1 Quality of material
At saving a part the quality of material can be chosen from the combo box. It is possible to write even a
new quality into the box. Each new quality is automatically saved at the disk drive into the QUALITY.TXT
file in the _TxtSAPS directory. It is possible to erase a quality in the combo box by erasing all signs and
pressing ENTER, or directly by a correction of the QUALITY.TXT text file.

148 SAPSproW v19
8.7.2 Contours in the part

The individual segments of holes and of the outer contour can be drawn in any order. The SCADW at
saving the part first determines the continuous contours from all existing lines (the continuous contours
can be drawn and cut by one stroke). It will appoint from the area of continuous contours, which are the
holes and which is the outer contour (the holes have less area as the outer contour).
8.7.3 Saving a part

-click at the button
-write in the name of the output file. It can have up to 20 signs, you can use even the number of the
drawing as the name. Or you can use an ordinal number as the name and enter the number of the
drawing in the following window.
-according to your needs tick the type of GEO, DXF, VYK, ZBY, MKR or DTL files. It is possible to tick
even several types of files.
-tick the "Only holes" window if the plate has straight sides for an exact format and the part forms only
the drawn holes of the part
-among the other windows it is necessary to fill in the "Quality", "Thickness" and "Number" windows.
-the contents of the "Label" combo box will make finding in the "Parts" chart and in the VIEWER window
easier. Labels can be corrected/entered directly in the "Parts".
-click at the "Cutting date" button when you want to sort out the lines in the "Parts" chart according to
the requested date of cutting. Otherwise it is not necessary to click it.
-it is not necessary to fill in the "Note" window
-the order of contours for marking and the holes can be influenced by " Int" button
-after the correction of an existing part there will also appear a window with the actual ACT number
and the CHANGE ACT.NUMBER controller (in the SCADW setting window, the CONTROL tab is also
for a permanent setting). If the controller is switched on, then in the PARTS chart there will be the ACT
number set up to NUM. If not, then the ACT value will stay unchanged.
-after clicking at "OK" the file/files will be saved at a disk drive. Apart form this if even the VIEWER has
been displayed, it will be overdrawn and the new part will appear in it
-the entered data from the windows will be automatically inserted into the "Parts" chart
Note:
1.It is always advantageous to save even the VYK type file. SCADW will save apart from the geometric
information even the construction state and the state of and buttons. After recalling such a
saved part it is possible to step in the part.
2.After a GEO-file creation SCADW will draw a red arrow with the movement direction of the outer
contour sections. The direction must be always anticlockwise. Make a control of the direction for very
small parts with plasma bows because if the bow area overtops the area of the part itself, then
SCADW cannot determine the direction automatically. In this case recall the window for saving into
GEO and tick the "Change direction" window.
3.SAPSW always cancels the technology of holes cutting in old nesting layouts after a part correction.
The technology is not canceled if
- you load GEO-file for correction in SCADW (it means not in VYK)
- you will not change the contour
- you will not change the total number of sections
It means it is possible to change dimensions and the type of hole sections and the position of holes in
the part and the technology of the contour cutting will stay unchanged.
8.7.4 Changing of part's geometry

SCADW after saving the drawing to GEO file may alert that it has automatically performed some
changes:
- deleting of too small openings
- deleting of too short arcs
- replacing of a dense open polygon with arc
- deleting of duplicated contour segments

SCADW 149
8.7.5 Multiply GEO file

The data (thickness, quality, piece count, etc.) of parts are saved in the GEO files. In VIEWER or on
cutting layout to every sort of part belongs an other GEO file. The files holds the data and the
geometrical data of parts. The GEO file can in a specific case hold only data, and instead of the truly
geometry only a reference to an other part. In this way two or more parts can have the same
geometrical form, but their data can be various.
The big advantage is, that with modification of any part, the form of every referenced part will be
changed too. This suits the need, when in more cutting orders there are some parts with the same
geometry, but with various requested piece count. SAPS can with help of multiply GEO-s control the
piece count, and concurrently automatically follow the changes in the geometry.
The reference to other GEO file can be performed by saving the part in the SCADW module, or in the
REQ file types too. The reference is "#filename" and it should be written into the "drawing number" item.
This way created GEO files will have only 2 lines.
If You call with help of VIEWER into the SCADW a part with reference, then SCADW write out the
names of every part of the same form, and ask to change the form of them, or only to create a new
referenced part.
8.7.6 Changing with temporary dimensions

The drawing may be modified in the SCADW on more ways, one of them is with help of temporary
dimensions. This was possible until now only with typing the new dimension or the coordinates, now it is
possible also by pulling an endpoint or center point of arc and circle.
Change with dragging:
If the temporary dimensions are not visible, then check the box in the upper left corner of the screen.
Click the point which should be moved, hold the mouse button and move the mouse. The displayed text
box shows the actual coordinates of the mouse, or the coordinates of a point to which is the mouse
cursor coming near on its way. Release the button and the SCADW will display the modified drawing.
The contour of the part remains continuous, except the case when more connected arcs should be
moved.
At clicking the point it does matter which button is clicked. If the left, then the point can be move only in
vertical or horizontal direction. Which direction will be allowed, it depends on the move direction in the
near surroundings of the clicked point (+-2 mm). If the click was by the right button, then the point may
be moved in any direction. If you release the mouse button in 2 mm surroundings of the clicked point,
then the drawing will be not modified.
Remark:
The part may be changed also by direct typing to the edit box and an ENTER. There may be used also
complex expressions with "+" and "-" characters (e.g. incremental coordinates). But you may also
directly type incremental coordinates to a specific point or to the last point, if you press the "Rel" button,
or eventually the "Point" button.
8.8 Macros
8.8.1 Working with macros
The user can create his specific parametric macros. The macros ease the drawing of parts in process
of creating NC programs. After calling up the appropriate macro the user need only fill in the
dimensioned values and the SAPS automatically create the drawing.
To every macro belongs 2 files, the '.MKR' and the '.TXT' file. The user can create a new macro in this
way:
- draw a picture of the new macro in the SCADW program with arbitrary dimensions
- create the dimensioning with the button.
- save the new macro as VYK file type and as MKR file type too.
- create a new text file, where define the way of creating the macro. The user can create this file with
any editor (e.g. NOTEPAD.EXE). In the same order in which were created in the SCADW the
dimensions, in that order use in the macro description the symbolic values in form of $n - the so
called parameters.

150 SAPSproW v19
- save the macro description as '.TXT' file type into the _MKR directory.
The following commands are valid in the macro description:

// ...comment
P(oint)...point
L(ine)...abscissae
C(ircle)...circle
LOG...list of coordinates
$...parameter
IF...condition
D(elta)...relative coordinate
I(ntersect)...intersection
T(angent)...tangent
A(rc)...tangential arc
ROT(ation)...rotation
MOV(e)...move, duplicate
ROTMOV...rotate and move
MIR(ror)...mirroring
GEO ...continuos sequence of contour
Macro example:
//Triangle $1...length $2...height
$1=300 ; Length
$2=100 ; Height
P1=0 0
P2=$1 0
P3=$1 $2
GEO=P1 P2 P3 P1
8.8.2 Parameters
$...parameter
- "$" can be used as command "$n=...", or as a symbol which substitute the user input from the
keyboard
- at testing of macro description there can be at description beginning more "$n=..." commands. In this
way in course of testing you will not be repeatedly forced to fill in the parameter values from the
keyboard. After the testing phase You can erase (or comment them with "//" characters) these lines.
- if You need a parameter, to which exists no dimensionable line (e.g. number of rotations in ROT
command), then in phase of drawing in SCADW draw a short line on an appropriate free place in the
drawing and create the dimension of it.
- to increase the limpidity in the description, at the end of lines You can after a ";" character write any
comment. If the ";" comment is used in the "$n=.......; any text" lines, then the "any text" will Windows
show as a floating help on the screen.
Macro example:
//
$1=300 ; Length
$2=100 ; Height
P1=0 0
P2=$1 0
P3=$1 $2
GEO=P1 P2 P3 P1
8.8.3 Comment
// ...comment

SCADW 151
8.8.4 Relative coordinates

D(elta)...relative coordinates (X or Y) in respect of previous point. In the coordinates there can be used
the basic arithmetical operations '+', '-', '/', '*' and brackets '(' and ')'.
//
p1=0 0
p2=$1 0
p3=$1 $2
p4=D-$3 $2
p5=D0 D-$4
p6=$5 D0
p7=$5 $2
p8=0 $2
geo=p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p1
8.8.5 Command P - point

P(oint)...point in form of X and Y coordinate
Examples:
P3=300 400 ... X and Y absolute coordinates
P4=D100 500 ...X relative coordinate, Y absolute
8.8.6 Command L - abscissae

L(ine)...abscissae in form of:
1. "point - length - angle"
2. "X Y length angle"
//
P1=0 0
P2=$1 0
L3=p1 $2 $3
GEO=P1 P2 P3 P1
8.8.7 Command C - circle

C(ircle)...circle in form of:
1. X and Y point coordinates, X and Y center point, direction 1 or -1
2. Endpoint, center point, direction 1 or -1

152 SAPSproW v19
//
P1=0 0
P2=$1 0
C3=$1 $2 $1 $2/2 1
P4=0 $2
GEO=P1 P2 C3 P4 P1
//Hole
P5=$3+$5/2 $4
C5=P5 $3 $4 1
GEO=P5 C5
8.8.8 Command LOG - testing

The LOG command can be used at phase of macro testing, it lists out the coordinates of computed
points.
8.8.9 Command IF - condition

The command can be used to conditional computing. E.g. the following macro can create a quadrate
with a hole in form of a circle, or a triangle, or without the hole.
//
//If = 1...circle, 2...triangle, other...no hole
P1=0 0
P2=100 0
P3=100 100
P4=0 100
P5=50 50
P6=60 50
P7=50 80
P8=40 50
IF$1=1
C6=p6 p5 1
GEO=P6 C6
IF$1=2
GEO=P6 P7 P8 P6
IF$1
GEO=P1 P2 P3 P4 P1

SCADW 153
8.8.10 Command I - intersection

I(ntersect)...intersection in form of:
1. "Pa Pb Pc Pd" - two abscissas
2. "Pa Pb Cc" abscissae-circle
3. "Ca Cb" circle-circle
In case of 2. and 3. the computed intersection points will be saved into the points Pn and Pn+1.
//
P1=0 50
P2=100 50
P3=100 0
P4=250 0
P5=250 50
P6=0 $2
P7=0 $1
P8=250 $1
I9=P5 P6 P7 P8
GEO=P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P9 P7 P1
8.8.11 Command T - tangent

T(angent)...tangent in form of:
1. "Ca Cb" - two circles
2. "Pa Cb" point-circle
3. "Ca Pb" circle-point
The computed intersection points will be saved into the points Pn a Pn+1.
//
c1=$1+$3 $2 $1 $2 1
c2=$4+$6 $5 $4 $5 1
p3=0 0
p4=$7 0
T5=p4 c2
T7=c2 c1
c2=p7 $4 $5 1
T9=c1 p3
C1=p9 $1 $2 1
GEO=p3 p4 p6 c2 p8 c1 p3

154 SAPSproW v19
8.8.12 Command A - tangential arc

A(rc)...tangential arc:
1. "Ca r Cb" - two circles
2. "Pa r Cb" point-circle
3. "Ca r Pb" circle-point
The computed tangential points will be saved into the points Pn and Pn+2, the arc centerpoint into the
Pn+1
//
c1=$1+$3 $2 $1 $2 1
c2=$4+$6 $5 $4 $5 1
p3=0 0
p4=$7 0
T5=p4 c2
A7=c2 -$8 c1
c20=p9 p8 -1
c2=p7 $4 $5 1
T10=c1 p3
c1=p10 $1 $2 1
geo=p3 p4 p6 c2 c20 c1 p3
8.8.13 Command ROT - rotation

ROT(ation)...rotation:
1. "Pa Wb numb Pd Pe Pf..." center of rotation-angle-number-the rotated points
//
P77=0 0
L1=P77 $1/2 -$3/2
P2=$2/2 0
L3=p77 $1/2 $3/2
GEO=P1 P2 P3
ROT=P77 W$3 360/$3-1 P1 P2 P3
8.8.14 Command MOV - move, copy

MOV(e)...moving, duplicating:
1. "Pa Pb numb Pc Pd Pe..." 1. and 2.bod define the distance of moving-number of duplications-the
points

SCADW 155
//
P1=0 0
P2=$2 $3
P3=0 $4
GEO=P1 P2 P3
MOV=P1 P3 $5 P1 P2 P3
//
P11=-$1 0
P12=-$1 $4*$5+$4
P13=0 $4*$5+$4
GEO=P1 P11 P12 P13
8.8.15 Command ROTMOV - rotation and move

The ROTMOV command first rotates the points around the Pa centerpoint with Wb angle, and
afterwards moves and duplicates the points to the distance of points P1 and P2.
ROT(ation)MOV(e) ... in form of:

1. "Pa Wb numb P1 P2 Pd Pe Cf..." centerpoint -angle - number of duplicates - 1.point - 2.point
(distance) - the points
8.8.16 Command PAR - paralell abscissaes

The PAR command computes the both parallel abscissas to the abscissae.
PAR=P1 P2 deist
n...1.computed point - 1.point of abscissae - 2.point - parallel distance
The computed intersection points will be saved into the points Pn - Pn+3.
8.8.17 Command MIR - mirroring

The MIR command mirrors according to an abscissae.
MIR=P1 P2 Pa Pb Cc
1.point of abscissae - 2.point - the mirrored points
8.8.18 Command GEO - cutting contour

GEO ...the sequential order of points and arcs in one contour. The cutting direction and the first cutted
point can be changed in phase of creating the nesting layout.
8.8.19 Truncated pipe

The ZREZVALEC macro creates the development of a slantwise truncated pipe. The number of
developing points can be set in the SCADW settings, on the TECHNOLOGY tab.
8.8.20 Reducing piece

The KRUHKRUH macro creates a reducing piece between 2 pipes with unequal diameter. The mutual
position of pipes can be excentrical and/or inclined.

156 SAPSproW v19
8.9 SCADW setting

8.9.1 "Look" tab
8.9.1.1 Show
It is possible to enter which kinds of lines and graphic information should be displayed by SCADW.
8.9.1.2 Automatic dimensioning
You can choose and enter:
"Temporary dimensions" - if checked, then the SCADW after drawing any line will automatically draw
also the dimension of that line. These dimensions are only temporary, and are not saved to any file.
Similar check box is placed also to the main window of SCADW, to enable the quick switching the
dimensions on/off. With changing of the temporary dimensions, the part geometry will be changed too.
"Max" - to display also the dimension lines around the whole part
"Dimension middle points" - of arcs and circles
"Dimension slant lines" - dimensioning of lines, which are drawn under an angle not equal to 0 and 90
degrees
"Dim in X and Y" - so that a couple of dimension lines instead of only one oblique line would be created
in the direction of coordinate axes in the regime of automatic dimensioning
"Min.length" - the minimum length of abscissae visible on the screen so that a dimension line would be
created
"Min.radius" - the minimum radius of arc visible on the screen so that a dimension line would be created
"Scale of drawing" and "Distance" - values to define the distance of the dimensioning line to the contour
line on the drawing
"Size" - the length of arrow dimension line in mm
"Overlap" - the overlap of a dimension line text to one side from the dimension line when the dimension
number does not get between the arrows
"Min.arc" - the maximum arc or circle radius where the dimension line text will still stay outside the arc
area
"Font of dim.lines" - the size of the font to dimensioning the contour lines
8.9.1.3 Zero coord.
The zero position of the coordinate system for drawing, with regard to the lower left corner of the
screen, in per cents.
8.9.1.4 Scale
It will determine the beginning display scale after the SCADW start or after erasing the screen.
8.9.1.5 Straight lines length
In SCADW straight lines are drawn as abscissae of particular length. Choose this length so that the
value is at least several meters longer than the maximum possible dimension of the drawn parts.
8.9.1.6 Graphic design
"Size of endpoints" - it is possible to determine the size of the black little square at the end of abscissae
and arcs
"Flat buttons" - select the specific panel, on which should be the buttons showed as flat buttons
8.9.1.7 Changing the temporary dimensions
V nastaveních SCADW lze zaškrtnout zaškrtávací políčko "Dočasné kóty". SCADW po nakreslení
libovolné čáry (na řezání), čáru hned okótuje. Tyto kóty jsou jenom dočasné a hodnoty SCADW
neukládá do žádného souboru. Stejné zaškrtávací políčko je i v hlavním okně SCADW vedle tlačítek
měřítek, na snadné zapnutí/vypnutí kót. Tento druh kót umožní snadnou změnu předmětného úseku.
--------------------OLD_TEXT---------------------
If "Temporary dimensions" in the "Look" bookmark is checked, then the SCADW will automatically draw
the dimensions of lines. With changing the dimension's text it is possible to change the corresponding
contour segment.
Changing the length or the radius:

SCADW 157
Click to the middle of the dimension's text, and the SAPS will show a text box:
- in case of an abscissa you can change the length of that abscissa. According to that which button
click you, on that side of abscissa will change the endpoint. If you click with the middle button, then
the line will be changed on the both ends. If the line is vertical, then a left click changes the bottom end
point, a right click will change the upper endpoint. Also the next segment will be changed - if it is an
abscissa (so the contour's continuity remains preserved).
- in case of an arc the radius can be changed. The previous and the following segments will also
change - if they are abscissas (e.g. in case of corner rounding)
- in case of a circle the diameter
You can type a new value in the displayed text box, or use the basic arithmetic expressions (with "+-*/").
The input of numbers should end with the Enter key.
Changing the endpoint and the centerpoints:
You can change also the coordinates of the abscissa's endpoints or the center point of arc/circle. The
temporary dimensioning check box should be checked, and no button for selecting some drawing
function should be pushed. The coordinates can be displayed and changed in the absolute coordinate
system, or relative to any selected point. In this second case you should push first the "Abs" button (the
caption changes to "Rel"), then push the "Point" and click to select the requested reference point.
Afterwards click the point which should be changed, type the new coordinate values (the delimiter is the
";" character, the basic arithmetic expression may be used), end hit the Enter key.
8.9.2 "Control" tab

8.9.2.1 Aut.order
In the SCADW settings on the "Control" tab there is the "...don't change" check box, which can disable
the automatic determination of the working order of contours at output to the GEO file.
If not checked, then the order will be determined automatically, in groups:
· drilling
· marking
· plasma marking
· profile cutting and cutting of holes
The automatic order of contours is determined by SCADW on the basis of the minimum enclosing
rectangle to the part. The first contour on the output will be the one whose first point is situated nearest
to the chosen corner of the rectangle. The next contour will be the one situated nearest to the previous
contour etc. The corner of the rectangle can be chosen separatelly for holes and for marking contours.
8.9.2.2 Snap
It is possible to choose which kinds of points should be handled by SCADW.
8.9.2.3 Allow the identificators
If checked the "Allow the identificators", then the SCADW will at importing the CAD drawings look for
some specific TEXT entities. You can set in the CONTROL tab 6 idenficators, which when written as
TEXT entities, will be imported and its associated values will be shown automatically as default values in
the text boxes at saving the drawing to the GEO file form.
8.9.2.4 Step of move (COPY)
You will enter a length in mm for a dynamic shift of a drawing on the screen.
8.9.2.5 Step of scale (COPY)
Enter a constant for multiplication/division of the current scale at the dynamic change of the drawing
scale.
8.9.2.6 Shift of the referential point
If it is ticked, the position of the referential point (for the conversion of relative points on absolute ones)
will be always shifted to the last depicted point. If it is not ticked, the referential point will stay in the last
defined position with help of the "Point" button.

158 SAPSproW v19
8.9.2.7 Free hand drawing

-if it is ticked, it is possible to draw freely with the mouse on the screen without there must have been a
point or a section in the place you click and yet SCADW draws a point, a section, an arc etc.
according to the chosen function. Such drawing is suitable only for training or SCADW testing
purposes.
-if it is not ticked, SCADW asks either for entering coordinates of the endpoints or for handling points
on the screen with the mouse.
8.9.2.8 Incl. straight lines
If it is ticked, then after pressing the MAX button for the maximum zoom-in SCADW will calculate the
scale so that in turns there would be also all straight lines in the picture (straight lines are drawn in
SCADW as abscissas of a big length, the length can be entered) and after another click at MAX there
would be only the real lines of the part.
8.9.2.9 Rotate acc.to the min.area
Check the check box, if you want the GEO part after saving to be rotated according to the area of the
minimum enclosing rectangle. At the same time the part will be shifted into the 1st quadrant of the
coordinate system.
8.9.2.10 Validate the drawing number
If checked, then the SCADW will verify at saving the drawing to the GEO part file, whether in the actual
working directory exists already such a drawing number or not. The drawing number may be
theoretically the same in more GEO parts, only the GEO file name must differ.
8.9.2.11 Automatic label
It is possible to set up the automatic labeling of GEO-files at saving. It is advantageous in the case there
are parts of various thicknesses or qualities in one directory. Label consists of the combination of three
signs "thickness" + "/" +"quality" so that the length of the label has 30 signs in maximum. The maximum
length of label can be entered in the text box.
8.9.2.12 Change the ACT number
If checked, then the SCADW will change the ACT number in the PARTS table also in that case, if you
have modified an existing GEO file. This may be dangerous, if from the modified GEO file were not
every pieces already nested, while the summed piece count then may be higher as requested.
8.9.2.13 Load the modified GEO
When the SCADW prepares from a CAD drawing the GEO part for the cutting, it makes a some good
pair of checks. If possible, then it will automatically correct the drawing (removes duplicated lines,
computes accurate centerpoints, end so on...). To the GEO file already the corrected drawing will be
saved, while on the screen is furthest displayed the not correct one. If you check the "Load the
modified GEO", then SCADW will automatically read-in the new saved GEO drawing, and will show it on
the screen.
8.9.2.14 Autosave
If a nonzero value is entered, SCADW will be regularly saving a drawing in course of creation into the
file with AUTOSAVE.VYK name. The time is entered in seconds. The AUTOSAVE.VYK drawing file can
be later called out ordinarily with help of the VIEWER.
8.9.2.15 Tone length
The duration of the beep signal, when catching end endpoint on the screen.
8.9.2.16 Default count of parts
Here you can select the default piece count for new GEO parts, in the window for saving the GEO files

SCADW 159
8.9.3 "DXF/DWG" tab

8.9.3.1 NC machine's function
On the "DXF/DWG" tab there is possible in the "NC machine's functions" to determine the way, how has
the SCADW recognize the operation modes of the NC-machine at the import of a DXF-file. It means
what it regards as cutting, what it regards as helping lines (they have no influence on NC-program) and
what it regards as marking. According to the way DXF-files are drawn, particular operation modes of
NC-machine can be identified on the basis of:
· line type (write to the list e.g.DASHDOT)
· line color (write to the list e.g. C:CYAN)
· drawing layer (write to the list e.g. /MARKING)
E.g. if in the line for the marking you have in the 1. column DASHDOT and in the second /MARKING,
then SCADW will import every line with DASHDOT type and every line which was drawn in the
MARKING layer as NC marking.
If SCADW will export the picture of the NC program (print window of ECO data, the "DXF" button), then
every NC marking lines will put to the MARKING layer as line types DASHDOT. The exported NC file
can be used for specific post processing in other CAD program.
8.9.3.2 Names of layers
In the "Names of layers" chart you can type the names of layers, which should be displayed always. If
every position in the chart is empty, then SCADW will load the layers according the state of check
boxes in the "External drawings" window.
8.9.3.3 Do not import points
If there are in the imported drawing POINT entities, and are designed by the same line type as the lines
for cutting, then this points can the SAPS import as points for drilling.
8.9.3.4 DXF directory
If the SCADW creates from the ready GEO file also DXF file, then:
- if the text box is empty, then the new DXF files will be saved to the actual working directory DXF
subdirectory
- or you can write to the text box any directory name, the SCADW will save the DXF file there
8.9.3.5 DXF<->GEO
If checked, then at creating the GEO format of a part the SCADW creates also the DXF file. If in the file
saving window you check the GEO check box, then automatically also the DXF check box will be
checked.
8.9.3.6 Move to the 1.quadrant
If checked, then after importing a drawing, SCADW will move the drawing to the 1. quadrant in the
SCADW window.
8.9.4 "Technology" tab

8.9.4.1 Permitted error
At the import of an inaccurate drawing in DXF-format there arises an error of the arc endpoint, the
distance between the center and the starting point is not equal with the distance between the center and
the endpoint. SCADW can automatically correct this mistake, enter the maximum error it can still
correct in mm.
If SCADW announces a lot of discontinuities at the import of DXF or DWG (red circles), try to change
the value in the text box.
8.9.4.2 Max.angle
You will set up the maximum angle included by the sides of a part corner. If the angle is bigger,
SCADW will not add a plasma triangle into this corner.

160 SAPSproW v19
8.9.4.3 Ellipsis
8.9.4.3.1 Draw ellipsis by arcs
It is possible to choose to draw an ellipsis by arcs or with help of an angled line.
8.9.4.3.2 Permitted tolerance
NC-cutting machines are able to cut arcs and abscissae. That´s why SCADW approaches an ellipsis
with an angled line or with help of arcs. It is possible to enter the requested exactness of approximation.
Choose a real value (0.2 - 0.5 mm) in order not to create too many points or arcs.
8.9.4.4 Dense open polygons
The drawing after the import from a DXF/DWG file may contain many dense open polygons with many
inner endpoints. SCADW can lower this count of points and at the same time can smooth the lines.
· The "Approximation with abscissae" check box will leave out that points, which are not needed for
achievement of the form and the accuracy of contours. An appropriate value for "Permitted
tolerance" is e.g. 0.1 mm.
· The "Approximation with arcs" check box will interleave the endpoint of the contours with arcs, and will
leave out the not needed points. An appropriate value for "Permitted tolerance" is e.g. 0.2 mm.
· It has sense to check both check boxes. The check boxes does not depends on each other and may
be checked also independently.
8.9.4.5 DXF compensating
The SCADW can at group import of DXF files with the button in specific cases automatically make
the kerf compensation (changing of geometric dimensions). It is possible only in case, if every DXF file
contains only one part. The compensation can be switched on in the SCADW settings on tab
TECHNOLOGY, "DXF compensating" switch. The NC machine at cutting of so imported parts will make
no additional kerf compensation, while the parts dimensions are already compensated by the SCADW
program module.
8.9.4.6 Compensation multiplier
In some specific cases you have to kerf compensate with the button already the geometry of the
part. So the geometry of the part will be changed. This is recommended only in case of that cutting
machines, which are not able automatically compute the kerf compensation in time of cutting.
In case of using the button by inner contours (little holes), the kerf compensation will be influenced
by the value in the text box. If the value is less as 1, then the compensation is less as the kerf
compensation of the outer contour.
8.9.4.7 Deviation of nods
The approximation is most suitable for sparsely but well-defined curves with a smaller number of node
points. The number of points of the result curve equates to the twofold number of node points plus other
sections added into inflexion points. The result curve is connected in the first derivation and it consists
only of arcs.
-the item for the approximation of the angled line. You will determine here the value of the deviation
under which SCADW will remove a node point from the input data (it is not a value for setting the result
exactness, let´s say the real deviation from the theoretical curve). SCADW always calculates the
deviation of node points in sequence from 3 following node points.
8.9.4.8 Big arcs
8.9.4.8.1 Max.radius
The radius size in mm over which SCADW already approaches the arc with an oblique line.
8.9.4.8.2 Permitted tolerance
It determines the maximum permitted deviation of the approaching oblique line from the arc in mm. The
smaller the value is, the more tops the oblique line will have.

VIEWER
Chapter
IX
162 SAPSproW v19
9 VIEWER
9.1 VIEWER program
9.1.1 Refresh the VIEWER
The VIEWER can be opened in the SAPSW window and in the SCADW window by shifting the mouse
cursor into the bottom part of the SAPSproW window - the status bar, where SAPS shows help and
status messages for the program user. If the SCADW window is displayed and there is a drawing on
the screen in SCADW, we must in addition click in the status bar.
If the depiction of GEO cutting parts is chosen, then also the "Label" check box will be displayed. Files
will be depicted from that user´s directory, which is selected in the drop-down list.
9.1.2 Interactive help

The VIEWER informs the user in 3 possible ways:
1. It will call out a standard help after pressing F1 or clicking the "Help" button in window.
2. It will display a short information for 5 seconds after moving the mouse cursor onto one control
element.
3. In window there is possible to click button. A window with the help for a particular element
will display after another click at this control element.
9.1.3 Control
After clicking at a picture of this type…
GEO
-in SAPSW you will insert a part in the cutting layout after clicking at the working area
-in SCADW the part will appear in the working area
DXF
-in SCADW a file in DXF-format is read and the conversion into VYK-format is carried out. Then the
part will appear in the working area. The part can be corrected and saved as a GEO-file.
VYK
-in SCADW the file appears in the working area. The part can be corrected and saved as a GEO-file.
DTL
-in SCADW there is possible to click a point in the drawing in the working area where a detail should be
added. With another click - point you will determine the rotation angle of the detail.
ZBY
-in SCADW the geometry of the remnants table will be loaded and displayed. It can be corrected as well
as GEO-files.
NCP
-in SAPSW you will insert a cutting layout for correction after clicking in the working area.
MKR
-in SCADW a parametric geometric macro will be loaded and displayed.
Double click at the input box

-will erase the name of the chosen file and it will insert "---" signs into the input box. It is worth in
SAPSW, for wrongly chosen parts. Otherwise the part would be inserted into the cutting layout with the
first click into the layout area.
Click at a picture with the right button

-it will depict the picture on the whole screen. Another right click in any place of the screen or pressing
any key will display the VIEWER in the original state.
Searching out a file

-you can write the name of the file into the input box. The file is searched out in the course of entering
particular items.
-it is possible to use "up" and "down" arrows for the switch-over to the next page, "left" and "right"

VIEWER 163
arrows for shifting within a line
9.1.4 Update of remnants

If there are working more SAPSproW on the network and they use a common remnant directory, then
the REFRESH button works following:
If any from the computers changes the remnants, then in every connected SAPS the REFRESH text will
change the color to red, and in the hint to the button will be shown the reason of the change (new
remnant created, old remnant was erased, the number of pieces was changed).
9.2 Display...
9.2.1 Display geometry of all parts
-click at the button of the "Label"drop-down list
-click at the line with the "*" character
9.2.2 Display geometry of particular parts

-click at the button of the "Label" drop-down list
-click at the needed line of the roller blind. It will display GEO-files of the parts that have the same label
in the PARTS chart as the chosen line of the "Label" drop-down list.
-if you click "*" sign as label in the drop-down list, then all existing parts mentioned in the PARTS chart
will be displayed, regardless how the parts are labeled in the chart
-if you click "?" sign as label in the drop-down list, then only the parts of the thickness and quality equal
to the active cutting layout on the screen will be displayed
-after the end of the label's text can You type the * character (group selection)
9.2.3 Display a particular page

-it is possible to write the ordinal number of the page into the input box, or click at the input box buttons
-the first page can be set up with button
-the last one with button
The VIEWER can remember the number of the last set page. After a new start this remembered page
will be displayed. Follow this technique:
-set up the needed page number in the input box
-click at and then at .
9.2.4 Display various files

-click at the type of file GEO, VYK, DXF or NCP.
Note:
After the NCP choice the VIEWER reads and displays NC-cutting programs in ESSI format. After
clicking at a picture it will display the cutting layout from which the NC-program was created.
9.2.5 Display nonzero parts

If the "Even zero" switch-over :
- is switched on, the VIEWER shows parts with actual zero number of pieces as well
- is switched off, in the "Label" drop-down list there is not label of the parts, that have a zero number of
pieces
- is switched off, the VIEWER shows only a text heading at the parts with a zero number of pieces, let
´s say it will show nothing after a choice of a new directory or after listing. Continuously the zero
number of pieces goes down and the number of pages displayed by the VIEWER goes down as well.
9.2.6 Lock
If you tick it, the VIEWER will remember the number of the actual, just visible page. This page will be
automatically displayed after a new start of the VIEWER. Each kind of files can have a different
remembered page.

164 SAPSproW v19
9.3 For SAPSW...

9.3.1 Load a cutting layout
-click at the kind of NCP file
-click at the picture of NC-program, the name of the file will be displayed in the lower input box (input
box without title, under the "Label" drop-down list)
-click in the area for a cutting layout creation
9.3.2 Insert a part into the layout

-click at the kind of GEO file
-click at the picture of the part, the name of the chosen file will be displayed in the lower input box (input
box without title, under the "Label" drop-down list) and the cursor picture will be changed
-click in the area of the actually displayed cutting layout
Note:
A double click at the lower input box with the name of the chosen file or pressing the Esc key will cancel
the choice of the part and "---" signs will be inserted into the input box.
9.3.3 Temporary change of piece count

The not nested pieces can be changed temporarily in the VIEWER. It is efficient in that case, if you
know for advance the count of pieces, which you will to nest. In this case click to the text portion of the
part in the VIEWER, and type the new piece count, at end type ENTER. This temporary piece count will
the SAPS maintain until you save the layout, or change the working directory, or print the layout, or
print preview the layout.
Remark:
You can set back the original piece count, if into the temporary text box do not type any number, only
type the ENTER.
9.4 Setting
9.4.1 Set up the VIEWER
Click at
9.4.2 Number of lines/columns

9.4.2.1 Number of lines
It indicates the number of lines of the drawings where the parts will be displayed.
9.4.2.2 Number of columns
It indicates the number of columns of the drawings where the parts will be displayed.
9.4.2.3 Everything on 1 page
If the check box is checked, the VIEWER will calculate the number of lines and columns so that all files
are displayed only on one page.
9.4.2.4 Max.number
It will determine the maximum number of pictures which the VIEWER can display on one page if the
"Everything on 1 page" check box is checked.
9.4.3 VIEWER : SAPSW

The item indicates the ratio of the height of the working area of the VIEWER window to the height of the
screen. A smaller figure makes the height of the VIEWER window smaller. Apart from the window height
you can also enter the position on the screen in the Y direction. It is possible to determine in this way
that the VIEWER does not hide the Windows program panel with started programs in the lower part of
the screen.

VIEWER 165
9.4.4 Scale for parts

It is possible to set up the way of determination of the scale for picture drawing.
· Maximum, pictures will be drawn in such a scale that the picture is the biggest possible in its
window
· Equal, pictures will be drawn in the equal, maximum possible scale. In this way it is possible to
compare the mutual size of part geometry or of part drawings.
· On the cutting layout, pictures are drawn so if they were in the just displayed cutting layout in
SAPSW window.
9.4.5 Scale for NC-programs

It is possible to set up the way of scale determination for picture drawing.
· Maximum, pictures will be drawn in such a scale that the picture is the biggest possible in its
window
· Equal, pictures will be drawn in the equal, maximum possible scale. In this way it is possible to
compare the mutual size of NC-programs, let´s say cutting cutting layouts.
9.4.6 Distance of pictures

It indicates the mutual distance of windows with file pictures, in screen pixels. The entered value also
indicates the distance of a picture from the window edge.
9.4.7 Display with a zero number

To display also the GEO-parts that have a zero number of pieces (they are of no importance for
inserting into a cutting layout).
9.4.8 Draw endpoints (COPY)

To draw the endpoints at drawing on the whole screen (double click at a picture in the VIEWER).
9.4.9 Sorting
It is possible to set up the sorting mode of parts. It will determine the order of picture depiction, the first
picture is the upper left corner of the VIEWER working area. The order is important for the full
automatic cutting layout creation when the parts are inserted into cutting layouts according to the order
in the VIEWER.
9.4.10 Text under the drawing

9.4.10.1 File name
The name of the file will be displayed in the picture.
9.4.10.2 Drawing number
The number of the drawing is written out in the picture.
9.4.10.3 Act.number
The actual, remaining number of pieces of the part is written out in the picture (pieces that have not
been saved into the cutting layouts).
9.4.10.4 Total number
The total requested number of pieces of the part is written out in the picture.
9.4.10.5 Dimensions
Draw the dimension of the part as well.

Tips and tricks
Chapter
X
Tips and tricks 167
10 Tips and tricks

10.1 Multiply GEO-s
The data (thickness, quality, piece count, etc.) of parts are saved in the GEO files. In VIEWER or on
cutting layout to every sort of part belongs an other GEO file. The files holds the textual data and the
geometrical data of parts. The GEO file can in a specific case hold only data, and instead of the truly
geometry only a reference to an other part. In this way two or more parts can have the same
geometrical form, but their data can be various.
The big advantage is, that with modifying any of part, the form of every referenced part will be changed
too. This suits the need, when in more cutting orders there are some parts with the same geometry, but
with various requested piece count. SAPS can with help of multiply GEO-s control the piece count, and
concurrently automatically follow the changes in the geometry.
The reference to other GEO file can be performed by saving the part in the SCADW module, or in the
REQ file types too. The reference is "#filename" and it should be written into the "drawing number" item.
This way created GEO files will have only 2 lines.
If You call with help of VIEWER into the SCADW a part with reference, then SCADW write out the
names of every part of the same form, and ask to change the form of them, or only to create a new
referenced part.
10.2 Nesting to a remnant plate

A layout can be created to any piece of sheet material you find in your workroom, with any shape, in
case of need with holes as well. Take the measurements of the sheet and draw it in SCADW. Save it as
a ZBY file type. You will nest the layout as a remnant plate.
With button the cutting layout and NC-program was automatically created for the remnant.

168 SAPSproW v19
10.3 Marking on NC-machine without marker

For marking you will use the function of cutting with a reduced NC-machine power.
10.4 Maximal use of NC machine

You try to cut the plate with the maximum possible number of cutting heads in order to use the working
machine time best. On the other hand the use of material at the maximum number of cutting heads is
not always the best. However if you keep trying, you can find such an unsymmetrical spacing of cutting
heads where both the number of cutting heads is high and the use of material is good.

-insert the needed parts of 1 cutting head into the left lower part of the plate (several parts over each
other, into a column)
-choose the whole column by a window (yellow ordinal numbers everywhere)
-click
-click at such a number of cutting heads where the last part in the column of parts overreaches the
plate. In case of need you can correct slightly the distance by a shift button.
-if the result is not good, then try to change the number of parts in the column and change the number
of cutting heads again
-if the result is good, then multiply the column with button (the "Without last" check box should be
checked).
Example:
The dimensions of the plate are 2400x1200 mm, NC-machine has 3 cutting heads. The distance of
cutting heads was calculated for 437 mm. The machine tender can switch off a cutting head while
cutting the last overreaching part.
10.5 Cutting without scrap

Sometimes it is possible to save material if a smaller part is inserted without gaps into a bigger part.
Typical examples:
-cutting 2 flanges which are inserted into each other
-sides of a canister where there is a hole for a little door. The little door arises automatically after the
hole cutting.

-draw the parts in SCADW in the composed position as you want it to be cut
-interrupt the inner contour somewhere in the length equal with the half of the kerf (e.g.by shortening an
abscissa, with function)
At saving to GEO SCADW will identify the inner contour as a profile, therefore at NC-program creation
SAPSW will not create a lead-in or a lead-out for this contour, and it will not even switch on the kerf
compensation. The dimensions of both parts around the joint contour are smaller by 1/2 kerf, if it makes
any problems then it is necessary to compensate it with a change of parts geometry.

Tips and tricks 169
10.6 Cutting flanges

On machines with oxyfuel cutting there is a problem to cut long and narrow flanges from a thin material
because of screwy deflection of material. Sometimes it is possible to use stitches for handling flanges, a
disadvantage is the necessity to cut them off manually.
Flanges can be cut also as profiles which you draw in SCADW. Follow this technique:
-call out SCADW and click
-check the "With a frame" check box
-enter the data of NumberX=1, NumberY=number of stripes, Length=length+kerf, Width=(width+kerf)
*number of stripes
-shorten the inner abscissas approximately by a half of the kerf (with the button for lengthening/
shortening )
-shorten one side of the outer contour (or interrupt somewhere the outer contour approximately by a
half of the kerf), otherwise SAPSW would cut the outer contour with the compensation of the kerf
-save in GEO
For plasma or water ray separation it is possible to create flanges in an easier way. Click at icon,
check "Flanges", enter numbers and dimensions. An example of a part created in SCADW:
NC-program created in SAPSW:
10.7 "Break off" parts

Little parts which tend to disappear in a workroom at cutting and after cutting can be connected with a
bridge. That way they stay together and if the width of the bridge is smaller then it is possible to break
off a needed number of pieces in the case of need.

170 SAPSproW v19
10.8 Lead-ins in holes

At drawing parts in SCADW program there is not usually necessary and advantageous to put lead-ins in
the drawing. It is advantageous only in that case, when a part has a lot of small or narrow holes and the
automatic creation of lead-ins in the course of the cutting layout creation could not create lead-ins
because of their technologically requested length. An interactive creation of the lead-in in the cutting
layout is always possible but it would be uncomfortable for e.g.a part with 20 holes and 10 pieces to
enter 200 lead-ins interactively on the plate. That is why you should draw lead-ins in the case of small or
narrow holes in SCADW, and the lead-ins will then automatically appear in the cutting layout and in NC-
program.
10.9 Change of the plate, without setting-up

If the working desk of NC-machine is equipped with stops for a precise plate positioning, then it is
possible to take advantage of the SAPSW function for the automatic depart of the portal. Having chosen
this function SAPSW will generate into NC-program a depart of the machine portal with cutting heads
into a safe position before putting the plate off and setting a new plate (depart of the machine, taking the
cut part or plate out, compensation with a new part or plate and then an automatic setting of the
machine in the beginning cutting point).
10.10 Construction change of a part, searching layouts

In practise there are often construction changes in parts, which has an influence then on the ready NC-
programs. The cutting layouts, where the part is situated, can be easily searched out either for one part
or for a whole group of parts as well. SAPSproW will automatically show the changes of geometry in all
cutting layouts and all NC-programs where the parts is situated. The previous technology of cutting will
be changed if there are changes in geometry (SAPSW sometimes keeps the original technology for the
outer contour) and it is necessary to set up the technology of cutting according to the new geometry of
the part.
10.11 How to spare on jets

The least possible number of lead-ins on the plate helps to reduce jet costs. That is why you should use
chain cuttings by cutting among parts (with oxyfuel cutting you can sometimes even save time this way).
The automatic way of chain cutting is a tree chain cutting, which can be easily created. For example
the chain cutting in the second picture arose from the first picture only by two mouse clicks.

Tips and tricks 171
10.12 Drawing documentation

SAPSW creates a detailed documentation for each NC-program, which contains a drawing, various
information about material, parts, use and price of cutting. You can let the drawing export instead of
printing in a DXF file form. This file can be then loaded into any drawing program (e.g.AUTOCAD),
which means it is easy to draw various production signs or other requested specific graphic elements
into the drawing.
10.13 Group import of DXF-files

Especially DXF-files can be easily imported into SAPSproW, in the case you keep to the rule that there
is only one part in one DXF-drawing. Call out the window for the import of outer DXF-files and click .
Information about particular parts can be entered continuously in the window. In the case of a group
import there is not possible to change the order of holes at saving into GEO, the order will be automatic.
Note:
It is advantageous to write information about parts with a TEXT command straight into the DXF-file
(SCADW help, Program control, Loading a program from the VIEWER). Then it is necessary to press
only ENTER for the import of parts.
10.14 Remnant plates

In SAPSW there is possible to let create automatically remnant plates and offer them for a creation of
new cutting layouts. But even in the case that NC-program was not created in SAPSproW, thus there is
no other information except NC-file itself, a remnant plate can be created.

-import NC program into SAPSW
-export NC-program from the print window into DXF format
-correct the DXF file into the remnant plate shape and save into the RES type file
Correction method:
Erase the useless lines on the left side of the drawing and connect the needed points on the right side
into the shape of the left side of the remnant plate with help of the angle line function (in SCADW it is
function). If the NC-program is not too difficult (it has less than 15000 sections), then use directly
SCADW from SAPSproW for the correction. Otherwise use e.g.AUTOCAD for erasing the lines, only
then load the corrected DXF into SCADW.
10.15 Separation of the remnant plate from the scrap

SAPSW enables separation of the remnant plate from the scrap quite automatically or semi-
automatically according to the current need of the programmer. In both cases SAPSW will generate
commands into NC-program for cutting off the remnant plate from the scrap. The remnant plate can be
then given back to the stockroom and later used for a new cutting layout creation and a new NC-
program cutting. The broken contour of the left side of the remnant plate can be influenced.
10.16 Program language

In the "Shape" tab in the settings of SAPSW program you can dynamically switch among several
languages. All texts which SAPSproW writes out uses are concentrated in the LOKALIZ.TXT text file.

172 SAPSproW v19
The file can be corrected with any editor and the texts in SAPSproW will be changed.
Text changes:
-start SAPSW
-start the text editor and load LOKALIZ.TXT in it
-search out the text in the editor and correct it
-save the corrected LOKALIZ.TXT in the editor, but if there are more corrections, do not finish the
editor
-switch on another language in SAPSW and switch on the previous one immediately. This way the
corrected LOKALIZ.TXT will be loaded into SAPSproW and you can see the changes immediately in
the SAPSproW environment
Addition of a new language into SAPSproW:

-start SAPSW
-in the "Look" side in the settings set the language you want to use as the referential one for the addition
of a new language
-click at the "New language" button. SAPSW will arrange LOKALIZ.TXT so that it will add new lines in
the chosen referential language. SAPSW inserts the "qqq-" characters in front of each line for an easy
finding of the lines which are to be translated
-finish SAPSW
-after finishing SAPSW follow like in the case of "Text changes", correct each line which starts with the
"qqq-" characters
10.17 Creation of parts from NC-program

Even in the case there is only one NC-program available we are able to change the plate dimensions or
the number or position of parts on the plate:
-import NC-program
-click at the button on the basic side
-in the print setting, on the "Layout's drawing" tab there is advantageous to uncheck the "Cutting
direction" check box. Then click at "DXF" button for the export of the drawing into the file
-load the newly created DXF-file into SCADW or into AUTOCAD and create DXF files of particular
parts by erasing unneeded parts and successive saving into files
-load DXF files into SCADW and save them into GEO format for cutting on the NC-machine
-create a new cutting layout and a new NC program
10.18 Corner renewal

The corner of the part disappears at drawing the part in SCADW after using the functions for corner
fillet, splay or chip ( , or ). It is easy to refresh the corner for the part control or dimensioning with
help of the intersection function (at first click , then the button of helping "yellow" lines, then click at
the first and afterwards at the second section). The original corner may be created by any combination
of abscissas and arcs. The new corner created from the helping lines needn´t be erased before saving
into GEO or VYK. But it can be erased because even afterwards there stays the helping point.
10.19 Complex common edge cutting

The aim is to cut as little as possible and that is why we usually use common edge cuttings, where the
common edge is one abscissa. Sometimes it is possible to put parts to each other so that one complex
common edge arises, compound of several abscissas or arcs. This way can also shorten the cutting
time.
Follow this way:

-call out the first part in SCADW on the screen
-call out the second part, when questioned answer "No" (in order not to erase the first part)
-erase a group of lines in the common edge of one part (otherwise they would be twice one on
another)

Tips and tricks 173
-arrange the position of parts with help of and buttons so that they create a unit for cutting
-the common edge, in the points where it makes a connection with both parts at both ends, must be
interrupted after the length equal with approximately a half of the kerf (e.g.by shortening the abscissa,
by function)
-save the part
A part drawn this way will be cut firstly in the place of the common edge without compensation, and then
on the contour of both parts with the compensation of the kerf. There can be compound several parts in
one unit in SCADW, not only two. Dimensions of the parts around the joint contour are smaller by a half
of the cutting kerf, if it makes any problems then it is necessary to compensate by a change of the part
geometry.
Example:
The third part is compound of the first two parts, the fourth one is 2 flanges.
10.20 Plate edges utilization

If you have a plate with quality sides (or with straight sides), you can shorten the length of cutting if you
situate the part with the straight edge exactly on the edge of the plate. Choose the lead-in point closely
towards the edge of the plate or start cutting straight from the edge of the plate. It also depends on the
right direction of cutting.

The name of the working directory is free selectable. If the name start with a number or is only a
number, then at saving the part's geometry to GEO format, the thickness text box will be automatically
set to the selected number. I.e. for the working directory name 12CATER100 the value of the thickness
is 12 mm.

ProWv Eng PDF

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

ProWv Eng PDF

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

SAPSproW v19

programming of NC cutting machines

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Chapter III First steps 29

Chapter IV What is it? 33

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Chapter V How to use? 45

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copy and correct

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Chapter VII SAPSW 92

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Chapter VIII SCADW 133

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Chapter IX VIEWER 162

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Chapter X Tips and tricks 167

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

SAPSproW consists of 4 main program modules:

1.3 Terminology, user interface

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

1.4 Programs in SAPSproW

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

1.4.2 SCADW module

1.4.3 TABLES module

1.4.4 VIEWER module

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

2.4.2 Before the first start of SAPSproW

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

Window dimensions on the screen:

2.4.3 SAPSproW windows on more monitors

2.4.4 The USERSPECIFIC.TXT file

When the computer is not connected to the Internet:

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

3.2 Recalling of the last nesting layout

3.3 Automatic creation of lead-ins

3.4 Autom. determ. of the cutting order

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

3.5 Change of SAPSW setup

3.6 Change of lead-ins in the whole nesting layout

3.7 Automatic nesting

3.8 Work with a table

3.9 Technologic-economical data

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

3.10 Interactive nesting

3.11 Recalling of an old layout

3.12 Addition of parts

Copyright © 2009 ANTAL Software EHTi

4.2 Working directory

4.3 Standard data

4.4 Labeling of parts